Road Racing
272
ROAD RACING
AUTO CYCLE UNION HANDBOOK 2015
Road Racing
Standing Regulations
AUTO CYCLE UNION HANDBOOK 2015
ROAD RACING
273
SECTION 1 MEETINGS
1.1
Categories of Meetings277
1.2International277
1.3
European Open277
1.4National277
1.5Open277
1.6Restricted277
1.7
Eligibility of Foreign Riders in Open and Restricted Meetings278
1.8
Practice Meetings and Test Days278
1.9
Conditions for Road Race Meetings278
1.10
Force Majeure278
SECTION 2 LICENCES – COMPETITORS
2.1General278
2.2Grades278
2.3
Lapsed Licences279
2.4
Capacity and Licence Restrictions280
2.5
Racing on Closed Public Roads281
2.6
Isle of Man Mountain Course Licence281
SECTION 3 LICENCES AND REGISTRATIONS – OFFICIALS
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
Qualifications and Conditions282
Road Race Officials who require a Licence282
Grades for Clerk of the Course282
Road Race Officials who do not require a Licence284
SECTION 4 PRACTICE
4.1Time must be put aside for the practice sessions and these must be defined in the
Supplementary Regulations for the meeting.284
SECTION 5 GRID POSITIONS
5.1Positions284
5.2
Timed Practice285
5.3Balloted285
5.4Allocated285
SECTION 6 START PROCEDURES
6.1
6.2
6.3
6.4
6.5
Group Starts285
Interval Starts285
Clubmans Races285
National Races286
Anticipation of the Start286
SECTION 7 FLAGS AND LIGHTS
7.1
7.2
7.3
7.4
7.5
7.6
Flags and Lights used to provide Information286
Flags used to convey Information and Instructions288
Flag Dimensions289
Flag Colours289
Flag Marshals Posts289
Marshals Overalls289
274
ROAD RACING
AUTO CYCLE UNION HANDBOOK 2015
SECTION 8 BEHAVIOUR DURING PRACTICE AND RACE
8.1
Riders must obey the flag signals, the light signals, and the boards289
8.2Protests291
SECTION 9 NEUTRALISATION OF RACES – SAFETY CAR
291
SECTION 10 INTERRUPTION OF A RACE
292
SECTION 11 RE-STARTING A RACE THAT HAS BEEN INTERRUPTED293
SECTION 12 FINISH OF A RACE AND RACE RESULTS
12.1
12.2
12.3
Finish of a Race293
The Chequered Flag293
Race Results294
SECTION 13 SAFETY
13.1
13.2
13.3
13.4
13.5
13.6
13.7
13.8
Medical Services – Minimum requirements for Road Race Meetings294
Track Safety Precautions295
Fire Extinguishers296
Fire Extinguishers at Circuits296
Warning and Prohibition Signs at Circuits296
Declaration – Admission Tickets, Armbands and Passes297
Declaration on the Official Programme297
Signing On297
SECTION 14 GENERAL TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
14.1
Protective Clothing297
14.2Helmets298
14.3
Identification Discs298
14.4
Body Jewellery298
14.5
Engine and Frame Numbers298
14.6Fuel298
14.7
Number Plates299
14.8
Control of Exhaust Sound Level300
14.9
Exhaust Pipes301
14.10Superchargers/Turbochargers302
14.11Handlebars302
14.12 Clutch and Brake Levers302
14.13Mudguards302
14.14 Open Transmission Guards303
14.15Footrests303
14.16 Oil Supply Pipes303
14.17 Oil Catch Tanks & Breather Systems303
14.18 Petrol and Oil Filler Caps303
14.19 Petrol Tank Breathers303
14.20Construction303
14.21 Additives to Water in Radiators303
14.22Brakes303
14.23 Technical Control304
AUTO CYCLE UNION HANDBOOK 2015
ROAD RACING
275
SECTION 15 SOLO SPECIFICATIONS
15.1
Size of Wheel Rims and Tyres304
15.2
Type of Tyres including the use of Slick Tyres in Club Meetings304
15.3
Treaded Tyres305
15.4
Tubeless Tyres305
15.5
Slick Tyres305
15.6Streamlining305
15.7Inclination306
15.8Brakes306
15.9
Oil Containment306
15.10 RED REAR WARNING LIGHTS306
SECTION 16 SOLO ELIGIBILITY SPECIFICATIONS
16.1
16.2
16.3
16.4
16.5
16.6
ACU Production Classes306
Formula Specifications307
ACU Supersport Regulations307
ACU/FIM Specifications for Superbike307
ACU Stocksport/Superstock Regulations307
ACU Superstock 600307
SECTION 17 SIDECAR SPECIFICATIONS
17.1
17.2
17.3
GROUPS B1 AND B2 – General308
GROUP B3 (CYCLECARS) – General310
GROUP B1, B2 and B3 Technical Specifications310
SECTION 18 OPEN 600 AND FORMULA II SIDECAR
SPECIFICATIONS
18.1
Engine Types312
18.2
General Construction313
18.3
Engine Position314
18.4Dimensions314
18.5
Streamlining and Bodywork314
18.6
Passenger Platform315
18.7
Air Intakes315
18.8
Oil and Coolant Containment315
18.9Airbox316
18.10 Oil Catch Tanks316
18.11Wheels316
18.12Steering316
18.13 Throttle Controls316
18.14 Control Levers316
18.15Brakes316
18.16Tyres317
18.17 Mudguards and Wheel Protection317
18.18 Exhaust Pipes317
18.19 Fuel Tank317
18.20Battery317
18.21 Cut out Device317
18.22 Red Warning Light318
18.23 Traction Control318
18.24 Rear View Mirror318
276
ROAD RACING
AUTO CYCLE UNION HANDBOOK 2015
SECTION 19 FORMULA 1 SIDECAR SPECIFICATION
19.1
Engine Specifications318
19.2Engine319
19.3Dimensions319
19.4Steering319
19.5Suspension319
19.6
Wheel Protection319
19.7Exhaust319
SECTION 20 PARADES AT ACU/MCRCB ROAD RACE MEETINGS
20.1Introduction320
20.2Organisation320
20.3
PR5 – Spectator Parades – Speed Controlled320
20.4
PR6 Classic Machine and/or Rider Parades321
SECTION 21 ORGANISATION OF OFFICIAL TEST DAYS
21.1Organisation323
21.2Insurance323
21.3
Medical Cover323
21.4Officials324
21.5Riders324
21.6
Junior Riders324
21.7
Technical Control324
21.8
On Circuit Control324
21.9Circuit324
Road Race Motorycle
324
AUTO CYCLE UNION HANDBOOK 2015
ROAD RACING
277
SECTION 1 MEETINGS
1.1 CATEGORIES OF MEETINGS
•
International Meetings
•
European Open Meetings
•
National Meetings
•
Open Meetings
•
Restricted Meetings
Permits for all Road Race competitions are issued by ACU Headquarters
1.2INTERNATIONAL
1.
The Permit shall be issued by the ACU Headquarters for a meeting inscribed on the
International Calendar of the FIM and having an FIM International Meeting Number (IMN).
2.
An International meeting is open to Entrants and Riders of more than one nation who must
hold an International Licence or a National Licence issued by the ACU valid for the particular
meeting concerned.
3.
All riders not holding a Licence issued by the ACU or SACU must carry proof of Insurance and
a written Start Permission document issued by their FMN.
Note: This includes all riders holding a licence issued by the MCUI.
1.3 EUROPEAN OPEN
1.
The permit shall be issued by ACU Headquarters for a meeting inscribed on the Calendar of the
Fédération Internationale de Motocyclisme Europe (FIME) and having a European Meeting
Number (EMN).
2.
A European Open meeting is open to Entrants and Riders of more than one European
nation who must hold the appropriate Competition Licence valid for the particular meeting
concerned.
3.
All riders not holding a Licence issued by the ACU or SACU must carry proof of Insurance and
a written Start Permission document issued by their FMN.
Note: This includes all riders holding a licence issued by the MCUI.
1.4NATIONAL
1.
The Permit shall be issued by the ACU Headquarters.
2.
A National meeting is open to Entrants and Riders who are the holders of a National or
International Licence valid for the particular meeting concerned issued by any Federation.
3.
All riders not holding a Licence issued by the ACU or SACU must carry proof of Insurance and
a written Start Permission document issued by their FMN.
Note: This includes all riders holding a licence issued by the MCUI.
1.5OPEN
1.
An Open permit is issued by ACU Headquarters.
2.
An Open meeting is open to Entrants and Riders who hold a valid ACU or SACU Licence for
the meeting concerned.
1.6RESTRICTED
1.
A Restricted Permit is issued by ACU Headquarters.
2.
A Restricted meeting is open to Entrants and Riders who hold a current ACU or SACU Licence
valid for the meeting concerned.
3.
The Supplementary Regulations issued for the event must specify all restrictions and
requirements of eligibility.
278
ROAD RACING
AUTO CYCLE UNION HANDBOOK 2015
1.7 ELIGIBILITY OF FOREIGN RIDERS IN OPEN AND RESTRICTED MEETINGS
1.
The Supplementary Regulations issued for the event must specify the licence qualification and
eligibility requirements of foreign riders.
2.
All riders must have a current Licence and Start Permission from their own Federation valid
for the event.
1.8PRACTICE MEETINGS AND TEST DAYS
1.
Permits for Practice Meetings and Test Days may be issued on application to the Permit Issuing
Authority.
2.
No such event may be held unless the appropriate Permit and Insurance has been issued.
1.9 CONDITIONS FOR ROAD RACE MEETINGS
1.
The ACU Road Race Committee must approve the Organiser.
2.
The Venue must hold a current Track Licence or Track Certificate issued by the ACU Road
Race Committee.
3.
The ACU Secretariat must approve the Supplementary Regulations for the event and issue an
ACU Permit prior to publication and circulation.
4.
For all ACU Championships an ACU decal, supplied by the ACU Secretariat, must be
displayed on the front number plate of each machine. Any rider not complying will be
disqualified from the results of the race.
5.
The Race Control must remain operative with all equipment in place until the end of the period
provided for the lodging of a protest, and all officials and marshals must remain at the circuit
and available to the Clerk of the Course and the Stewards during that period.
1.10 FORCE MAJEURE
The Clerk of the Course has the right to alter, abandon, cancel or postpone all or any part of a
meeting for reasons of force majeure. Such a decision shall not be subject to any protest.
SECTION 2 LICENCES – COMPETITORS
2.1GENERAL
1.
To participate in road race events an annual Licence issued by the ACU is required. Residents
in Scotland apply to the Scottish ACU.
2.
All first time applicants are required to complete a classroom based ACU Competitor Training
Course. Riders and Sidecar Drivers must also satisfactorily complete an ACU Basic Rider
Assessment. Full details from the ACU Road Race Department.
3.
Novice/Intermediate Novice competitors are required to wear an Orange Vest obtainable from
the ACU Licence Department.
4.
Sidecar passengers must hold a valid passenger licence.
5.
The parent or Legal Guardian must accompany all competitors, or participants in parades,
under 18 years of age to every meeting. This person must attend at signing-on, any riders
briefings that take place and be present throughout the meeting.
6.
Any competitor who in any ACU or MCRCB Permitted Event participates on a machine for
which he/she is not eligible through age or licence restrictions to take part on will be penalised
by a fine of £500.00 and a suspension for one year from the date of the hearing.
2.2GRADES
1.
Parade A licence facilitating participation in non-competitive parades.
2.
Novice. Entry level for all first time applicants, an Intermediate Novice licence will be issued to
riders who hold a current Full Class “A” DVLA Licence. Novice Licence holders are required to
wear an Orange Vest obtainable from the ACU Licence Department.
AUTO CYCLE UNION HANDBOOK 2015
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
ROAD RACING
279
Clubman. Novice/Intermediate Novice licence holders who have obtained Satisfactory
signatures on their record card for a minimum of 10 separate Race Days at 3 different circuits
during the current year and preceding 2 years may apply to upgrade to Clubman. To obtain a
satisfactory signature Competitors must appear in the official race results as a finisher of a race
in accordance with Article 12.3.3 of the Road Race Standing Regulations. Only one signature
per race day. The competitor record card together with copies of the official result sheets for the
signatures should be submitted to the ACU Road Race Department.
National. Clubman competitors who have obtained upgrade signatures for a minimum of 10
separate Race Days at 3 different circuits during the current year and preceding 2 years may
apply to be upgraded to a National Licence. To obtain an upgrade signature Competitors must
appear in the official result sheets as having finished the race within 110% of the winners time
for the race and having completed the same number of laps as the winner. Only one signature
per race day will be awarded with the exception of results from Endurance meetings. Where a
rider competes in an Endurance race of 3 hrs or more duration 2 signatures will be awarded if
the Team completes at least 90% of the number of laps completed by the Race/Class winner.
The competitor record card together with copies of the official result sheets for the signatures
should be submitted to the ACU Road Race Department
National Licence holders may apply for Start Permission to compete abroad.
International National licences holders who have held their National Licence for 12 months
and who have competed at a minimum of 6 meetings in the previous 12 months may apply for
an FIM Non-Championship International licence. The Competitor record card and copies of
result sheets should be submitted to the ACU Road Race Department.
A satisfactory medical examination is required before an FIM Non-Championship
International licence can be issued (Eye Sight and Medical Report sections of the ACU
Competition Licence Application Form).
International Championship National licences holders who have held their National Licence
for 12 months and who have competed at a minimum of 6 meetings in the previous 12 months
may apply for a Championship licence as described in the appropriate Sporting Code of the
FIME or FIM. The Competitor record card and/or copies of result sheets should be submitted
to the ACU Road Race Department.
A satisfactory medical examination is required before an International Championship Licence
can be issued (Eye Sight and Medical Report sections of the ACU Competition Licence
Application Form).
A Licence can be upgraded at any time during the year.
2.3 LAPSED LICENCES
Lapsed Novice and Intermediate Novice Licence holders who have allowed their licence to lapse
for more than five years will be required to complete the Basic Rider Assessment and Competitor
Training Course before resuming competition at Novice/Intermediate Novice grade.
Lapsed Clubman, National and International licence holders who have allowed their licence to lapse
for five years or more, will be required to complete the Competitor Training Course before resuming
competition at Clubman grade.
280
ROAD RACING
AUTO CYCLE UNION HANDBOOK 2015
2.4 CAPACITY AND LICENCE RESTRICTIONS
SOLO MACHINES
Age
Licence
11 Years
Novice or Clubman or
National
12 years
Novice or Clubman or
National
13 Years
Novice or Clubman or
National
13 years
National
14 years
Novice or Clubman or
National
14 years
National
15 years
Novice or Clubman or
National
16 years
Novice or Clubman or
National
16 years
National
17 years
Novice or Clubman or
National
17 years
18 years
National
Novice
18 years
Int-Novice** Clubman
or National
Machine
Up to 125cc Automatic Production Scooter
Up to 80cc GP specification machine (treaded tyres)
Up to 125cc Production based machine
Up to 250cc single cylinder 4 stroke Production machines
(restricted)
Up to 125cc Automatic Production Scooter
Up to 80cc GP specification machine
Up to 125cc Production based machine
Up to 305cc single or twin cylinder 4 stroke Production machines
(restricted to maximum 37hp)
Up to 390cc Single cylinder 4 stroke Production machine
(restricted)
Up to 125cc GP specification machine
Up to 250cc 4-stroke single cylinder machine (unrestricted)
Up to 125cc GP specification machine
Up to 250cc 4-stroke single or twin cylinder machine
(unrestricted)
Up to Formula 400 specification or 450cc Production based
machine
Up to 500cc single or twin cylinder 4-stroke machine
Up to 650cc twin cylinder 4-stroke Production based machine
Up to Formula 400 specification or 450cc Production based
machine
Up to 500cc single or twin cylinder 4-stroke machine
Up to 650cc single or twin cylinder 4-stroke Production based
machine
Up to Formula 400 specification or 450cc Production based
machine
Up to 500cc single or twin cylinder 4-stroke machine
Up to 650cc single or twin cylinder 4-stroke Production based
machine
Any classic or Vintage machine
Up to Formula 600 or Supersport 600 specification machine
675cc 3 cylinder 4 stroke Production based machine
Up to 250cc Grand Prix Machine
Any classic or Vintage machine
Up to Formula 600 or Supersport 600 specification machine
675cc 3 cylinder 4 stroke Production based machine
Up to 250cc Grand Prix Machine
Unlimited capacity machine
Any classic or Vintage machine 650cc
Up to Formula 600 or Supersport 600 specification machine
675cc 3 cylinder 4 stroke Production based machine
Up to 250cc Grand Prix Machine
Unlimited capacity machine
**Intermediate Novice Licence holder with “A” validation for riders holding a Full Class “A” DVLA Licence
ROAD RACING
AUTO CYCLE UNION HANDBOOK 2015
281
SIDECAR AND THREE-WHEELER MACHINES
Age
Licence
Machine
Driver
17 years
Novice or Clubman or F2, F350, Classic, Vintage, Morgan Three Wheeler
National
Unlimited 4-stroke or 2-stroke machine
Passenger
16 Years
Novice or Clubman or F2, F350, Classic, Vintage, Morgan Three Wheeler
National
Unlimited 4-stroke or 2-stroke machine
PARADE
Age
Licence
14–70 years Single Grade
Machine
All Classes
2.5 RACING ON CLOSED PUBLIC ROADS
The minimum grade of licence required for racing on Closed Public Roads is a National Licence and
riders must be 18 years of age or over.
2.6 ISLE OF MAN MOUNTAIN COURSE LICENCE
An Isle of Man Course Licence (price £25 in addition to any other Licence Fee) issued by the ACU
Road Race Department – Rugby is required for all competitors of any Nationality wishing to take part
in any event to be held on the Isle of Man Mountain Circuit.
1
2015 Isle of Man TT Races
This licence is a requirement for all competitors who wish to take part in the 2015 Isle of Man
TT Races.
1.
Eligibility: All applicants except holders of an FIM International licence or an MCUI National
Licence must provide a satisfactory medical report. (FIM & MCUI licence holders having
already supplied such reports)
2.
ACU and SACU licence holders must have held a National licence for Road Racing for a
minimum of 12 months prior to the closing date for entries.
3.
Competitors from other FMNs must have held an FIM International Non-Championship
licence for Road Racing for a minimum of 12 months prior to the closing date for entries.
4.
Official Result sheets confirming the following requirements must be supplied with the
application:
1. All applicants must have competed satisfactorily in at least 6 Road Race days in the period of
31st March 2014 to 8th May 2015.
2. A minimum of 2 of the 6 required race days must be in the 2015 season.
3. One result will be permitted from each racing day of a short circuit Road Race Meeting to a
maximum of 2 per meeting.
4. One result will be permitted from each racing day of a Closed Public Road Race circuit
meeting to a maximum of 2.
5. Qualifying for the 2014 TT or Manx GP races will count as one race day and finishing in a
2014 TT or Manx GP race will count as a second race day. A competitor who competes in both
the TT and Manx GP may count a maximum of three results towards the six required results.
5.
Closing date for the receipt of completed Licence application forms at ACU House, Rugby:
13th May 2014.
2
2015 Manx Grand Prix and Classic TT Races
This licence is a requirement for all competitors who wish to take part in the 2015 Manx Grand
Prix races.
1.
Eligibility: All applicants except holders of an FIM International licence or an MCUI National
282
2
3.
4.
5.
ROAD RACING
AUTO CYCLE UNION HANDBOOK 2015
Licence must provide a satisfactory medical report. (FIM & MCUI licence holders having
already supplied such reports)
ACU and SACU licence holders must have held a National licence for Road Racing for a
minimum of 6 months prior to the start of the event.
Competitors from other FMN’s must have held an FIM International Non-Championship
Road Race Licence issued by their FMN for a minimum of six months prior to the first day of
practising.
Official Result sheets confirming the following requirements must be supplied with the
application:
1. All applicants must have competed satisfactorily in at least 6 Road Race days in the 13
months expiring 30th June 2015.
2. A minimum of 2 of the 6 required race days must be in the 2015 season.
3. One result will be permitted from each racing day of a short circuit Road Race meeting to a
maximum of 2 per meeting.
4. One result will be permitted from each racing day of a Closed Public Road circuit meeting to
a maximum of 2.
5. Qualifying for the 2014 TT or Manx GP races will count as one race day and finishing in a
2014 TT or Manx GP race will count as a second race day. A competitor who competes in both
the TT and Manx GP may count a maximum of three results towards the six required results.
Closing date for the receipt of completed Licence application forms at ACU House, Rugby:
13th July 2015.
SECTION 3 LICENCES AND REGISTRATIONS – OFFICIALS
3.1QUALIFICATIONS AND CONDITIONS
Road Race Officials are divided into two categories: Those that are Licensed and those that are
Registered.
Licences: Senior Road Race Officials are required to hold an ACU Licence of the appropriate Grade
for the performance of their duties.
Registration: A Register is maintained of Officials not required to hold a Licence.
3.2 ROAD RACE OFFICIALS WHO REQUIRE A LICENCE
All the following licences are valid for 3 years
Clerk of the Course
Chief Steward
Chief Technical Officer
Sound Inspector
Measurer
Timekeeper
See Note Below
1
2
3
4
5
Attendance at Seminar/Training Session
Every third year maximum
Every third year maximum
Every third year maximum
Required for First Issue only
Required for First Issue only
Equipment and operators check
ALL LICENCES ISSUED ARE SUBJECT TO THE APPROVAL OF THE ROAD RACE COMMITTEE
Organisers shall only nominate candidates whose aptitude and integrity for the position they can fully
justify. Official ACU approval and the issue of a Licence is only after the candidates have proved to be
competent according to the special requirements for each discipline. The respective Committees and
Panels organise Seminars that are compulsory for certain Officials.
3.3 GRADES FOR CLERK OF THE COURSE
1.
Probationary
Any Organiser may nominate a Probationary Clerk of the Course. The Organiser must be
AUTO CYCLE UNION HANDBOOK 2015
ROAD RACING
283
able to confirm that a candidate has attended at 10 Race Days in an Official capacity before
nominating the candidate to attend a Seminar. A Registered Probationary Official may act as an
Assistant to a Clerk of the Course at a Club Event.
To upgrade from Probationary to National C a registered official must act as an Assistant to
the Clerk of the Course at 10 Meetings and be recommended by the Clerk of the Course at each
meeting. He must be nominated by an Organiser for a specific appointment at a future Event.
2.
National Grade C
A Clerk of the Course who may officiate at a Club Event where the use of slick tyres has NOT
been authorised. May act as Deputy or Assistant Clerk of the Course at below National status
Events where slick tyres have been authorised.
To upgrade from National C to National B a licence holder must officiate as a Deputy to a
National A or National B Clerk of the Course at 10 Events and be recommended by the Clerk
of the Course at each. He must be nominated by an Organiser to take charge of a specific event
where he will be observed by another Senior Official nominated by the Road Race Committee.
3.
National Grade B
A Clerk of the Course who may officiate at a below National status events where slick tyres
HAVE been authorised. May officiate as Deputy to a National Grade A.
To upgrade from National B to National A a Licence holder must officiate as a National B
Clerk of the Course at 5 Events. He must act as Deputy to a National A Clerk of the Course
at 5 Events and be recommended by the Clerk of the Course at each. In addition the Road
Race, Drag and Sprint Committee may appoint a Senior Official to observe him. He must be
nominated by an Organiser to take charge of a specific future Event. First appointment must be
approved by the Road Race Committee.
4.
National Grade A
A Clerk of the Course who may officiate at any event held under an ACU Permit. He may
officiate as Deputy or Assistant at FIM (Non Championship) Events.
Note 1 Clerk of the Course
Age Limits: Licences for Clerks of the Course who have attained their 70th birthday will be reviewed
annually. Officials will be required to satisfactorily attend a seminar annually. The issuing of a licence
will be subject to Road Race Committee approval.
Note 2 Steward
Grades: There is only one grade of Chief Steward’s Licence for all Road Race disciplines. A Chief
Steward of a meeting should not undertake any other duties except Environmental Reporting.
Age Limits: Chief Stewards may not normally officiate beyond the end of the season in which they
attain their 70th birthday. The Road Race, Drag and Sprint Committee will review Stewards who
reach the age of 70 for appointments on an annual basis.
Club Stewards may carry out other duties at a race meeting but they must not adjudicate on matters
where they have a conflict of interest.
Note 3 Chief Technical Officer
The Chief Technical Officer will be licensed by the Technical Panel to be in charge of the Technical
Control at an event. The Technical Panel may restrict the disciplines of licence holders.
Note 4 Measurer
The Measurer is required for ACU National Championships and National events. The Licence is
issued by the Technical Panel and may be restricted by discipline.
Note 5 Timekeepers
Will be required to pay for their Licence.
Licence Fees: All licences (exception Timekeepers licences) will be issued, free of charge, for a period
of three years. No fee will be charged for attendance at Seminars organised by the Road Race Drag
and Sprint Committee or the relevant Panel with the exception of FIM Seminars.
284
ROAD RACING
AUTO CYCLE UNION HANDBOOK 2015
3.4 ROAD RACE OFFICIALS WHO DO NOT REQUIRE A LICENCE
See Note Below Attendance at Seminar/Training Session
1 and 4
May attend Clerk of the Course Seminar at ACU HQ for
information purposes.
Secretary of the Meeting 2 and 4
Will receive Training at meetings and if required at Regional
or ACU HQ Seminars.
Technical Official
Will receive training via the Chief Technical Officer at
meetings May attend Regional Training Seminars
Club Stewards
3
May attend Regional or ACU HQ Seminars for information
purposes
Chief Marshal
May receive training at ACU HQ or Regional Training Days
Marshal
May receive training at Regional Training days and at
meetings via the Chief Marshal
Medical Officer
None required
Incident Officer
Registration of the above officials and marshals will be renewed annually. All such Officials will
receive an appropriate form of identification from the ACU.
Note 1 Incident Officer
Will collate all information and documentation, and prepare reports relating to serious accidents and
to all incidents involving Officials or Spectators.
Note: A Deputy Clerk of the Course may undertake these duties. An Incident Officer may be
nominated to attend a Clerk of the Course Seminar to assist with these duties.
Note 2 Secretary of the Meeting
Will be responsible for all administration connected with the organisation of a meeting.
Note 3 Club Stewards
Stewards of the meeting exercise judicial authority over the running of the meeting according to the
National Sporting Code and Supplementary Regulations.
Note 4 Incident Officer and Secretary of the Meeting Registration
Currently there is no requirement for these officials to be registered for Road Race Disciplines.
SECTION 4 PRACTICE
4.1TIME MUST BE PUT ASIDE FOR THE PRACTICE SESSIONS AND THESE MUST BE
DEFINED IN THE SUPPLEMENTARY REGULATIONS FOR THE MEETING.
1.
Riders will commence practice under the instructions of the Start Officials.
2.
The duration of each practice session will commence from the time the pit lane opens and will
finish (chequered flag) not less than 10 minutes later.
3.
The end of practice will be indicated by the waving of a chequered flag at which time the pit exit
will be closed. A rider’s time will continue to be recorded until he passes the finish line after the
allotted time has lapsed.
4.
If practice is interrupted due to an incident or any other reason then a red flag will be displayed
at the start line and at marshals posts. All riders must return slowly to the pit lane or as
otherwise instructed by the Marshals under the direction of the Clerk of the Course.
5.
When the practice is restarted the time remaining will be decided by the Clerk of the Course.
SECTION 5 GRID POSITIONS
5.1POSITIONS
1.
Pole position, and the configuration of the grid, will be determined at the time of the Track
Inspection.
AUTO CYCLE UNION HANDBOOK 2015
2.
ROAD RACING
285
Grid positions will be established according to the provisions of the Supplementary
Regulations.
5.2 TIMED PRACTICE
Where timed practice is used and identical times are recorded by more than one rider in the official
qualifying practice session for the race the rider first setting such a time will receive the better starting
position.
A qualifying maxima may be specified in the Supplementary Regulations.
5.3BALLOTED
Where the Organiser decides that the grid positions will be by ballot this must be conducted by the
competitors at the meeting.
5.4ALLOCATED
Organisers wishing to allocate grid position will specify this and the method to be adopted in the
Supplementary Regulations.
SECTION 6 START PROCEDURES
Races may be started by one of the following methods:
6.1 GROUP STARTS
Which include the 45 degree echelon line up known as the Le Mans start.
6.2 INTERVAL STARTS
Where competitors are started individually or in groups at pre-determined intervals.
Starts may be made with engines running or engines stopped. For starts with engines stopped the
Supplementary Regulations for the race must specify the authorised method of starting.
6.3 CLUBMANS RACES
1.
Riders collect in the Assembly Area and proceed when directed to the Grid to take up their
allocated Grid positions.
2.
An Official will signal all the Riders to proceed on a warm-up lap (of the circuit being used for
the race) by waving a Green Flag. On completion of the warm-up lap the riders each return to
their allocated Grid positions.
3.
Riders who do not go on to the Grid may join the warm-up lap from the Pit Lane on the
instruction of the Officials, but in this case must start the race from the back of the Grid.
4.
On the completion of the warm-up lap an Official will display a Red Flag at the front of the
Grid.
5.
When the grid is re-formed the Official with the Red Flag will leave the Grid indicating to the
Riders that the race is about to commence.
6.
Any Rider who stalls his engine on the Grid, or who has other difficulties, must remain on
his motorcycle and raise an arm. It is not permitted to attempt to delay the start by any other
means.
7.
A Red light will be displayed for up to 5 seconds. The Red Light will then be extinguished to
start the race. Alternatively, the National Flag may be lowered to start the race.
8.
After the Riders have passed the exit of the Pit Lane any Riders waiting there may be permitted
to join the race at the discretion of the Clerk of the Course and under the instructions of the
Officials.
9.
Should there be a problem on the Grid, the Starter may display a Yellow Flag or Yellow lights
to indicate a delayed start. The Clerk of the Course may decide that the Riders will complete
another warm-up lap and the race distance may be reduced.
286
ROAD RACING
AUTO CYCLE UNION HANDBOOK 2015
6.4 NATIONAL RACES
1.
Riders proceed as directed to the Grid upon the opening of the Pit Lane and take up their
starting positions.
2.
Riders take up their allocated positions on the Grid. Riders who encounter technical problems
must go to the Pit Lane to make adjustments or to change machines.
3.
Two minutes before the start of the race the Starter will signal all the Riders to proceed on a
warm-up lap by waving a Green Flag. On completion of the warm-up lap the riders each return
to their allocated Grid positions.
4.
Riders not going on to the Grid may join the warm-up lap from the Pit Lane on the instructions
of the Officials but in this case must start the race from the rear of the Grid.
5.
On completion of the warm-up lap an Official will display a Red Flag at the front of the grid.
6.
When the Grid is re-formed the Official with the Red Flag will leave the track indicating to the
Riders that the race is about to commence.
7.
Any Rider who stalls his engine on the Grid or who has other difficulties must remain on his
motorcycle and raise an arm. It is not permitted to delay the start by any other means.
8.
A Red Signal light will be displayed for up to 5 seconds. The Red Light will then be extinguished
to start the race. Alternatively, the National Flag may be lowered to start the race.
9.
After the Riders have passed the exit to the Pit lane any Riders waiting there may be permitted
to join the race at the discretion of the Clerk of the Course and under the instructions of the
Officials.
10. Should there be a problem on the Grid, the Starter may display a Yellow Flag or Yellow lights
to indicate a delayed start. Riders will stop engines. One assistant per team may enter the grid
to assist the competitors. The Rider(s) responsible for the delay will start from the back of the
Grid. The Riders will complete another warm-up lap and the race distance will be reduced by
one lap.
6.5 ANTICIPATION OF THE START
1.
Anticipation of the Start is defined as when the motorcycle is moving forward when the Red
Lights are on.
2.
Any Competitor who takes up an incorrect Grid position will be judged to have anticipated the
Start.
3.
The Clerk of the Course will award a Time Penalty of up to 20 seconds to any Rider who
anticipated the Start. The decision as to an anticipated Start is to be accepted as a Matter of Fact
from which there is no right of Protest.
SECTION 7 FLAGS AND LIGHTS
Marshals and other officials display flags or lights to provide information and/or convey instructions
to the riders:
7.1 FLAGS AND LIGHTS USED TO PROVIDE INFORMATION
1.
1.
NATIONAL FLAG OR START LIGHTS
Signal for the Start of the Race. A Red light will be displayed for up to 5 seconds. The Red Light
will then be extinguished to start the race. Alternatively, the National Flag may be lowered to
start the race.
2.
1.
2.
3.
GREEN FLAG
The track is clear
This flag will be shown waved by the starter to signal the start of the warm up lap.
This flag must be shown motionless at each flag marshal post for the first lap of each practice
session and of the warm up, for the sighting lap(s) and for the warm up lap.
AUTO CYCLE UNION HANDBOOK 2015
ROAD RACING
287
4.
This flag must be shown motionless at the flag marshal post immediately after the incident that
necessitated the use of one or more yellow flags.
3.
1.
2.
YELLOW AND RED STRIPED FLAG
Oil, water or other substance is affecting adhesion on this section of the track.
This flag must be shown motionless at the flag marshal post.
4.
1.
2.
YELLOW AND RED STRIPED FLAG: NATIONAL EVENTS ONLY
The adhesion on this section of the track could be affected by any reason other than rain.
This flag must be shown motionless at the flag marshal post.
5.
1.
2.
WHITE FLAG WITH DIAGONAL RED CROSS: NATIONAL EVENTS ONLY
Drops of rain on this section of the track.
This flag must be shown motionless at the flag marshal post.
6.WHITE FLAG WITH DIAGONAL RED CROSS + YELLOW AND RED STRIPED FLAG:
NATIONAL EVENTS ONLY
1.
Rain on this section of the track.
2.
These flags must be shown together motionless at the flag marshal post.
7.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
BLUE FLAG
National events and above. The use of this flag is optional at meetings of lower than National
Status.
May be shown waved, this flag indicates that a faster rider is about to overtake.
Shown waved at the flag marshal post, this flag indicates to a rider that he is about to be
overtaken.
During the practice sessions, the rider concerned must keep his line and slow down gradually
to allow the faster rider to pass him.
During the race, the rider concerned is about to be lapped. He must allow the following rider(s)
to pass him at the earliest opportunity.
8.
1.
YELLOW FLAG WITH BLACK DIAGONAL CROSS
This flag will be shown motionless at the finish line at track level to indicate the commencement
of the final lap of the race.
9.
1.
CHEQUERED BLACK AND WHITE FLAG
This flag will be waved at the finish line on track level to indicate the finish of race or practice
session.
10. CHEQUERED BLACK AND WHITE FLAG PLUS BLUE FLAG
1.
The chequered black/white flag will be waved together with the blue flag presented motionless
at the finish line on track level when a rider(s) precedes closely the leader during the final lap
before the finish line.
11. ADDITIONAL FLAGS – THE ISLE OF MAN TT MOUNTAIN COURSE
1.
White Flag with Black “V”
Indicates visibility is reduced on the part of the circuit ahead.
2.
White Flag with Black “Sun”
Indicates dazzle from the sun on the part of the circuit ahead.
288
ROAD RACING
AUTO CYCLE UNION HANDBOOK 2015
7.2 FLAGS USED TO CONVEY INFORMATION AND INSTRUCTIONS
1.
1.
YELLOW FLAG AND OR YELLOW LIGHTS
During the final inspection lap (by the Stewards and other Officials) this flag must be waved at
the exact place where the flag marshal will be positioned during the practices, warm ups and
races.
2.
Shown waved at each row of the starting grid, this flag indicates that the start of the race is
delayed.
3
When shown stationary at the flag marshal post this flag indicates danger ahead, riders must
slow down. No overtaking is permitted
4.
When shown waved at the flag marshal post this flag indicates that the danger is more
imminent. The riders must be prepared to stop.
5.
Overtaking is forbidden up until the point where the green flag is shown.
6.
Any Infringement of this rule during a practice session will result in the cancellation of the time
of the lap during which the infraction occurred.
7.
In case of infringement of this rule during the race, a time penalty will be imposed. In both
cases, further penalties (such as fine – suspension) may also be imposed.
Note: Following an incident during a practice or race the Yellow Flags are usually displayed as
follows:
1.
Shown waved at the flag marshals’ post immediately prior to the incident.
2.
Shown stationary at the flag marshals’ post preceding the post at which it is being shown
waved.
3.
Additional flags may be shown at the request of the Clerk of the Course.
2.
1.
2.
3.
WHITE FLAG
National events only. Not permitted at Club level.
An intervention vehicle is on the track.
Waved at the flag marshal post, this flag indicates that the rider will encounter the vehicle in the
current section of the track.
4.
It is forbidden for a rider to overtake another rider during the display of the white flag.
5.
Overtaking the intervention vehicle is permitted.
6.
As soon as such a vehicle stops on the track, the white flags must be maintained and the yellow
flags must also be presented.
Note: At a meeting of below National status no Ambulance or Fast Intervention Vehicle will be
allowed to be moved onto the course or its immediate verges whilst racing or practice is in progress
on any part of the circuit. This means that in circumstances when an Ambulance or Fast Intervention
Vehicle is required on the circuit, the Red Flags must first be displayed and the race or practice
brought to an actual and effective halt before any vehicle is deployed.
3.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6
7
RED FLAG WITH A WHITE DIAGONAL CROSS. ENDURANCE RACES ONLY.
The race is neutralised.
Riders must slow down and be prepared to catch up a SAFETY CAR
It is forbidden for a rider to overtake another rider during the display of this flag.
Overtaking the SAFETY CAR is forbidden.
Riders must line-up in single file behind the SAFETY CAR.
This flag must be shown motionless at each flag marshal post,
At all meetings where this flag is used a riders briefing must be held.
4.
1.
RED FLAG AND RED LIGHTS
When the race or practice is being interrupted. On instructions from the Clerk of the Course
AUTO CYCLE UNION HANDBOOK 2015
2.
3.
4.
5.
5.
1.
2.
3.
6.
1.
2.
3.
ROAD RACING
289
Red Lights and/or waved Red Flags will be displayed around the circuit. Riders must stop
racing/practice and proceed as instructed by the Marshals
Any infringement of this rule will be penalised with one of the following penalties:
fine – disqualification – withdrawal of Championship points – suspension.
The red flag will be shown motionless on the starting grid at the end of the sighting lap(s) and
at the end of the warm up lap.
The red flag may also be used to close the track.
On the Start Grid a Red Signal Lights(s) will be displayed for up to 5 seconds. When the Red
Light(s) are extinguished the race will start.
BLACK FLAG
This flag is used to convey instructions to one rider only and is displayed motionless together
with the rider’s number.
The rider must stop at the pits at the end of the current lap and cannot restart.
Any infringement of this rule will be penalised with one or more of the following penalties:
fine – disqualification – withdrawal of Championship points – suspension.
BLACK FLAG WITH ORANGE DISK (RADIUS 40 CM)
This flag is used to convey instructions to one rider only and is displayed motionless together
with the rider’s number.
This flag informs the rider that his motorcycle has mechanical problems likely to endanger
himself or others, and that he must immediately leave the track.
Any infringement of this rule will be penalised with one or more of the following penalties:
fine – disqualification – withdrawal of Championship points – suspension.
7.3 FLAG DIMENSIONS
The flag dimension should be approximately 80cms in the vertical and 100cms in the horizontal.
7.4 FLAG COLOURS
The Pantones for the colours are as follows:
Orange: Pantone 151C
Black:
Pantone Black C
Blue:
Pantone 286C or 298C
Red:
Pantone 186C
Yellow: Pantone Yellow C
Green:
Pantone 348C
7.5 FLAG MARSHALS POSTS
The position of the Flag Marshals Posts will be fixed during the ACU Track Inspection.
7.6 MARSHALS OVERALLS
It is recommended that Marshals overalls be Orange (Pantone 151C) or white in colour.
Waterproofs should be of the same colour or transparent.
SECTION 8 BEHAVIOUR DURING PRACTICE AND RACE
8.1RIDERS MUST OBEY THE FLAG SIGNALS, THE LIGHT SIGNALS, AND THE BOARDS
WHICH CONVEY INSTRUCTIONS. ANY INFRINGEMENT TO THIS RULE WILL BE
PENALISED ACCORDING TO THE PROVISIONS OF CHAPTER 7.
1.
Riders must ride in a responsible manner which does not cause danger to other competitors
or participants, either on the track or in the pit-lane. Any infringement of this rule will be
290
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
ROAD RACING
AUTO CYCLE UNION HANDBOOK 2015
penalised with one of the following penalties:
fine – time penalty – disqualification – withdrawal of Championship points – suspension.
Riders should use only the track and the pit-lane. However, if a rider accidentally leaves the
track then he may rejoin it at the place indicated by the marshals or at a place which does not
provide an advantage to him. Any infringement of this rule during the practices or warm up
will be penalised by the cancellation of the lap time concerned and during the race, by a time
penalty.
Further penalties (such as fine – disqualification – withdrawal of Championship points) may
also be imposed.
Any repairs or adjustments along the race track must be made by the rider working alone with
absolutely no outside assistance. The marshals may assist the rider to the extent of helping him
to lift the machine and holding it whilst any repairs or adjustments are made.
The marshal may then assist him to re-start the machine.
If the rider intends to retire, then he must park his motorcycle in a safe area as indicated by the
marshals.
If the rider encounters a problem with the machine which will result in his retirement from the
practice or the race, then he should not attempt to tour at reduced speed to the pits but should
pull off the track and park his machine in a safe place as indicated by the marshals.
Riders are not permitted to return slowly to the pits for any reason during practice or racing.
Riders may enter the pits during the race, but taking the motorcycle inside the pit box is not
permitted. Any infringement of this rule will be penalised with a disqualification.
Riders who stop their engines in the pits may be assisted to re-start their motorcycle by the
mechanics.
Riders are not allowed to transport another person on their machine or to be transported by
another rider on his machine.
Riders must adopt a position with their feet on the footrests.
Riders who fall from their machine are not permitted to continue with the practice or race
until passed fit by the Medical Officer and the machine re-inspected by technical control. Any
infringement of this rule will result in the rider being disqualified from the remainder of the
practice session or race and may result in further penalties.
Riders must not ride or push their motorcycles in the opposite direction of the circuit, either on
the track or in the pit lane, unless doing so under the direction of an Official.
No signal of any kind may pass between a moving motorcycle and anyone connected with the
motorcycle’s entrant or rider, save for the signal from the time keeping transponder, or legible
messages on a pit board or body movements by the rider.
Automatic timing devices, provided they do not disrupt official timekeeping methods, are not
considered as telemetry.
The carrying of on board cameras is only permitted with the prior approval, in writing of the
Clerk of the Course. The installation of the camera must be approved by the Chief Technical
Officer.
A speed limit may be imposed in the Pit Lane.
1. Any rider found to have exceeded the limit during the practice will be subject to a penalty as
described in the Supplementary Regulations.
2. Any rider who exceeds the pit lane speed limit during a race will be penalised with a time
penalty as described in the Supplementary Regulations.
3. The Clerk of the Course must communicate the offence to the pit of the rider.
In the interest of safety, a rider may not stop his machine on the racing surface during the slow
down lap, (exception see Art 8.17) when returning to the pits after the chequered flag.
Stopping on the track during practices and races is forbidden. (exception see Art 8.17)
During the practice sessions and warm ups, practice starts are permitted, when it is safe to do
so, at the pit lane exit before joining the track and after the chequered flag is shown at the end
AUTO CYCLE UNION HANDBOOK 2015
18.
19.
ROAD RACING
291
of practice sessions and warm ups, when it is safe to do so. These practice starts must take place
off the racing line.
The spinning of rear wheels (burn-outs) is strictly forbidden. Breach of this rule will result in a
penalty of disqualification.
Any competitor who in any ACU or MCRCB Permitted Event participates on a machine for
which he is not eligible through age or licence restrictions will be penalised by a fine of £500.00
and a suspension for one year from the date of the hearing.
8.2PROTESTS
1.
Any Rider, Passenger, Entrant or Official licenced by the ACU affected by a decision taken
during a meeting held under an ACU Permit has the right to protest against that decision.
2.
No protest may be lodged against a decision of statement of fact of the Race Direction to inflict
or not:
• A time penalty
• A change of position
• A ride through
• A disqualification from the practice sessions or races by means of a black flag or black flag
with orange disc.
• A penalty for speeding in the pit lane.
SECTION 9 NEUTRALISATION OF RACES – SAFETY CAR
A compulsory riders briefing on these Regulations must be conducted by the Clerk of the Course
or his Deputy prior to any race in which the use of Safety Cars is intended. The Safety Cars if they
are to go on the track must be equipped with Yellow Flashing lights. The words “Safety Car” should
be clearly indicated on the back and the sides of the car. The Driver of the Safety Car should be the
holder of an ACU or FIM Clerk of the Course or Competition Licence for Road Racing, a MSA
Competition Licence or an ARDS Licence. All “Safety Car” drivers must be assisted in the car by a
Race Official who is in constant contact with the Clerk of the Course.
If during a race of 20 miles or more an incident other than rain puts at risk the safety of the
competitors and renders impossible the normal progress of the competition the Clerk of the Course
(Grade National A or above or of Grade National B with the prior individual approval of the Road
Race Committee) may decide to neutralize the race.
The following procedure will be adopted:
1.
A Red Flag with a White Diagonal Cross must be displayed at the selected Marshals Posts
during the whole of the neutralisation period.
2.
A White Board showing the words “Safety Car” will be displayed at the Start Line during the
whole of the neutralisation period.
3.
Riders must immediately slow down. Overtaking is forbidden. The Track Marshals will record
all infringements and report them to the Clerk of the Course.
4.
The pit lane exit will be closed to competitors.
5.
When the leading competitor approaches the start line at the end of the lap that the
neutralisation was decided a “Safety Car” equipped with two flashing Yellow Lights on the roof
will enter the track with two flashing lights switched on.
6.
The competitors will end up in single file behind the “Safety Car” without overtaking it.
7.
Competitors may now enter the pits but all other rules must be complied with.
8.
After stopping at the pits competitors must line up at the pit lane exit and must only rejoin
the circuit when instructed to do so by the official with a Green Flag or when the Green
Light at that location is switched on. These instructions will be given 10 seconds after the last
competitor in line behind the “Safety Car” has passed that point. Competitors must join the
back of the line and MUST NOT overtake. The pit lane exit will then be closed and competitors
must wait for the next lap.
292
ROAD RACING
AUTO CYCLE UNION HANDBOOK 2015
9.
During the last lap of the neutralisation period the “Safety Car” will switch off the Lights on the
roof to indicate to the competitors that the “Safety Car” will enter the pit lane at the end of that
lap and the race will resume.
10. When the “Safety Car” has left the track overtaking is forbidden up until the start line, where
a Green Flag will be waved and the Red Flag with the White Diagonal Cross immediately
withdrawn.
11. The pit lane exit will then be permanently re-opened.
12. The race will continue normally.
13. Unless otherwise decided by the Clerk of the Course, each lap completed by the “Safety Car”
will be counted as a race lap. A Board displaying the new actual number of laps remaining will
be displayed on the start line when the green flag is waved. If the race is eventually stopped
under SR 10.1 whilst the “Safety Car” is deployed the result will be according to the position at
the last completed lap before the “Safety Car” was introduced.
14. No Protest may be lodged against the decision of the Clerk of the Course regarding the number
of laps remaining in order to complete the race.
15. All other rules of the race must be observed.
16. Exceptions – Clubman Endurance races only
1. In Clubman Endurance races, the Clerk of the Course is authorised to deploy the Safety Car
at the earliest convenient moment irrespective of the position of each rider in the race.
2. A Fast Intervention Vehicle may be despatched immediately ahead of the Safety Car
3. No Protest may be lodged against the effect of any laps lost or gained in respect of Articles
16.1 and 16.2 mentioned above
SECTION 10 INTERRUPTION OF A RACE
10.1IF THE CLERK OF THE COURSE DECIDES TO INTERRUPT A RACE DUE TO CLIMATIC
CONDITIONS OR SOME OTHER REASON, THEN RED FLAGS WILL BE DISPLAYED AT
THE FINISH LINE AND AT ALL FLAG MARSHALS’ POSTS.
1.
Riders must immediately slow down and return to the pit lane, or as directed by the marshals
upon instructions from the Clerk of the Course.
2.
Only riders still racing when the red flag is displayed will be counted as finishers.
3.
The results will be the results taken at the last point where the leader had completed a full
lap without the red flag being displayed calculated as in the principle set out in the following
example:
Example of a race consisting of 30 laps:
If a Red Flag is shown when the leader is on his 10th lap after completing his 9th lap and all
other riders have not completed the 9th lap, then the race result will be 9 laps completed, and
the second part will consist of 21 laps.
Exception: if the race is interrupted after the chequered flag, the following procedure will apply:
4.
For all the riders to whom the chequered flag was shown before the interruption, a partial
classification will be established at the end of the last lap of the race.
5.
For all the riders to whom the chequered flag was not shown before the interruption, a partial
classification will be established at the end of the penultimate lap of the race.
6.
The complete classification will be established by combining both partial classifications as per
the lap/time procedure.
7.
If the results calculated show that less than three laps have been completed by the leader of the
race and by all other riders on the same lap as the leader, then the race will be null and void and
a completely new race will be run. If it is found impossible to re-start the race, then it will be
declared cancelled and the race will not count for any Championship.
8.
If three laps or more have been completed by the leader of the race, and all other riders on the
same lap as the leader, but less than two-thirds of the original race distance, rounded down to
AUTO CYCLE UNION HANDBOOK 2015
9.
10.
ROAD RACING
293
the nearest whole number of laps, then the race will be restarted. If it is found impossible to
restart the race, then the results will count and half points will be awarded in any Championship.
If the results calculated show that two-thirds of the original race distance rounded down to the
nearest whole number of laps have been completed by the leader of the race, then the race will
be deemed to have been completed and full Championship points will be awarded.
Exception: Where a race is interrupted at a meeting of below National Status the Clerk of the
Course is permitted to decide that the race has been completed or to run a new race over a
distance appropriate to the prevailing conditions.
SECTION 11 RE-STARTING A RACE THAT HAS BEEN INTERRUPTED
11.1IF A RACE HAS TO BE RE-STARTED, THEN IT WILL BE DONE AS QUICKLY AS POSSIBLE,
CONSISTENT WITH TRACK CONDITIONS ALLOWING. AS SOON AS THE RIDERS HAVE
RETURNED TO THE PITS THE CLERK OF THE COURSE WILL ANNOUNCE A TIME FOR
THE NEW START PROCEDURE TO BEGIN WHICH, CONDITIONS PERMITTING, SHOULD
NOT BE LATER THAN 10 MINUTES AFTER THE INITIAL DISPLAY OF THE RED FLAG.
1.
The results of the first race must be available to the riders before the second part of a race can
be started.
2.
The start procedure will be identical to a normal start with sighting lap(s), warm-up lap etc.
3.
Conditions for the re-started race will be as follows:
1. In the case of the situation described in Article 10.7 above (less than 3 laps completed) All
riders may re-start.
2. Motorcycles may be repaired or changed. Refuelling is permitted.
3. The number of laps will be the same as the original race.
4. The grid positions will be as for the original race.
4.
In the case of situation described in Article 10.8 above (3 laps or more and less than two-thirds
completed)
1. Only riders who are classified as finishers in the first race may re-start. Article 12.3
2. Motorcycles may be repaired or changed. Re-fuelling is permitted.
3. The number of laps of the second race will be the number of laps required to complete the
original race distance with a minimum of 5 laps.
4. The grid position will be based on the finishing order of the first race.
5. The final race classification will be established according to the position and the number of
laps of each rider at the time he crossed the finish line at the end of the last part of the race.
5.
Exception: Provisions of Article 10.10 may apply according to the status of the meeting. (The
discretion of the Clerk of the Course to decide at meetings of lower than National status).
SECTION 12 FINISH OF A RACE AND RACE RESULTS
12.1 FINISH OF A RACE
1.
When the leading rider has completed the designated number of laps (or the designated time in
the case of Endurance) for the race, a Chequered Flag will be displayed at the finishing line.
12.2THE CHEQUERED FLAG
1.
After the Chequered Flag is displayed to the leading Rider no other Rider is permitted to enter
the track from the Pit Lane.
2.
If a Rider closely precedes the leader during the final lap before the finish line the Official
will show to the Riders and to the Leaders simultaneously the Chequered Flag and the Blue
Flag. This will indicate to the Leader that he has completed the race and to the Rider closely
preceding the Leader that he still has to complete the final lap.
3.
In the case of a photo finish between two or more Riders the decision shall be taken in favour
294
4.
5.
ROAD RACING
AUTO CYCLE UNION HANDBOOK 2015
of the Rider whose Front Wheel leading edge crossed the finish line first. In the case of Ties, the
Riders concerned will be ranked according to the best lap times they achieved in the race.
Should the end of the race signal inadvertently or otherwise be displayed before the leading
rider completes the scheduled number of laps, or before the scheduled race time has been
completed, the race will be deemed to have finished.
If the chequered flag is given to the leader then a result will be drawn accordingly, but if the
chequered flag is given to a competitor other than a leader then the result will be taken when
the leader last crossed the start/finish line.
Should the end of the race signal be advertently delayed, the race will nevertheless be deemed to
finish at the correct moment and competitors be classified accordingly.
The Clerk of the Course may require machines to be presented for post Practice or Race
verification. Where this is required the Riders must be informed prior to the start of the
Practice or Race that they must attend the “Parc Ferme”.
12.3 RACE RESULTS
1.
When the Race has been completed as described above the Results will be based on the order in
which the Riders crossed the finish line and the number of laps that they have completed.
2.
When the Race has been declared completed by the Clerk of the Course following an
Interruption under Article 10.3, the result will be established according to the procedure
described in Articles 10.4–10.6 for a race interrupted after the Chequered Flag.
3.
In either of the cases described in 1) and 2) above. To be counted as a Finisher and be included
in the results a Rider must have completed 75% of the actual race distance. He must also have
crossed the finish line on the track and not in the Pit Lane within two minutes after the winner
and be in contact with his machine.
4.
A new Lap record can only be established during a race.
5.
Both for the Practice and for the Race, the lap time is the subtraction of the time between two
consecutive crossings of the finish line.
SECTION 13 SAFETY
13.1 MEDICAL SERVICES – MINIMUM REQUIREMENTS FOR ROAD RACE MEETINGS
Road Race
Road Race
Test Day
PERSONNEL
Doctors MO Paramedic(s) First Aid Ambulance(s)
PM
personnel
2 MOs
PMs can assist
5
2
MOs but not
replace them
1 MO
1PM
2
1
VEHICLES
Fast Intervention
Vehicle
1
Special
Notes
(i)
1
The following applies to all events run under this code.
1.
Medical Officer (MO) – DOCTOR A medical practitioner (Doctor) fully registered with the
General Medical Council (GMC), and holding appropriate personal medical malpractice
insurance cover (excludes NHS Crown Indemnity).
2.
Paramedic (PM) A State Registered Paramedic with the HPC (Health Professions Council)
Paramedics must have appropriate personal medical malpractice insurance cover.
3.
Ambulance A vehicle registered as an ambulance with the DVLA (Driver and Vehicle
Licencing Agency) or similar government licensing authority and complying with FIM
minimum equipment regulations for a type C vehicle; that is:
Medical: A stretcher (preferably standardised), oxygen supply, apparatus to immobilise limbs
AUTO CYCLE UNION HANDBOOK 2015
ROAD RACING
295
and vertebral column. First aid medicaments and materials.
Technical: Radio communication. Visible and audible signals.
Staffing: An ambulance must be staffed by two First Aid Personnel (who can be the two
minimum First Aid Personnel).
An ambulance may act as a Medical Centre BUT if so it must be a vehicle in addition to the
minimum ambulance requirement.
4.
First Aid Personnel A person holding a current certificate of First Aid competency. (Where
an event is open to the public event organisers should ensure that all First Aid personnel are
insured against malpractice for the event concerned).
5.
Fast Intervention Vehicle (FIV)
1. A Fast Intervention Vehicle is a compulsory requirement at all Road Race events.
2. Such a vehicle requires a driver, a Doctor, and appropriate medical equipment. If the driver
is not a First Aid Person, then such a Person must be present in the vehicle. This vehicle must
be immediately available to proceed to an incident, if called to do so, upon instructions from
the Clerk of the Course.
3. A FIV must not be used in place of an ambulance.
4. A Fast Intervention Vehicle must be equipped with visible signals (flashing lights).
5.
At a meeting of below National status no ambulance or Fast Intervention Vehicle is allowed to
be moved onto the course or its immediate verges whilst racing or practice is in progress on any
part of the circuit. This means that in the circumstances of an Ambulance or Fast Intervention
Vehicle being required on the circuit, the Red Flags must first be displayed and the race or
practice brought to an actual and effective halt before the vehicle is deployed.
Note: This restriction is not applicable where the Clerk of the Course has decided to neutralise
the race by use of the Safety Car in accordance with the provisions of Chapter 9 of the Road
Race Regulations.
6.
During Sighting Lap: Stationary or moving Ambulances, Fast Intervention Vehicles, and
the like, may be encountered anywhere on the circuit when riders are dispatched from the
Assembly Area on their “sighting lap” to the start line prior to the start of a race. This “sighting
lap” is not considered to be either Practice or Racing and riders must always be prepared to
encounter such vehicles. When such a vehicle or vehicles are on the track the Yellow Flags will
be displayed in the appropriate section of the course.
Special Notes
2 MOs must be present at the start of every meeting and be present for the duration of the meeting
unless accompanying a patient to hospital. If vehicles or First Aid personnel leave the circuit to
convey a patient to hospital then the minimum requirements for the event to continue are 1 MO, 1
FIV, 2 Ambulances and 4 First Aid personnel.
6.
Medical Examination
At any time during a meeting the Clerk of the Course may require a competitor to undergo a
medical examination to determine his fitness to participate. The decision of the Medical Officer
is a matter of fact without right of protest.
13.2 TRACK SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
1.
The safety precautions of circuits will be as laid down for each Permanent Course Licence or
Temporary Course Certificate following an inspection of the course.
2.
It should be generally realised that the organisers of speed events have a legal responsibility to
the general public and therefore it is the duty of these organisers to ensure that all reasonable
precautions are taken to protect the public.
3.
Whilst organising Clubs are insured under the Promoters Third Party Policy in respect of their
legal liability, it is a condition of the policy that the promoters of an event must comply strictly
with the National Sporting Code and any additional requirements as may be specified by the
Permanent Course Licence or Temporary Course Certificate.
296
ROAD RACING
Clubs failing to do so stand in grave danger of any claims being repudiated to the Club by the
insurers under the terms of the policy covering legal liability.
The safety precautions to be adopted are provided with the Permanent Course Licence or
Temporary Course Certificate for the particular course but the following general requirements
must be observed.
The attention of organisers is drawn to the provision of the NSC which stipulates that no
alteration of the requirements contained in the Permanent Course Licence or Temporary
Course Certificate shall be made without the prior approval, in writing, of the ACU.
It is recognised that circumstances may arise in which it is necessary to make certain alterations
to the course on the day of the meeting but any such alterations must be approved by the
Stewards of the Meeting and details given in their report to the permit issuing authority.
4.
5.
6.
AUTO CYCLE UNION HANDBOOK 2015
13.3 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS
Each working vehicle in the Paddock must have a 2 Kg (minimum) dry powder fire extinguisher
available for immediate use. This extinguisher must show the date of the last annual inspection. Non
– compliance with this regulation will incur a penalty imposed by the Clerk of the Course.
13.4 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS AT CIRCUITS
At all race and speed events, there must be a valid certificate, issued annually immediately prior to the
start of each season’s racing by the manufacturer or his agent, to the effect that all fire extinguishers
are in effective working order. This certificate must be available for inspection by the Stewards.
All fire posts must be clearly marked. In addition to the fire equipment at each post there must be:
1.
Fire extinguishers in the paddock and assembly area.
2.
At least two fire extinguishers in the Technical Control Area.
3.
Fire extinguishers in every medical room/centre.
4.
During events of National status or below where machines may be refueled and more than
five gallons (22 litres) of fuel is held in any one pit, there shall be a minimum of one fire tender
and crew in attendance, appropriately equipped and with immediate access to the pit area.
International events must comply with appropriate FIM requirements.
13.5 WARNING AND PROHIBITION SIGNS AT CIRCUITS
For full details regarding Warning Notices and Prohibition Notices please refer to the Safety
Precautions section of this Handbook.
1.
WARNING NOTICES
The following requirements regarding the display of Warning notices are applicable to all Road
Racing events.
1.
WARNING NOTICE (A) (29 × 20 inches.) Warning notices as detailed below must be
displayed on each side of every entrance to the course, including the entrance to car parks and
paddock.
These notices must be prominently displayed where they can be easily read by the public before
any admission charge is paid, or where no admission charge is made before entry is gained into
the circuit.
Where it is not possible to define the limits of the site and to control admission of the public
(e.g.M.O.D Land and heath land) warning notices must be profusely displayed around the
course and also in the car parks.
2.
WARNING NOTICE ((B) (20 × 15 inches.) Those parts of the course to which the public may
be admitted and where it is neither practical nor necessary to erect a barrier, e.g. those parts of
the course which are straight and are only used by the public to reach other parts of the course,
may be indicated by the erection of the special type of Warning Notice (B). These notices
AUTO CYCLE UNION HANDBOOK 2015
ROAD RACING
297
should be displayed at least 30ft. from the course. It is recommended that the limit of these
areas should also be defined by a boundary tape.
2.
PROHIBITION NOTICES
The following requirements regarding the display of Prohibition notices are applicable to all
Road Racing events.
PROHIBITED AREA NOTICE (C) (29 × 20 inches.) Areas where the public are not permitted
must be clearly defined by the display of an adequate number of “Prohibited Area” notices (B).
Notices should be displayed within the prohibited area, facing the public.
13.6 DECLARATION – ADMISSION TICKETS, ARMBANDS AND PASSES
Subject to the provision of the Sunday Observance Act 1780, no person may be allowed to any part
of the circuit without a suitable pass or ticket. All tickets and passes must bear the following wording
shown below in full and if the wording appears on the reverse side then the words “ For Conditions
of Admission See Over” must be clearly printed on the face thereof. Where a ticket is cancelled by
being torn in half, the full wording and, where applicable, the “For conditions of admission see over”
must appear on each half. Where a charge is made for admission into special or “reserved” enclosures
a ticket bearing the approved declaration must be issued in exchange for payment to enter these
enclosures.
Declaration.
WARNING. MOTOR SPORT CAN BE DANGEROUS. Despite the organisers taking all reasonable
precautions, unavoidable accidents can happen. Please comply with all instructions of marshals and
notices and remain in permitted areas only. THEY ARE CONCERNED WITH YOUR SAFETY.
All vehicle passes must bear the same wording and comply with the above requirements.
13.7 DECLARATION ON THE OFFICIAL PROGRAMME
The declaration as outlined above should be printed in full on the outside front cover of all Official
Programmes. Where this is not possible it must be printed in full in the programme and the words
“For conditions of admission see inside” printed on the outside cover.
13.8 SIGNING ON
All riders, passengers, officials and press must sign a declaration on the relevant signing on form
(available from the ACU).
1.
Age Limits for Officials
All event Executive and Administrative Officials shall be 18 years of age or over.
2.
Age Limits for Marshals
1.
All Assistant Officials whose function is to be carried out at the immediate trackside must be at
least 16 years of age.
2.
All Assistant Officials who are under 18 years of age must have obtained parental agreement
to carry out the duty and the signing-on signature must be countersigned by the person
responsible for the official at the event.
1. When using the services of officials under 18 years of age for any duties at any event special
attention must be given to any risks which may be associated with the duty, and to the previous
experience of the official.
SECTION 14 GENERAL TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
14.1PROTECTIVE CLOTHING
During practice and racing riders and passengers must wear the following clothing and footwear:
1.
A complete all in one leather suit of at least 1.2mm in thickness on all parts of the suit. Suits
298
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
ROAD RACING
AUTO CYCLE UNION HANDBOOK 2015
zipped together at the waist are not permitted. Non-leather material may be used if it meets
with the following requirements.
The following characteristics of the material must be at least equivalent to 1.5mm of cowhide
(not split leather)
Fire retardant quality – Resistance to abrasion – Coefficient of friction against all types of
asphalt – perspiration absorbing qualities – Medical test – non toxic and non allergenic –
Fabric of a quality that does not melt. It must be non-flammable.
The following areas must be padded with at least a double layer of leather or enclosed plastic
foam at least 8mm thick: Shoulders, elbows, both sides of the torso and hip joint, the back of
the torso, knees.
Competitors must wear complete undergarments if they use suits which are not lined. Suitable
undergarments may be of the Nomex type, they may also be of silk or simply cotton. Synthetic
materials which may melt and which could harm the riders skin in an accident are not allowed,
neither for the suit nor for the undergarments.
Competitors footwear must be of leather or an approved substitute material and of a minimum
height of 200mm to provide, with the suit, complete protection (i.e. no exposed areas.)
Competitors must wear leather protective gloves.
The use of materials in clothing or personal protection which may generate sparks when in
contact with the ground are prohibited
14.2HELMETS
Helmets bearing the current ACU gold stamp and in sound condition and properly fitted must be
worn by all riders and passengers while practising and racing. Overseas riders may use helmets as
approved by their own FMN.
14.3 IDENTIFICATION DISCS
While practising and racing, riders and passengers are required to wear an identification disc around
the neck, attached by a material approved by the technical officer. Thin chains should be avoided. The
disc must be permanently marked with the wearer’s full name and date of birth.
Identification discs shall be of a durable material, circular in shape, between 20mm and 25mm in
diameter and having rounded edges with no sharp or ragged projections.
14.4 BODY JEWELLERY
It is recommended that any body piercing studs, ring etc. are removed.
14.5 ENGINE AND FRAME NUMBERS
All solo road race machines are required to have engine and frame numbers that have obviously
not been tampered with or deleted. For sidecars this applies to engine numbers only. The penalty is
disqualification. New unstamped components are permissible.
14.6FUEL
1.
Unless otherwise specified in the Supplementary Regulations for any series or championship,
leaded petrol mixtures up to 102 RON, will be permitted, provided that the Customs and
Excise or Inland Revenue dues have been paid. Power boosters, octane boosters and the like are
forbidden.
2.
The use of E85 Bio-ethanol pump fuel is permitted. No concessions to individual Class
Technical Regulations are permitted to allow the use of Bio-ethanol fuel. The word Bio Fuel
must be clearly displayed on the fuel tank.
3.
Competitors must ensure that a minimum of 2 litres remain in the tank at the end of the race,
for the purpose of any fuel testing that may be required.
4.
Any competitor found in contravention of these regulations or who fails to provide a fuel
AUTO CYCLE UNION HANDBOOK 2015
ROAD RACING
299
sample will have his Road Race Licence suspended for a minimum period of 6 months of the
Road Race Season (March – October) and will be liable for all costs involved in the testing. The
competitor will be disqualified from the results and will lose any Championship points awarded
for that class.
Note: For information leaded petrol mixtures up to 102 RON are typified by mixtures of 50% Avgas
and 50% pump petrol.
14.7 NUMBER PLATES
1.
Numbers must be clearly visible to the public and officials. All other number plates or markings
on a motorcycle liable to cause confusion with the number must be removed before the start of
a competition.
2.
One machine number must be displayed on the front of the motorcycle inclined not more than
30 degrees rearwards from the vertical. Holes can be perforated between the numbers on a
front number plate. The actual numbers must not be perforated.
3.
Each machine must display two side number plates. The numbers must be clearly visible to the
public and marshals on both sides of the machine.
4.
If numbers are displayed on separate plates, they must be rectangular shape and made from a
rigid and solid material with minimum measurements 285mm by 235mm. The plates should
not be curved or bent more than 50mm out of the flat plane.
5.
The figures must be clearly legible and like the background must be painted in matt colours as
described below to avoid reflection in sunlight.
6.
The minimum dimensions of front numbers are:
Background 285mm by 235mm
Height of figure140mm
Width of figure80mm
Width of stroke25mm
Space between two figures 15mm
7.
The minimum dimensions of side numbers are:
Background 260mm by 220mm
Height of figure120mm
Width of figure70mm
Width of stroke25mm
Space between 2 figures 15mm
8.
A space of at least 5cm must be left free around all number plates in which no advertising may
appear.
9.
Figures must conform to the Number Plates diagram within this Handbook.
10. The colours for background and figures vary according to the class of motorcycle and type of
competition. The following colours shall be used and they must have a matt finish and comply
with the RAL colour table:
Black
9005,Blue 5010,Yellow
1003,Orange
2007,
Red
3020,Green6002,White9010
300
ROAD RACING
AUTO CYCLE UNION HANDBOOK 2015
The front and side number plates for each class of motorcycles are:
Class
F125cc
125cc
250cc
350cc
500cc
Over 500cc
Formula 400
Supersport 600
Formula 600
Supermono
Stocksport
FII Sidecars
Open Sidecars
Background
Red background
Black background
Green background
Blue background
Yellow background
White background
Blue background
White background
White background
Black background
Red background
Red background
White background
Numbers
White numbers
White numbers
White numbers
White numbers
Black numbers
Black numbers
White numbers
Blue numbers
Blue numbers
Yellow numbers
White numbers
White numbers
Black numbers (incl three wheelers)
14.8 CONTROL OF EXHAUST SOUND LEVEL
1.
The Clerk of the Course will disqualify any machine which exceeds the maximum permitted
sound level, or which in his opinion is deemed to be excessively noisy. An official sound level
test results form will be completed at each meeting and will be submitted by the Clerk of the
Course to the Stewards of the meeting.
2.
Noise limit in force for all machines is a maximum of 105dB/A. For testing the fixed RPM
specified in 6 below will be used.
3.
The noise test will be conducted with the microphone placed at 50 cm from the exhaust pipe
at an angle of 45° measured from the centre-line of the exhaust end and at the height of the
exhaust pipe, but at least 20 cm above the ground. If this is not possible, the measurement can
be taken at 45° upwards.
4.
During a noise test, machines not equipped with a gear box neutral must be placed on a stand.
5.
The driver shall keep his engine running out of gear and shall increase the engine speed until it
reaches the specified Revolutions Per Minute (RPM). Measurements must be taken when the
specified RPM is reached.
6.
Due to the similarity of the piston stroke in different engine configurations within the capacity
classes, the noise test will be conducted at a fixed RPM. For reference only, the mean piston
speed at which the noise test is conducted, is calculated at 13 m/sec (2-stroke engines) and
11 m/sec (4-stroke engines).
SPORT PRODUCTION AND SPORT PRODUCTION BASED ENGINES
1 Cylinder
2 Cylinder
250cc (4-stroke)
5,500rpm
8,500 rpm
400cc (4-stroke)
5,000rpm
6,500rpm
600cc (4 stroke)
5,000rpm
5,500rpm
750cc (4-stroke)
5,000rpm
5,500rpm
Over 750cc (4-stroke)
4,500rpm
5,000rpm
OTHER 2 STROKE RACING ENGINES
1 Cylinder
125 (2-stroke)
7,000rpm
250 (2-stroke)
500 (2-stroke)
3 Cylinder
4 Cylinder
7,000rpm
6,500rpm
6,500rpm
5,000rpm
8,000rpm
7,000rpm
7,000rpm
5,500rpm
2 Cylinder
3 Cylinder
4 Cylinder
7,000rpm
5,500rpm
7,000rpm
7,000rpm
AUTO CYCLE UNION HANDBOOK 2015
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
ROAD RACING
301
For Supermono class, Vintage and Classic prior to 1973, the test RPM will continue to depend
upon the mean piston speed corresponding to the stroke of the engine, according to the table
produced in the ACU Sound Control Regulations.
The noise level for engines with more than one cylinder will be measured on each exhaust end.
A machine which does not comply with the noise limits may be presented several times at prerace control.
For Supermono class only, when presented for examination, the correct stroke must be
stamped in a clearly visible position on the crankcase.
For Wankel machines, the noise level will be measured at 6000 RPM.
The surrounding noise should not exceed 90 dB/A within a 5 metres radius from the power
source during tests.
Apparatus for noise control must be to international standard IEC 651, Type 1 or Type 2. The
sound level meter must be equipped with a calibrator for control and adjustment of the meter
during periods of use.
The “slow response” setting must always be used.
Due to the influence of temperature on noise tests, all figures are correct at 20°C. For tests taken
at temperatures below 10°C there will be a + 1 dB/A tolerance and for tests below 0°C, a + 2
dB/A tolerance.
Noise control after the competition. In a competition which requires a final examination of
machines before the results are announced, this examination must include a noise control
measurement of at least the first three machines listed in the final classification. At this final
test, there will be a 3 dB/A post race tolerance.
Guidelines for the use of Sound Level Meters
1. The Sound Inspector must arrive in sufficient time for discussions with the Clerk of the
Course and other Chief Technical Officials in order that a suitable test site and testing policy
can be agreed.
2. Sound level measuring equipment must include a compatible calibrator, which must be used
immediately before testing begins and always just prior to a re-test if a disciplinary sanction
may be imposed. Two sets of equipment must be available in case of failure of tachometer,
sound level meter or calibrator during technical control.
3. Before testing, the Sound Inspector should if possible liase with another official who has
noise test equipment including calibrators, in order to agree the accuracy of the official sound
level meter.
4. In other than moderate wind, machines should face forward in the wind direction.
(Mechanical noise will blow forward, away from microphone).
5. ‘Slow’ meter response must be used.
6. ‘A’ weighted setting on sound level meter.
7. Always round down meter reading, that is: 103.9 dB/A = 103 dB/A.
8. T
ype 1 meter: deduct 1 dB/A
Type 2 meter: deduct 2 dB/A
9. Below 10° Celsius: deduct 1 dB/A
Below 0° Celsius: deduct 2dB/A
All tolerances are accumulative. Action taken will depend on the sporting discipline concerned,
and decisions taken during prior discussions with the Clerk of the Course.
14.9 EXHAUST PIPES
1.
The end of the exhaust pipe or pipes must not project beyond any part of the vehicle or its
bodywork. Exhaust gases must not be discharged so as to raise dust or foul the tyres or brakes,
or inconvenience a following rider. The end of the exhaust pipe for a minimum distance of
30mm must be horizontal and parallel (within a + or −10 degree tolerance) to the fore and aft
302
ROAD RACING
2.
centre line of the machine. It must not extend beyond a line drawn at a vertical tangent to the
rear edge of the motorcycle rear tyre.
For sidecars the exhaust pipes must not extend beyond the limits of the sidecar on the sidecar
side and must not extend more than 330mm from the centre of the machine on the opposite
side unless contained within the streamlining.
AUTO CYCLE UNION HANDBOOK 2015
14.10 SUPERCHARGERS/TURBOCHARGERS
1.
The use of superchargers/turbochargers is prohibited unless specifically allowed in the
regulations for a specific class. An engine, whether two stroke or four stroke, coming within
any one of the recognised classes, as determined by the capacity of the working cylinder shall
not be considered as supercharged/turbocharged, when in respect of one engine cycle, the total
capacity, measured geometrically, of the fuel charging device or devices, including the capacity
of the engine working cylinder, if used for inspiriting the fuel, does not exceed the maximum
capacity of the class in question. The intracylinder injection of fuel shall not be considered as
supercharging/turbocharging.
14.11 HANDLEBARS
1.
The width of handlebars for motorcycles up to 80cc is not less than 400mm. For all other
machines (including sidecars) not less than 450mm. Grips must be attached in such a way that
at least the minimum width is reached when measured between the outside ends of the grips.
Exposed handlebars must be plugged with a solid material or rubber covered.
2.
The minimum angle of rotation of the handlebar on each side of the centre line or mid-position
must be 15 degrees for solo motorcycles and sidecars. Whatever the position of the handlebars
the front wheel must never touch the streamlining, if any. Stops must be fitted to ensure a
minimum clearance of 30mm between handlebar with levers and the tank when on full lock to
prevent trapping the rider’s fingers (see diagram 3, at the end of Road Race Section).
3.
Handlebar clamps must be carefully radiused and engineered so as to avoid fracture points in
the bar.
14.12 CLUTCH AND BRAKE LEVERS
1.
All handlebar levers (clutch, brake, etc.) must be, in principle, ball ended or be rounded
(minimum thickness of this flattened part 14mm). These ends must be permanently fixed and
form an integral part of the lever.
2.
The maximum length of control levers measured from the pivot-point to the extremity of
the ball must not exceed 200mm. Each control lever (hand and footlevers) must be mounted
on an independent pivot. The brake lever if pivoted on the footrest axis must work under all
circumstances, such as the footrest being bent or deformed.
3.
For all types of motorcycles, throttle controls must be self-closing when not held by the hand.
14.13 MUDGUARDS
Mudguards are not compulsory. If fitted, the following rules will apply:
1.
They must project laterally beyond the tyre on each side. The rear mudguard must cover at least
120 degrees of the circumference of the rear wheel, and the angle contained by a line drawn
from the rear end of the rear mudguard to the centre of the rear road wheel and a line drawn
horizontally through the centre of the road wheel must not exceed 20 degrees.
2.
The front mudguard must cover not less than 100 degrees of the circumference of the front
road wheel. The angle contained by a line drawn from the rear end of the front mudguard to
the centre of the front road wheel and a line drawn horizontally through the centre of that road
wheel must not exceed 20 degrees.
3.
Similarly, the angle contained by a line drawn from the front end of the front mudguard to the
AUTO CYCLE UNION HANDBOOK 2015
ROAD RACING
303
centre of the front road wheel and a line drawn horizontally through the centre of that road
wheel must not be less than 45 degrees nor more than 60 degrees.
14.14 OPEN TRANSMISSION GUARDS
1.
For all motorcycles, if the primary transmission is exposed, it must be fitted with a guard as a
safety measure. The guard must be conceived in such a manner that under no circumstances
can a rider or the passenger come into accidental contact with the transmission parts. It must
be designed to protect the rider from injuring his fingers.
2.
For Sidecars, a guard is required if secondary transmission is not shielded by the bodywork.
3.
A (chain) guard must be fitted in such a way as to prevent trapping between the lower chain
run and the final driven sprocket to rear wheel.
14.15 FOOTRESTS
1.
The footrests for the rider must be placed not higher than 100mm above a line passing through
the centre of the wheels with a machine loaded and in front of a vertical line passing through
the centre of the rear wheel.
2.
They must be positioned to give easy access to any control pedals.
3.
The ends of the footrests must be rounded with a solid spherical radius of not less than
8mm. Footrests may be of a folding type but in this case must be fitted with a device which
automatically allows them to return to the normal position, the integral protection is to be
provided at the end of the footrest which must have at least 8mm solid spherical radius.
14.16 OIL SUPPLY PIPES
Oil lines containing positive pressure must, if replaced, be of steel re-inforced construction with
swaged or threaded connectors. All drain plugs must be tight and drilled and wired into position. All
oil filters must be securely fastened.
14.17 OIL CATCH TANKS & BREATHER SYSTEMS
Where an oil breather pipe is fitted the outlet must discharge into a catch tank located in an easily
accessible position and which must be emptied before the start of the race. The minimum size of a
catch tank shall be 250cc for gearbox breather pipes and 500cc for engine breather pipes.
14.18 PETROL AND OIL FILLER CAPS
Petrol and oil filler caps when closed must be leak proof. They must be securely locked to prevent
accidental opening.
14.19 PETROL TANK BREATHERS
Where petrol tank breather pipes are fitted, non-return valves must be fitted to those pipes.
14.20 CONSTRUCTION
The use of titanium in the construction of the frame, the front forks, the handlebars, the swinging
arm spindles and the wheel spindles is forbidden. For wheel spindles, the use of light alloy is also
forbidden. The use of titanium alloy nuts and bolts is allowed.
14.21 ADDITIVES TO WATER IN RADIATORS
The only liquid engine coolant permitted, other than lubricating oil, is water.
14.22 BRAKES
For machines fitted with two front disc brakes, a split of the front brake lines for both front brake
calipers must be made at or above the lower fork yoke.
304
ROAD RACING
AUTO CYCLE UNION HANDBOOK 2015
14.23 TECHNICAL CONTROL
1.
The Technical Officer shall check both the machine and the rider for compliance with the
technical specifications. The rider must wear his clothing to Technical Control to demonstrate
good fit etc.
2.
The fairing of sidecar machines should be removed and replaced by the competitor during
inspection by technical control with particular attention being paid to securing the fairing to
the chassis.
3.
Crashed machines must be returned to the technical control area for examination. In such
circumstances it is the responsibility of the competitor to ensure his machine and clothing has
been rechecked and approved before further use in the event.
4.
In the event of a protest against machine specification where an engine has to be stripped an
additional fee of £250 for four stroke and £150 for two stroke machines MUST be submitted
with the protest and protest fee. In the event of the protest being upheld the additional fee will
be returned. If the protest is not upheld the additional fee will be awarded to the other party
and will be the only costs payable.
5.
In the event of a protest against fuel specification an additional fee of £600 must be submitted
with the protest and protest fee. In the event of the protest being upheld the additional fee
will be returned and the cost of the fuel test charged to the other party. (See also ACU Fuel
regulations as detailed within this Handbook).
6.
It is the responsibility of the rider to ensure that a machine used in competition is mechanically
and structurally in a safe condition.
SECTION 15 SOLO SPECIFICATIONS
These specifications are in addition to and not in place of the General Technical Regulations above.
Solo motorcycles must comply with the following requirements.
15.1 SIZE OF WHEEL RIMS AND TYRES
1.
For solo motorcycles, the wheel rims must be at least 400mm (16") in diameter.
2.
Any modification to the rim or spokes of an integral wheel (cast, moulded, riveted) as supplied
by the manufacturer or of a traditional detached rim other than for spokes, valves or security
bolts is prohibited except for tyre retention screws sometimes used to prevent tyre movement
relative to the rim. If rim is modified for these purposes bolts, screws etc. must be fitted.
3.
Tyres must have the following dimensions and will be measured mounted on the rim at a
pressure of 1kg/cm2 (14 lbs/sq. in) measurements taken at a tyre section located at 90 degrees
from the ground.
Classes
51cc to 125cc
126cc to 250cc
251cc to 350cc
351cc to 500cc
501cc to 1300cc
FRONT WHEELS
Minimum Rim
Minimum
Width Marking Inside Width
mm
mm
1.50/WMO
38
1.50/WMO
38
1.60/WM1
40.5
1.85/WM1
47
2.15/WM2
55
Tyre
50
63
70
75
83
REAR WHEELS
Minimum Rim
Minimum
Width Marking Inside Width
mm
mm
1.5/WMO
38
1.50/WM1
40.5
1.85/WM1
47
2.15/WM2
55
2.15WM3
55
Tyre
50
70
83
100
110
15.2 TYPE OF TYRES INCLUDING THE USE OF SLICK TYRES IN CLUB MEETINGS
1.
For all National meetings the use of slick tyres is permitted. For all other meetings types of tyres
must be specified in the Supplementary Regulations. Prior Road Race Committee approval is
required for Clubs wishing to permit the use of slick tyres or hand cut slick tyres at meetings
below National status.
AUTO CYCLE UNION HANDBOOK 2015
2.
ROAD RACING
305
Unless stated otherwise in the Supplementary Regulations the use of slick tyres are not
permitted at meetings of below National status.
15.3 TREADED TYRES
The minimum tread depth must be 1.6mm unless otherwise stated in Championship Conditions.
15.4 TUBELESS TYRES
If a tyre is to be run tubeless it is recommended that the internal rim dimensions are approved by
the manufacturer of the tyres being used. Tyre/rim relationship for tubeless tyre application is very
critical.
15.5 SLICK TYRES
The surface of a slick tyre must contain three or more hollows across the width of the tyre at 120
degree intervals or less around its circumference, indicating the limit of wear on the centre and
shoulder areas of the tyre. When two or more of these indicator hollows become worn on different
parts of the periphery, the tyre must not be used.
15.6STREAMLINING
The streamlining of solo Road Racing machines must correspond to the following specifications (see
also diagram 1 at the end of the Road Race Section).
1.
The front wheel, with the exception of the tyre, must be clearly visible from each side.
2.
No part of the streamlining must be in front of a vertical line drawn 150mm in front of the
front wheel axle. Normal mudguards shall not be considered as streamlining.
3.
No part of the streamlining must be to the rear of a vertical line drawn through the rear
wheel axle and the rim of the rear wheel must be clearly visible over the 180 degrees of its
circumference to the rear of this line. No part of the motorcycle shall project to the rear of a
vertical line drawn through the exterior edge of the rear wheel.
4.
Air foils or spoilers may only be fitted on solo machines when they are an integral part of the
fairing or seat. They must not exceed the width of the fairing nor the height of the handlebar.
Sharp edges must be rounded off with a minimum radius of 8mm.
5.
Any part of the streamlining which faces rearwards, must be finished with rounded edges of
3.5mm min. radius.
6.
The rider, in the normal riding position, must be completely visible with the exception of his
forearms from either side, from the rear and from above. The minimum space between the face
of the rider, or his helmet and the streamlining (including the windscreen) must be 100mm. It
is forbidden to use transparent materials to evade these rules.
7.
The maximum height of the back of the rider’s seat is 150mm. This will be measured from the
lowest point of the rigid base of the seat to the uppermost part of the fairing behind the driver.
8.
Whatever the position of the handlebars there must be a space of at least 20mm between
the streamlining and the ends of the handlebars or other steering systems, including any
attachments thereto.
9.
The front inclination where the number plate is fixed must not exceed an angle of 30 degrees to
the rear of the vertical.
10. The ground clearance of a solo vehicle when unloaded must not be less than 100mm.
11. The width of the seat or anything to its rear shall not be more than 450mm.
12. The fuel cap must be fitted in such a way that it does not protrude from the fairing and cannot
be torn off in a crash.
13. It is forbidden to add anything to the original streamlining of Production Racing motorcycles if
fitted.
14. Streamlining for both solo and sidecar motorcycles used for World Record Attempts is
unrestricted.
306
ROAD RACING
AUTO CYCLE UNION HANDBOOK 2015
15.7INCLINATION
It must be possible for a motorcycle (other than Vintage machines or Scooters) not being loaded,
to be inclined to an angle of 50 degrees from the vertical, without any part of it other than the tyre
coming in contact with the ground.
15.8BRAKES
Motorcycles must be equipped with one efficient brake operating on each wheel and operated
independently and concentrically with the wheel.
15.9 OIL CONTAINMENT
The lower fairing where fitted on all four stroke motorcycles must be constructed to hold at least half
of the total oil and coolant capacity of the engine in the event of an engine failure. The lower edge of
openings in the fairing must be positioned at least 50mm above the bottom of the fairing. (Minimum
modifications to the profile of the lower fairing only to fulfil this rule). (Please see diagram). Four
stroke motorcycles without a lower fairing must fit a sub-reservoir below the crankcase to.hold at
least half of the total oil and coolant capacity of the engine in the event of an engine failure.
NOTE: Vintage and Classic machines (prior to 1973) will be exempt at all events.
15.10
RED REAR WARNING LIGHTS
All motorcycles must have a functioning red light mounted at the rear of the machine to be used in
rain or low visibility conditions as instructed by Race Control. The team/rider must ensure that the
light is switched on whenever a rain tyre is fitted on the motorcycle and/or when any practice or race
is declared “wet” by Race Control.
Lights must comply with the following:
a) Lighting direction must be parallel to the machine centre line (motorcycle running direction),
and clearly visible from the rear at least 15 degrees to both left and right sides of the machine
centre line.
b) mounted on the seat/rear bodywork approximately on the machine centre line, in a position
approved by the Chief Technical Officer. In case of dispute over the mounting position or
visibility, the decision of the Chief Technical Officer will be final.
c) power output/luminosity equivalent to approximately: 10–15W (incandescent) 0.6–1.8W
(LED).
d) the switch must be accessible.
e) rain light power supply may be separated from the motorcycle main wiring and battery.
Classic or Vintage machines racing exclusively in their own race or event are exempt
SECTION 16 SOLO ELIGIBILITY SPECIFICATIONS
16.1 ACU PRODUCTION CLASSES
1.
These specifications are in addition to and not in place of the Technical Regulations. Solo
motorcycles must comply with the following requirements. Machines must be complete, fully
equipped motorcycles of a Model/Marque to UK specifications, as originally assembled at the
factory of a recognised manufacturer, for road use in a minimum quantity of 100.
The only permitted alterations are detailed below.
2.
Handlebars – any shape of handlebar is permitted provided that it is fitted in the original
mounting position only.
3.
Footrests and foot controls – proprietary rearsets are acceptable.
4.
Gearing – the sprockets may be changed. The final drive chain specification must remain
standard in respect of width and pitch.
5.
Friction linings, disc pads and brake hoses – may be changed.
AUTO CYCLE UNION HANDBOOK 2015
ROAD RACING
307
6.
Compression springs and damping – may be changed, but the original mountings must be
used.
7.
Exhaust systems – no modification is permitted.
8.
Rebores – to allow for wear, rebores will be permitted, but only to the maximum of the
manufacturer’s recommended rebore sizes.
9.
Air filter elements – may be removed. Air box assemblies must not be modified.
10. The addition of the following is permitted – security bolts and screws, steering dampers, fork
braces, engine protection bars.
11. Carburettors – no modification other than a change of jet size is permitted.
12. Compression ratio – cylinder head joint faces may be machined – the external appearance
of the engine must remain unaltered. Where originally specified, a solid head gasket must be
retained.
13. Side stand mounting lugs – may be removed.
14. Throttle controls – must be self-closing as Article 14.12.3.
The following alterations must be made
15. Licence holders, club badges (except transfers), centre and prop stands, luggage carriers,
mirrors and rear registration plate (but NOT tail light) must be removed. Indicators may be
retained at the discretion of the rider but, if retained, the glasses must be taped.
16. Where breather pipes are fitted they must discharge via existing outlets into a catch tank as per
Article 14.18.
17. Head lamp and rear light glasses must be adequately taped to prevent splintering.
18. All electrical equipment fitted must be in working order except the stop lamp which MUST be
disconnected.
19. No addition or alteration by machining, welding, brazing, silver soldering or bonding may be
carried out externally to any part of the machine.
16.2 FORMULA SPECIFICATIONS
These specifications are in addition to and not in place of the Technical Regulations. Solo motorcycles
must comply with the following requirements.
1.
Classes
125 – Production based machines up to 125cc two stroke (includes the 72cc and 80cc Jawa and
Metrakit type machines)
250 – Production based machines 250cc four stroke.
400 – Production based machines 250cc two stroke, 400cc four stroke.
600 – Production based machines 600cc four stroke four cylinder and 675cc four stroke three
cylinder.
2.
Rebores up to the Manufacturers maximum recommended rebore size are permitted.
3.
Any moulded treaded tyre is permitted.
4.
Standard carburettors or fuel injection as homologated to be used.
16.3 ACU SUPERSPORT REGULATIONS
To comply with 2014 FIM Regulations and/or MCRCB Regulations with the exception of noise levels.
16.4 ACU/FIM SPECIFICATIONS FOR SUPERBIKE
To comply with 2014 FIM Regulations and/or MCRCB Regulations with the exception of noise levels.
16.5 ACU STOCKSPORT/SUPERSTOCK REGULATIONS
To comply with 2014 FIM Regulations and/or MCRCB Regulations with the exception of noise levels.
16.6 ACU SUPERSTOCK 600
To comply with 2014 FIM Europe Regulations with the exception of noise levels.
308
ROAD RACING
AUTO CYCLE UNION HANDBOOK 2015
SECTION 17 SIDECAR SPECIFICATIONS
These specifications are in addition to and not in place of the Technical Regulations. Sidecars
must comply with the following requirements. All Fuel used must comply with the ACU Standing
regulations.
17.1 GROUPS B1 AND B2 – GENERAL
1.
The three road wheels may be disposed so as to give two or three tracks.
2.
If three tracks are made then the centres of the tracks of the motorcycle shall not be more than
75mm apart.
3.
The sidecar may be placed either side of the motorcycle. Hinged sidecars and steerable sidecar
wheels are forbidden. Remote steering linkages and the use of articulated joints in the steering
mechanism are not allowed. By definition an articulated joint is one allowing movement in
more than one plane.
4.
The distance between the fore and aft centre lines of the tracks made by the motorcycle rear
and sidecar wheels must be not less than 800mm and not more than 1150mm. Maximum
dimension for a B2 overall width 1700mm (including exhaust systems). Maximum overall
height of 800mm at front. Maximum overall length 3300mm. Maximum wheelbase 2300mm.
5.
The minimum dimensions of the sidecar body shall be length 800mm, width 300mm (both
measured 15cm above the platform). Height of the passenger’s protective screen 300mm. Any
bodywork or fairing must not protrude more than 400mm in front of the most forward part of
the front tyre or rearward more than 400mm from the most rear part of the rear tyre.
6.
The engine must be positioned in front of the rear wheel in such a way that the centre line of
the engine – determined by half its overall width, shall not extend more than 160mm beyond
the centre line of the rear wheel track of the motorcycle. By definition the centre line of the
engine is the position midway between the centre lines of outermost cylinders for transverse
engines or the crankshaft for in-line engines.
7.
Any form of electronic traction control remains forbidden, this means that any traction
control system whether it is a part or a full system that is fitted as standard on an homologated
machine/engine CANNOT be used. Wheel speed sensors are not permitted.
8.
The ground clearance measured over the entire length and width of the vehicle race ready,
fully loaded with rider, passenger and fuel must be not less than 65mm with the handlebar in
a straight position. No device is permitted to reduce the 65mm ground clearance during the
course of the event. The under surface of the platform must, in principle, be flat.
9.
The suspension of the front wheel must be designed so that under suspension action and in
a straight ahead position, it shall only move vertically and in a single plane relative to the
motorcycle – the plane must be in the driving direction. This must occur without changes
to the camber or the tracking. The vertical travel of the front and rear wheel spindles under
suspension action must be at least 20mm.
10. The motorcycle must be steered by a non adjustable handlebar which is directly fixed to the
steering unit of the motorcycle. The handlebar must not be lower than the spindle of the front
wheel. The steering unit must operate through the front wheel.
11. The provision of coachwork or streamlining is optional, but the vehicle must have
accommodation for a passenger and the coachwork or streamlining shall not impede complete
freedom of movement by the rider or passenger at all times. Neither driver or passenger may
be attached to the machine (exception the driver must be attached by the cut out lanyard). The
streamlining must be easily detachable for inspection by technical control.
12. RIDER. The rider in the normal riding position must be completely visible, with the exception
of the arms, legs, and feet from above.
PASSENGER. A passenger must be carried and must always be protected from the road wheels
and both primary and final drives either by mudguard or some other means.
The passenger must be able to lean out to either side of the sidecar, for this purpose the vehicle
AUTO CYCLE UNION HANDBOOK 2015
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
20.
21.
22.
ROAD RACING
309
must be fitted with suitable hand-holds for the passenger to hold onto when leaning out.
The handholds must be of the ‘CLOSED LOOP’ type, a single projection hand-hold is not
permitted.
There shall be a clearance of at least 20mm between the streamlining and the extremities of the
handlebar, including any attachments thereto whatever the position of the handlebar
The battery must be covered in such a way that neither the rider or the passenger can come in
to contact with the battery or its contents.
A solid and effective protection between the rider and the engine must prevent direct contact
between his body or clothes and/or escaping flames or leaking fuel and oil.
Throttle Controls and Cut Out Device
1. Throttle controls must be self-closing when not held by the hand.
2. An ignition cut-out must be fitted to operate when the driver leaves the machine. This
ignition cut-out system must interrupt the primary circuit and must be wired for both the
supply and return of the current.
3. The ignition cut-out must be placed as near to the centre of the handlebar as possible and
must be operated by a non-elastic string of adequate length and thickness and strapped to the
driver’s body. A spiral cable (similar to that of a telephone wire) of maximum 1m extended
length is permitted.
Any electric fuel feed pump must be wired in such a way as to cut out if the engine cut out
device is operated.
The fuel tank must be sufficiently independently protected from the ground. A non-return
valve must be fitted to the petrol tank breather pipe, this pipe must discharge into a suitable
catch tank, minimum capacity 500ml. The fuel filler cap must be fitted in such a way that it does
not protrude from the fairing and cannot be torn off in the event of an accident.
All handlebar levers (clutch, brake etc.) must be ball ended. The ball diameter must be at least
19mm permanently fixed and forming an integral part of the lever. The maximum length of
control levers measured from the pivot point to the extremity of the ball must not exceed
200mm. Each control lever (hand and foot) must be mounted on an independent pivot.
The handlebar grips must not be longer than 150mm and must be attached to the ends of the
handlebar.
The rear driving wheel must be covered down to the level of the sidecar platform on the nearest
side to the sidecar wheel, and to the top of the rear wheel rim flange on the outside. The rear
facing section of the rear seat must cover the rear driving wheel down to the level of the rear
wheel spindle. The sidecar wheel must be enclosed from the sidecar platform and level with the
sidecar platform on the outside and around the periphery. Provision for the checking of the
sidecar wheel tyre pressure is allowed.
The exhaust system must fulfil all the requirements concerning noise control. Exhaust fumes
must be discharged towards the rear but not in a manner as to raise dust, foul the tyres or
brakes or inconvenience a passenger or any other rider. The furthest extremity of the exhaust
pipe must not exceed a vertical line drawn at a tangent to the rear edge of the sidecar platform.
On the side opposite a sidecar the exhaust pipes must not extend beyond the streamlining. On
the other side the exhaust pipes must not extend beyond the width of the sidecar. Exhaust pipes
must be fitted/positioned so that it is impossible for them to become entangled with another
machine
An airbox must be used with all four-stroke engines. The airbox intake size is not restricted.
(Except four-stroke engines in Formula II Class)
1. The airbox must completely close around the induction bell-mouths.
2. The carburettors or throttle-bodies may be entirely within the airbox.
3. The engine must have a closed breather system.
4. The engine breather must be connected and discharge in the airbox only. (by a sealed catch
tank if required)
310
ROAD RACING
5. The airbox must cover and collect fluids discharged from the bell-mouths.
6. The airbox must be constructed in such a way as to prevent any oil discharged in the airbox
from spilling on the track.
7. This oil containment must hold a minimum of 1000cc of oil.
8. The airbox must be sealed to prevent spillage of oil or fuel.
AUTO CYCLE UNION HANDBOOK 2015
17.2 GROUP B3 (CYCLECARS) – GENERAL
1.
The three road wheels, which may be disposed to give either two or three tracks shall be each
of at least 400mm in diameter measured over the outside of the tyre, or in the case of a scooter
with sidecar attached, as provided in the ACU Scooter Standing Regulations.
2.
One of the wheels may be replaced by two wheels provided the distance between the two
vertical centre lines of these two wheels does not exceed 200mm.
3.
The wheel track, or lateral distance between tracks shall be at least 800mm.
4.
The position of the engine is optional and the engine may drive one or more road wheels.
5
The provision of coachwork or streamlining is optional, but the vehicle must have
accommodation for one or more passengers.
6.
The passenger must always be completely protected from the road wheels and drive, either by
mud-guarding or some other means.
7.
A passenger must be carried in addition to the rider unless the Supplementary Regulations have
authorised the substitution of ballast. In such case, the ballast must consist of a single object
placed on, and fixed to the passenger’s seat, and of a weight of at least 132 lbs (60kg).
8.
Throttle controls must be self-closing.
17.3 GROUP B1, B2 AND B3 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
1.
Streamlining
1. The streamlining on three-wheelers must be designed and fitted to allow complete liberty of
movement to the rider, both when riding and when getting on or off the vehicle, without the
streamlining or any part of it having to be displaced.
2. For B1 and B2 sidecars neither the rider nor the passenger must be covered from above
nor may they be attached in any way. Furthermore, the passenger must be able to lean out on
either side. Spoilers and other aerodynamic devices must not surpass the streamlining. The
streamlining must not have any sharp edges.
3. The extreme forward part of the streamlining must not project forward in plan beyond the
most forward part of the front tyre by more than 400mm.
4. There shall be a clearance of at least 20mm between the streamlining and the extremities of
the handlebar (or other form of steering lever), including any attachment thereto whatever the
position of the handlebar.
5. Streamlining must be held to the machine by means of chassis extensions etc.
6. There must be no possibility of the streamlining coming into contact with the road surface,
impeding the front wheel or steering of the machine in the event of the failure of any individual
fairing mounting point.
2.
Brakes
Motorcycles in Group B1 and B3 must be equipped with at least two brakes, operating
independently on at least two of the road wheels, each giving complete control from the riding
position. If hydraulic system is used it must comply with Group B2 rules (below).
All vehicles in group B2 must have the following braking system. All three wheels must be
braked
1. The brake system must consist of one main system with at least two circuits operating
separately, one of the circuits must operate on at least two of the three wheels.
2. If one circuit fails the other must work efficiently
AUTO CYCLE UNION HANDBOOK 2015
3.
4.
5.
6.
ROAD RACING
311
3. An emergency system operated by a handlebar lever or a foot lever with a simple circuit
operating on either the front or rear wheel of the motorcycle.
4. A sidecar brake is mandatory
5. Dispensation has been given to LCR style (i.e. any “long” type) sidecars with respect to the
auxiliary handlebar operated brake.
6. Only ferrous brake discs are permitted. (For Classic and Vintage rules contact the relevant
bodies).
Wheels and Tyres
For sidecars and three-wheelers (Group B1, B2 and B3), the wheel rims shall be at least 254mm
in diameter and 64mm in width. All wheels must be of metal construction, any modification to
the rim or the spokes of the original cast or composite wheel as supplied by the manufacturer is
prohibited.
For all meetings the use of slick tyres is permitted. The diameter of the tyre must be at least
400mm and the width 100mm, maximum front tyre width 220mm.
1. Tubeless Tyres. If a tyre is to be run tubeless it is recommended that the internal rim
dimensions are approved by the manufacturer of the tyres being used. Tyre/rim relationship
for tubeless application is very critical.
2. Slick Tyres. The surface of a slick tyre must contain three or more hollows across the width
of the tyre around its circumference at 180 degree intervals or less, indicating the limit of wear
on the centre and shoulder areas of the tyre. When at least two of these indicator hollows across
the width of the tyre become worn on different parts of the periphery, the tyre must no longer
be used.
Red Warning Lights
Sidecars must be equipped for the duration of the event with a functional rear facing red antifog lamp, measuring a minimum of 30 sq cm, and producing a minimum 1500 MCD light.
The light must be installed at least 100mm off the ground, located in the area between the
back wheel and the sidecar platform. The light must be mounted on a part of the suspended
body (not on any unsuspended parts) and ensure no obstruction from the fairing and/or the
passenger.
Red lights must be switched on when a “Wet Race” is declared.
Air Intakes
Cooling air intakes must be so constructed that there is NO forward projection/protrusion to
catch or foul in the event of accident.
Oil And Coolant Containment
1. In the area directly below the engine, the oil containment tray must be constructed to hold,
in case of an engine breakdown at least half of the total oil and engine coolant capacity used in
the engine (minimum 5 litres). The surrounding edges of the tray must be at least 50mm above
the bottom of the tray.
2. The front edge of the oil bay reservoir wall must be extended upwards to just below (within
20mm) the exhaust ports of the engine.
3. Holes for the engine mounts (hangers) must be sealed.
4. From a vertical view, the engine must be located completely inside the oil bay platform.
5. The rear wheel must be protected from any possible oil spray. To make this protection,
the engine and rear wheel compartment must be separated. This separation must be created
by installing a solid divider (wall) running from the top of the inside of the bodywork to the
bottom of the oil tray. This divider (wall) must overlap the rear edge of the oil tray down to the
bottom.
6. All machines must use this tray.
7. Oil cooler must not be mounted on or above the body of the sidecar. The location of the oil
tank and oil cooler should be placed where it is least likely to be damaged in an accident.
8. Oil lines containing positive pressure, if replaced must be of metal reinforced construction
312
7.
ROAD RACING
AUTO CYCLE UNION HANDBOOK 2015
with swaged or threaded connectors. Manufactured solid construction oil lines, where practical,
must be replaced also. All sidecars shall attach oil absorbent materials of no less a quality than
3M Product number T156 or CEP Sorbents product number CEP-EP100.
This material shall be securely fixed to the following areas of the sidecar:
1. The entire oil tray, both the bottom and inside wall of the same. The volume of material used
in this area according to manufacturers specifications, shall not be less than 3 litres of oil.
2. Any bodywork directly covering the engine. In the event that oil is absorbed by the material,
it must be replaced before the next track session.
3. The material must be attached in such a way that it should be easily replaced, yet not become
displaced while on the track, and its effectiveness is not inhibited, i.e. if an adhesive is used it
must not clog the material, causing it to lose its absorbent properties. All absorbent material
used, shall be non-flammable by design.
Vintage and Classic (prior to 1973 construction) machines are exempt from the above
requirement 6.8
4. Where an oil breather pipe is fitted the outlet must discharge into a catch tank in an easily
accessible position which must be emptied before the start of the meeting, minimum capacity
500ml.
Oil Catch Tanks
1. Two strokes. Where an oil breather pipe is fitted, the outlet must be discharged into a catch
tank located in an easily accessible position and which must be emptied before the start of the
race. The minimum size of catch tank shall be 250ml for gearboxes.
2. Four-stroke. Motorcycles must have a closed breather system. The oil breather line must be
connected and discharge in the airbox only. (by a sealed catch tank if required)
SECTION 18 OPEN 600 AND FORMULA II SIDECAR
SPECIFICATIONS
Open 600 and Formula II Sidecars must comply with the general Sidecar specification unless changed
by the following specifications:
Introduction. The object of this specification is to make use of cheaper, more readily available engine
units of theoretically similar power outputs and of widely different configurations and hopefully to
provide less expensive racing of a more traditional kind to the benefit of competitors, constructors
and spectators. Hub centre steering, remote steering linkages and the use of articulated joints in the
steering mechanism are not allowed.
18.1 ENGINE TYPES
The only permitted engines for the Open 600 sidecar class are:
Up to 350cc 2 stroke, twin cylinder
501–600cc, 4 stroke, 4 cylinder
Production based Rotary engines are not permitted.
Over-boring is not permitted.
Induction systems.
For the FII British Sidecar Championships and other events as specified
a.
The only permitted engines for this class are:
501–600cc, 4 stroke, 4 cylinder, Production based
501–600cc, 4 stroke: Any carburettor is permitted.
501–600cc four-stroke Fuel injection engines: Fuel injection systems are permitted using only
the throttle-bodies as homologated for the engine concerned
The injectors must be standard units as on the homologated engine.
Bell mouths, intake tract devices (Velocity stacks, air funnels) may be modified or replaced.
Variable length intake devices (Velocity stacks, air funnels) that function while the engine is
operating are not allowed, unless such a system is used on homologated machine/engine.
AUTO CYCLE UNION HANDBOOK 2015
b.
c.
d.
e.
ROAD RACING
313
Butterfly cannot be changed or modified. Where fitted a secondary butterfly or slide may be
locked in the fully open position.
Any fuel pump may be used.
Homologated fuel pressure regulators must remain unmodified.
The fuel ignition ECU and Ignition Control Unit may be changed.
Everything above the head gasket must remain as for the road going homologated motorcycle.
(i.e. NO race kits or kit components except as below)
Camshafts must be as homologated but timing (including cam wheels) and tensioning devices
are free.
Everything below the head gasket is free.
Fuel injection instruments/fuel injectors must remain as homologated.
18.2 GENERAL CONSTRUCTION
The Sidecar may be placed either side of the motorcycle. Hinged sidecars and steerable sidecar wheels
are forbidden. Neither the rider nor passenger may be attached to the machine. Remote steering
linkages and the use of articulated joints in the steering mechanism are not allowed. By definition an
articulated joint is one allowing movement in more than one plane.
The three road wheels may be disposed as to give two or three tracks.
If three tracks are made then the centres of the tracks of the motorcycle shall not be more than 75mm
apart.
A passenger must be carried and must always be protected from the road wheels and both primary
and final drives either by mudguard or some other means.
The main frame (See Figure 1A) must consist of a minimum, of a steering head, a frame to
accommodate the engine, and a main spar to the sidecar wheel, which will be made from good quality
steel tube.
The tubing used for the construction of the frame may be of a circular or non-circular section. If
circular, the outside diameter shall not exceed 101.6mm. If non-circular, the maximum cross section
shall not exceed 101.6mm. measured at right angles to any flat face.
These three components must be permanently fixed by welding or brazing.
The rear swinging arm outer pivot housings (See Figure 1B) may be detachable from the main frame,
the pivot housings must be made from either steel or a suitable solid aluminium alloy billet. The
finished article if made from aluminium alloy must be hard anodised. The use of castings for the outer
pivot housings are forbidden.
The sidecar wheel upright or flange plate (See Figure 1C) at the end of the main sidecar wheel
spar may be detachable, the upright flange plate must be made from either steel or a suitable solid
aluminium alloy billet. The finished article if made from aluminium alloy must be hard anodised, any
supporting tie rods to the upright or flange plate must be made of steel. The use of castings for the
sidecar wheel upright or flange plate are forbidden.
The sidecar wheel stub axle housing (See Figure 1D) may be detachable from the sidecar wheel
upright/flange plate, the housing must be made from either steel or a suitable solid aluminium alloy
billet. The finished article if made from aluminium alloy must be hard anodised. The use of castings
for the sidecar wheel stub axle housing are forbidden.
Reinforcement of the steering head is allowed. The steering head may be fully boxed in to a maximum
of 305mm, measured from any point between the top and the bottom of the steering head spindle
centre line (See Figure 1 X.X). Should any lightening or inspection holes be added to the “Fully Boxed
In” section, they will be deemed as still “Fully Boxed In” and not open.
The front forks should be either a leading/trailing fork, or links with the wheel equally supported on
each side. The construction of the front forks and yokes must be made of good quality steel and must
be either welded or brazed during construction. The lower loop must be made of good quality steel.
Minimum suspension travel to be 20mm.
The rear swinging arm must be made of good quality steel, single sided swinging arms are allowed,
314
ROAD RACING
AUTO CYCLE UNION HANDBOOK 2015
and must have minimum of 20mm of travel in a single plane. The rear swinging arm pivot spindle
must be 90 degrees to the fore and aft centre line of the rear wheel. The swinging arm must either be
welded or brazed during construction, the dimensions for the swinging arm are free. Wishbone type
swinging arms fitted to monocoque chassis’s are forbidden.
The use of composite construction is forbidden with the exception of the sidecar platform, i.e.
aluminium or carbon fibre skinned honeycomb.
The use of titanium in the construction of the frame, front forks, handlebars, swinging arm and wheel
spindles is forbidden.
For wheel spindles, the use of light alloys is also forbidden.
Under trays must be detachable.
Monocoque construction is forbidden.
18.3 ENGINE POSITION
The engine must be positioned in such a way that the centre line of the engine (by definition a
position midway between centre lines of outermost cylinders) shall not exceed 160mm beyond the
centre line of the rear wheel of the motorcycle.
The engine must be positioned behind the steering head and in front of the driver.
The drive must be transmitted to the road through the rear wheel of the motorcycle. An engine
positioned behind the rider and in front of the rear wheel is forbidden.
18.4DIMENSIONS
Weight (Minimum) 136.5kg. without fuel. The addition of ballast to reach this weight is forbidden.
Width (Overall Maximum) 1575mm.
Wheelbase (Maximum) 1651mm.
Track 800mm minimum, 1105mm maximum. The distance is measured from the centre of the track
left by the rear wheel to the centre of the track left by the sidecar wheel.
Height (Overall Maximum) 800mm.
Ground clearance. The ground clearance measured over the entire length and width of the vehicle
race ready, fully loaded with rider, passenger and fuel must be not less than 65mm with the
handlebars on in a straight position. No device is permitted to reduce the 65mm ground clearance
during the course of the event.
Note: The imperial measurements are no longer used so the Metric figures have been rounded up to
nearest mm the differences were 0.1mm and 0.2mm.
18.5 STREAMLINING AND BODYWORK
The streamlining must be easily detachable for Technical Inspection. Aerofoils or spoilers are not
permitted on streamlining.
The forward extremity of the streamlining shall not be more than 400mm in front of the line taken
from a vertical tangent to the front tyre.
The extreme rear edge of the streamlining must not be more than 400mm to the rear of the line taken
from a vertical tangent to the rear tyre.
The provision of coachwork or streamlining is optional, but the vehicle must have accommodation
for a passenger and the coachwork or streamlining shall not impede complete freedom of movement
by the rider or passenger at all times.
Whatever the position of the handlebars, there must be a space of at least 20mm between the
streamlining and the ends of the handlebars or any other parts of the steering mechanism or front
wheel.
A solid and effective protection must be fitted between the rider and the engine, this protection must
prevent direct contact between the riders body or clothing and escaping flames or leaking fuel or oil.
The fairing must be mounted in such a way as to ensure the integrity of the whole installation in the
event of failure of any individual mounting.
AUTO CYCLE UNION HANDBOOK 2015
ROAD RACING
315
18.6PASSENGER PLATFORM
Minimum dimensions 800mm by 300mm measured 150mm above the platform. The orientation is
free.
RIDER The rider in the normal riding position must be completely visible, with the exception of the
arms, legs, and feet from above.
PASSENGER The passenger must be able to lean out to either side of the sidecar, for this purpose the
vehicle must be fitted with suitable hand-holds for the passenger to hold on to when leaning out. The
hand-holds must be of the closed loop type, a single projection hand-hold is not permitted.
18.7 AIR INTAKES
Cooling air intakes must be so constructed that there is NO forward projection/protrusion to catch or
foul in the event of accident.
18.8 OIL AND COOLANT CONTAINMENT
In the area directly below the engine, the oil containment tray must be constructed to hold, in case
of an engine break down, at least half of the total oil and engine coolant capacity used in the engine
(minimum 5 litres).
The surrounding edges of the tray must be at least 50mm high measured vertically from the bottom
of the tray
The frontal edge of the oil tray wall must be extended upwards to arrive just below (within 20mm) of
the exhaust ports of the engine.
Holes for the engine mounts (hangers) must be sealed.
From a vertical view, the engine must be located completely inside the oil tray platform.
The rear wheel must be protected from any possible oil spray. To make this protection, the engine
and rear wheel compartment must be separated. This separation must be created by installing a solid
divider (wall) running from the top of the inside of the bodywork to the bottom of the oil tray and to
the full width of the rear tyre. This divider (wall) must overlap the rear edge of the oil tray down to
the bottom.
All machines must use this tray.
All sidecars shall attach oil absorbent materials of no less a quality than 3M Product number T156 or
CEP Sorbents product number CEP-EP100.
This material shall be securely fixed to the following areas of the sidecar.
The entire oil-tray, both the bottom and the inside walls of the same. The volume of material used in
this area, according to the manufacturers specifications, shall absorb not less than 3 litres of oil.
Any bodywork directly covering the engine.
In the event that oil is absorbed by the material, it must be replaced before the next track session.
The material must be attached in such a way that it should be easily replaced, yet must not become
dislodged whilst on the track, and its effectiveness is not inhibited, i.e. if an adhesive is used it must
not clog the material, causing it to lose its absorbent properties.
All absorbent material shall be non-flammable by design.
Oil-lines containing positive pressure, if replaced, must be of metal reinforced construction with
swaged or threaded connectors.
Oil coolers must not be mounted on or above the bodywork of the sidecar.
The location of the oil tank and the oil cooler should be placed in a location where it is least likely to
be damaged on an accident.
Sump plug, oil filters, Ignition pickup covers and Clutch centre covers should all be lockwired or
lockplated.
The gear lever should exit via a rubber boot or flexible seals if the gear lever exits outside the retaining
area.
The chain slot must have a flexible seal fitted.
316
ROAD RACING
AUTO CYCLE UNION HANDBOOK 2015
18.9AIRBOX
An airbox must be used with all four-stroke engines.
The airbox intake sizes are restricted as follows
If 1 intake is used a maximum of 103mm lnternal Diameter is permitted
If 2 intakes are used a maximum of 73mm Internal Diameter per intake is permitted or
equivalent area if none circular section(s) are used measured within 50mm of the point of entry
into the airbox.
The airbox must completely close around the induction bell-mouths.
The carburettors or throttle-bodies may be entirely within the airbox.
The engine must have a closed breather system.
The engine breather must be connected and discharge in the airbox only (by a sealed catch tank if
required)
The airbox must cover and collect fluids discharged from the bell-mouths.
The airbox must be constructed in such a way as to prevent any oil discharged in the airbox from
spilling on the track.
This oil containment must hold a minimum of 1000cc of oil.
The airbox must be sealed to prevent spillage of oil or fuel.
18.10 OIL CATCH TANKS
Four-stroke. Motorcycles must have a closed breather system. The oil breather line must be connected
and discharge into the airbox only. (by a sealed catch tank if required).
18.11 WHEELS
The minimum diameter of an inflated tyre must be 400mm. All wheels must be of metal construction,
any modification to the rim or the spokes of the original cast composite wheel as supplied by the
manufacturer is prohibited.
18.12 STEERING
Steering of the front wheel must be accomplished by non-adjustable handlebars securely fixed to the
forks or yokes of the motorcycle. They must be secured to steering members turning the front wheel
and its supports directly with no intermediate push or pull rods. Handlebars and all steering bearings
must be located on the sprung portion of the front suspension.
Any form of remote steering is forbidden.
Handlebar width 450mm minimum.
Steering lock angle each side of straight ahead position to be 20 degrees minimum, measured at the
headstock.
Whatever the position of the handlebars the front wheel must never touch the streamlining.
Handlebar clamps must be carefully radiused and engineered so as to avoid fracture points in the bar.
18.13 THROTTLE CONTROLS
Throttle controls must be self-closing when not held by the hand.
18.14 CONTROL LEVERS
All handlebar levers (clutch, brake etc.) must be ball ended. The ball diameter must be as least 19mm
permanently fixed and forming an integral part of the lever.
18.15 BRAKES
All three wheels must be braked. The brake system must consist of:
One main system with at least two circuits operating separately, one of the circuits must operate on at
least two of the three wheels.
If one circuit fails the other must work efficiently.
AUTO CYCLE UNION HANDBOOK 2015
ROAD RACING
317
An emergency system operated by a simple circuit operating on either the front or rear wheel of the
motorcycle is compulsory.
Only ferrous discs allowed.
18.16 TYRES
For all meetings the use of slick tyres is permitted. The wheel rim shall be at least 254mm in diameter
and 64mm in width. The diameter of the tyre must be as least 400mm and the width 100mm,
maximum front tyre width 220mm.
The surface of a slick tyre must contain two or more hollows at 180 degree intervals or less, indicating
the limit of wear on the centre and shoulder areas of the tyre. When at least two of these indicator
hollows become worn on different parts of the periphery, the tyre must no longer be used.
18.17 MUDGUARDS AND WHEEL PROTECTION
The rear driving wheel must be covered down to the level of the sidecar platform on the sidecar
platform side of the wheel and to the centre of the driving wheel on the outermost side of the wheel.
The rear facing section of the rear seat must cover the rear driving wheel down to the level of the rear
wheel spindle.
The sidecar wheel must be enclosed from the sidecar platform and level with the sidecar platform on
the outside and around the periphery. Provision for the checking of the sidecar wheel tyre pressure is
allowed.
18.18 EXHAUST PIPES
The exhaust system must fulfil all the requirements concerning noise control. Exhaust fumes must be
discharged in a manner so as to not raise dust, foul the tyres or brakes or inconvenience a passenger
or any other driver. The furthest extremity of the exhaust pipe must not exceed a vertical line drawn
at a tangent to the rear edge of the sidecar platform.
On the side opposite a sidecar the exhaust pipes must not extend beyond the streamlining. On the
other side the exhaust pipes must not extend beyond the width of the sidecar.
Exhaust pipes must be fitted/positioned so that it is impossible for them to become entangled with
another machine.
18.19 FUEL TANK
Fuel tanks must be sufficiently independently protected from the ground. A non-return valve must be
fitted to the petrol tank breather pipe, this pipe must discharge into a suitable catch tank, minimum
capacity 500ml.
The fuel filler cap must be fitted in such a way that it does not protrude from the fairing and cannot
be torn off in an accident.
18.20 BATTERY
The battery must be covered in such a way that neither the driver nor the passenger can come into
contact with the battery or its contents.
18.21 CUT OUT DEVICE
An ignition cut-out must be fitted to operate when the driver leaves the machine. This cut-out system
must interrupt the primary circuit and must be wired for both the supply and return current. The
cut-out must be placed as near to the centre of the handlebar as possible and must be operated by a
non-elastic string of adequate length and thickness and strapped to the driver’s body. A spiral cable
(similar to that of a telephone wire) of maximum 1m extended length is permitted.
Any electric fuel feed pump must be wired in such a way as to cut out if the engine cut-out device is
operated.
318
ROAD RACING
AUTO CYCLE UNION HANDBOOK 2015
18.22 RED WARNING LIGHT
Sidecars must be equipped for all the duration of the event with a functional rear-facing red anti-fog
lamp, measuring a minimum of 30 sq.cm and producing a minimum of 1500 MCD continuous light.
Pulsating lights are not permitted.
The light must be installed at least 100mm off the ground, located in the area between the back wheel
and the sidecar platform.
The light must be mounted on a part of the suspended body, (not on any unsuspended parts) and
ensure no obstruction from the fairing and/or the passenger.
Red lights must be switched on when a “Wet Race” is declared.
Classic or Vintage machines racing exclusively in their own race or event are exempt.
18.23 TRACTION CONTROL
Any electronic traction control system is forbidden. Wheel speed sensors are not permitted.
18.24 REAR VIEW MIRROR
External rear view mirrors having suitable dimensions and mountings may be used for closed public
road races only.
SECTION 19 FORMULA 1 SIDECAR SPECIFICATION
Formula 1 Sidecars must comply with the general Sidecar specification unless changed by the
following specifications:
19.1
1.
2.
3.
ENGINE SPECIFICATIONS
Two Stroke Engines
Maximum 500cc
Prototype engine design is allowed
Maximum of 4 cylinders
Four Stroke Engines
Motorcycles of mass production only Maximum 1000cc
Maximum 4 cylinders
Balancing and Lightening are permitted
AUTO CYCLE UNION HANDBOOK 2015
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
ROAD RACING
319
Con rods may be changed, however the use of carbon or titanium is not allowed in their
construction. The use of exotic materials is not allowed, (i.e. ceramics, metal matrix/aluminium
beryllium) unless as fitted by manufacturer to homologated engine.
Piston rings and pins may be changed
The original cylinder head may be modified, however the number of ports and valves must
remain as originally produced by the manufacturer
Camshafts may be altered or replaced. Method of cam drive must remain as originally
produced by the manufacturer
The Ignition/Injection Engine Control system is free.
Maximum of 6 speed transmission
The clutch may be modified but must remain either wet or dry types as originally produced.
The generator and/or electric starter may be removed
Carburettors may be altered or replaced
The use of exotic materials is not allowed, (i.e. ceramics, metal matrix/aluminium beryllium).
Unless as fitted by manufacturer to homologated engine.
The oil lubrication system is free.
19.2ENGINE
Must be positioned in front of the rear wheel in such a way that the centre line of the engine shall
not extend more that 160mm beyond the centre line of the rear wheel track of the motorcycle. By
definition the centre line of the engine is the position midway between the centre lines of the outmost
cylinders for transverse engines, or the crankshaft for in-line engines.
19.3DIMENSIONS
Overall width
Maximum 1700mm (67 ins) (including exhaust system)
Overall height
Maximum 800mm (31.5) (with exception of airbox max height 950mm (37.5 ins)
Overall length
Maximum 3300mm (130 ins)
Overall wheelbase Maximum 2300mm (90.5)
19.4STEERING
The motorcycle must be steered by a handlebar. The handlebar extremities must not be lower than the
front wheel spindle. (nor more that 500mm (19.7 ins) behind the front wheel spindle in the straightahead position) (the steering axis must not be offset more than 75mm (2.9 ins) from the front wheel
centre line).
19.5SUSPENSION
The suspension of the front wheel must be designed so that under suspension action and in the
straight ahead position, the wheel shall only move vertically and in a single plane relative to the
motorcycle. The plane must be on the driving direction. This must occur without changes to the
camber or the tracking. The vertical travel of the front and rear wheel spindles under suspension
action must be at least 20mm (0.75 ins). The use of active suspensions is forbidden.
19.6 WHEEL PROTECTION
The rear wheel and sidecar wheel must be enclosed down to the level of the sidecar platform on the
inside. The sidecar wheel on the outside must be enclosed down to the height of its axle centre-line.
The rear wheel must be enclosed down to the top of the rim flange on the outside.
19.7EXHAUST
The exhaust pipe must not extend beyond the width of the sidecar and the furthest extremity of
the exhaust pipe must not exceed the vertical line drawn at a tangent to the rear edge of the sidecar
bodywork.
320
ROAD RACING
AUTO CYCLE UNION HANDBOOK 2015
Exhaust pipes fitted to the side of the sidecar must be covered so that it is impossible for the passenger
to be burnt. The ends of the exhaust pipes fitted to the sidecar must be so positioned or protected that
it is impossible for them to become entangled with another machine.
SECTION 20 PARADES AT ACU/MCRCB ROAD RACE MEETINGS
20.1INTRODUCTION
These Standing Regulations for Parades have been established in order to provide a framework under
which all Parades at ACU/MCRCB Events are to be organised.
20.2ORGANISATION
Parades may be organised within an ACU/MCRCB permitted event. Details may be included in the
Supplementary Regulations for the event or separate Parade Supplementary Regulations may be
issued.
1.
There must be a separate Entry Form for each Parade. An entry fee may be charged.
2.
All Parades will be covered by the ACU/MCRCB Permit issued for the meeting.
3.
Parades may be organised by Circuit Owners, Promoters, ACU Affiliated Clubs, MCRCB
or any body or organisation appointed by the aforementioned. However, in all cases the
organisation on the circuit will be carried out under the supervision of the Clerk of the Course
and the Organisers of the racing programme of the event. A senior representative of the
Organisers of the Parade must be present in Race Control whilst the parade is in progress.
4.
The Organisers of the Race Meeting (during which the parade will take place) and the Permit
Issuing Authority must approve the Parade Supplementary Regulations and all other associated
documents before these are issued to prospective entrants.
5.
If the Secretary of the Meeting is responsible for the signing on of the riders he must be
provided with a list of participants together with all other documentation on the day of the
event.
6.
The Secretary of the Parade is responsible for the signing-on procedures and the production of
all other documentation.
7.
Every participant in a parade is required to sign-on on the official forms provided and declare
that their machine and clothing conform to the regulations.
8.
The Secretary of the parade, the Organisers of the Meeting or the ACU Technical Officer may
refuse the participation in the parade of any participant at any time.
9.
The Secretary of the Parade is required to provide the Secretary of the meeting with a complete
signing-on sheet covering every rider and passenger one hour before the start of the relevant
parade.
10. Insurance cover is included as follows:
i) Public Liability Insurance is included in the Permit for the event.
ii) The Insurance Company (Brokers) will be appointed by the ACU/MCRCB.
20.3PR5 – SPECTATOR PARADES – SPEED CONTROLLED
Where an opportunity is provided for riders of road going motorcycles to participate for their own
pleasure on their own machines in controlled circumstances.
1.
Machine Qualification. Machines must be road going, no race machines are permitted.
Machines must be road worthy – the decision of the technical official/organiser is final in this
matter. Organisers may limit the type of machine allowed or grade the machines into separate
parades.
2.
Rider Qualifications.
1. Riders under 70 years of age must hold a current ACU Road Race Competition Licence, or
a current ACU Road Race Parade Licence or a Class A DVLA motorcycle licence. Participants
AUTO CYCLE UNION HANDBOOK 2015
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
ROAD RACING
321
(including sidecar passengers) who are 70 years of age or over must hold a current ACU Parade
Licence or a current ACU Road Race Competition Licence.
2. The minimum age for participation in Parades is 14 years. Where a participant is under the
age of 18 years a Parental Consent Form must also be completed.
3. All participants must complete an Entry Form Declaration using the standard ACU wording
for participation in Road Racing.
4. Riders must be members of an ACU affiliated club.
Documents. Road fund licence (tax disc), DVLA motorcycle licence and/or ACU licence
and certificate of motor insurance applicable to that rider and machine must be produced at
signing-on.
Insurance
1. The Insurance Company (Brokers) will be appointed by the ACU/MCRCB.
2. Organisers of PR5 Parades are expected to pay a fee in respect of the Public Liability
premium. Please contact the Road Race Department for further details.
3. No Personal Accident insurance is included in respect of PR5 parades.
4. No cover is included in respect of machines, clothing or other personal property etc.
Clothing
Full leather clothing (one piece or two piece zipped together) in good condition or suitable
protective motorcycle clothing, including boots and gloves, designed for road use must be
worn. (i.e. no paddock jackets, jeans, trainers etc. will be allowed on the track.)
Safety Helmets
Safety helmets must be worn and fastened properly at all times and must be legal for road use.
ACU Gold standard is recommended.
Identification
A suitable means of identifying approved machines, riders and passengers must be used (i.e.
headlamp stickers and wristbands).
Technical Control
1. Participants must ensure their machines and clothing meet the conditions stated in this
document.
2. An approved ACU Technical Officer will be appointed. Checks will be carried out but limited
to checking documentation and Registration Numbers.
Briefing
1. The Clerk of the Course of the Organising Club will conduct a briefing which all riders
participating in the parade must attend.
2. Failure to attend the briefing will result in disqualification unless the Clerk of the Course has
previously issued a waiver in writing to any participant.
3. The briefing will include Flag Signals, Speed, Safety, the Timetable and all other general
arrangements for the conduct of the Parade.
Speed
The average speed of the participants must not exceed 60mph. The speed of the parade will be
dictated by the Clerk of the Course, who will take into consideration the circuit, conditions
and machinery, and will be controlled by Pace Cars or Travelling Marshals. No participant is
allowed to overtake a pace car or Travelling Marshal.
Number of riders permitted
Parades containing 60 or less riders will be controlled by two pace cars/travelling marshals, one
at the front and one at the rear. Parades containing over 60 riders are permitted, but will be
controlled by one extra pace car/travelling marshals for each additional block of up to 60 riders.
20.4PR6 CLASSIC MACHINE AND/OR RIDER PARADES
Being Parades usually organised as an integral part of a ACU/MCRCB permitted race meeting where
an opportunity is provided for “Past Master” class riders to participate to celebrate past performances
322
ROAD RACING
AUTO CYCLE UNION HANDBOOK 2015
and/or riders of Classic machines or Machines of Historical Interest to participate for their own
pleasure in controlled circumstances.
1.
Non competitive
No Classic parade will include any competitive element in any circumstances.
2.
Courses
Only courses licenced by the ACU/MCRCB for road racing may be used.
3.
Permit and Supplementary Regulations
Parades require an ACU/MCRCB Permit which will be issued following approval of the
Supplementary Regulations and Entry Forms to be issued for the event. Where a Classic Parade
is to be organised as part of an ACU/MCRCB Permitted race meeting it will be held under the
Permit issued for that event.
4.
Machine qualification
Classic machines must be equipped with racing number plates and display the allocated riding
numbers.
Machines must be examined by an ACU Technical Official. Organisers may limit the type of
machine allowed or grade the machines into separate parades.
5.
Documents
Riders are required to provide a commentator’s information sheet with the history of both
themselves and their machine. Riders are also required to sign-on on the form provided by the
Organising Club on the day of the event.
6.
Insurance
Insurance cover is included as follows:
1. The Insurance Company (Brokers) will be appointed by the ACU/MCRCB.
2. Personal Accident benefits are included for those taking part in PR6 Parades and is limited to
£10,000 Death, and £20,000 Loss of or loss of use of two limbs or the sight of two eyes, or loss of
use of one limb and one eye, the loss of or loss of use of a limb or the sight of an eye. There are
no weekly benefits in respect of temporary or total disablement.
3. Should any participants be found to be in breach of these Standing Regulations for Parades
the Insurance arrangements stated in this article will be null and void.
4. The Insurance is for personal accident only and does not cover machine, clothing, equipment
etc.
5. The Secretary of the Parade is responsible for the payment of Personal Accident Insurance
premiums, which must be submitted to the Secretary of the meeting on the day of the parade
at the latest. The Secretary of the Meeting is then responsible for the payment of the Insurance
Premiums to the Brokers.
6. No cover is included in respect of machines, clothing or other personal property etc.
7.
Rider qualification
1. Riders under 70 years of age must hold a current ACU Road Race Competition Licence, or
a current ACU Road Race Parade Licence or a Class A DVLA motorcycle licence. Participants
(including sidecar passengers) who are 70 or over must hold an ACU Parade Licence or a
current ACU Road Race Competition Licence.
2. The minimum age for participation in Parades is 14 years. Where a participant is under the
age of 18 years a Parental Consent Form must also be completed.
3. All participants must complete an Entry Form Declaration using the standard ACU wording
for participation in Road Racing.
4. Riders with a licence from other FMNs must produce valid Start Permission and Medical
Repatriation to at least FIM standards.
5. Riders must be members of an ACU affiliated club
8.
Briefing
1. The Clerk of the Course of the Organising Club will conduct a briefing which all riders
participating in the parade must attend.
AUTO CYCLE UNION HANDBOOK 2015
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
ROAD RACING
323
2. Failure to attend the briefing will result in disqualification unless the Clerk of the Course has
previously issued a waiver in writing to any participant.
3. The briefing will include Flag Signals, Speed, Safety, the Timetable and all other general
arrangements for the conduct of the Parade.
Method of start
Riders will be filtered on to the circuit in small groups. Parades for “Past Masters” only may be
started either singly or in small groups from the designated Starting grid at the discretion of the
Organisers and where so required for the introduction of noteworthy participants to spectators.
Noise
The maximum noise level is 105 dB/A. Noise levels will be measured in accordance with the
procedure specified in the ACU Standing Regulations for Road Racing. Exceptionally, noise
levels may be increased on special occasions for the demonstration of particular riders or
machines. In all such cases the permission of all appropriate sporting and civil authorities must
be obtained beforehand.
Speed
The speed of the Parade will be determined by the Clerk of the Course who will take into
consideration the circuit, conditions and machinery. Classic parades will not generally be speed
restricted, but the organiser may use pace cars and/or travelling marshals as described for PR5
parades if required. The Clerk of the Course will immediately disqualify any rider deemed to be
riding in an inappropriate manner by means of a Black Flag displayed at the Start and Finish
line together with a board bearing the rider’s number.
Conduct of Parades
Parades must be conducted with Officials, Marshalling and Medical services all in place.
Protective Clothing and Helmets
As per Road Race Standing Regulations. Riders must present themselves at Technical Control
fully clothed for Parading.
Number of Riders permitted
The maximum number of Paraders in any session will be the same as that authorised on the
ACU MCRCB Circuit Licence for Official Practice.
Officials
The Organisers will appoint a Parade Secretary to be responsible for the proper completion of
all entry forms and any other associated documents. The Club will appoint an ACU licensed
Clerk of the Course to be responsible to the Stewards of the Meeting and to the Organisers for
the general good management and conduct of the Parade.
SECTION 21 ORGANISATION OF OFFICIAL TEST DAYS
A day allocated for testing with no official results or timing. This may be associated with a Permitted
Meeting or held under a separate Official Test Day Permit. The following conditions will apply:
21.1ORGANISATION
This will be authorised by the issue of the Permit to the organising Club or Body.
21.2INSURANCE
Insurance both Public Liability and Personal Accident must comply with Standing Regulations.
21.3 MEDICAL COVER
As laid down in the Minimum Requirements for Road Race Medical Services in the Road Race Safety
Section of this Handbook.
324
ROAD RACING
AUTO CYCLE UNION HANDBOOK 2015
21.4OFFICIALS
There must be a minimum of 1 marshal on duty at each corner or bend. The Race Control must be
controlled by officials authorised by the Permitting Body and the Regulations complied with.
21.5RIDERS
All riders must have a valid competition licence appropriate for the machine they intend to ride. All
riders must sign on prior to taking part.
21.6 JUNIOR RIDERS
For all riders under 18 years of age the following must be produced before participation
1) A completed Parental Consent form.
2) A Temporary Discharge Form from their school or college if in full time Education.
21.7 TECHNICAL CONTROL
Riders are responsible for ensuring both machine and equipment comply with the Standing
Regulations for Road Race.
21.8 ON CIRCUIT CONTROL
The Track Licence condition regarding numbers allowed onto the circuit to Practice must be
complied with.
21.9CIRCUIT
With the exception of safety and medical requirements detailed in this article the circuit must comply
with the Track Licence.
Diagram D
Diagram 1
AUTO CYCLE UNION HANDBOOK 2015
Diagram 2
Diagram 3
ROAD RACING
325
326
ROAD RACING
Number plate
AUTO CYCLE UNION HANDBOOK 2015
AUTO CYCLE UNION HANDBOOK 2015
Supermoto
SUPERMOTO
Standing Regulations
327
328
SUPERMOTO
AUTO CYCLE UNION HANDBOOK 2015
SECTION 1 MEETINGS
1.1
Categories Of Meetings330
1.2International330
1.3
European Open330
1.4National330
1.5Open330
1.6Restricted330
1.7
Eligibility Of Foreign Riders In Open And Restricted Meetings331
1.8
Practice Meetings And Test Days331
1.9
Conditions For Supermoto Meetings331
SECTION 2 LICENCES – COMPETITORS
2.1General331
2.2Grades331
2.3
Lapsed Licences332
2.4
Capacity And Licence Restrictions332
SECTION 3 LICENCES AND REGISTRATIONS – OFFICIALS
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
Qualifications And Conditions332
Supermoto Officials Who Require A Licence332
Grades For Supermoto Clerk Of The Course333
Supermoto Officials Who Do Not Require A Licence333
SECTION 4 PRACTICE
334
SECTION 5 GRID POSITIONS
5.1Positions334
5.2
Timed Practice334
5.3Balloted334
5.4Allocated334
5.5Superpole334
SECTION 6 START PROCEDURE
6.1
Start Methods335
6.2Procedure335
6.3
Anticipation Of The Start336
SECTION 7 FLAGS AND LIGHTS
7.1
7.2
7.3
7.4
Flags And Lights Used To Provide Information336
Flags Which Convey Information And Instructions336
Flag Dimensions337
Flag Colours337
SECTION 8 BEHAVIOUR DURING PRACTICE AND RACE
SECTION 9 INTERRUPTION OF A RACE
9.1
9.2
338
Interruption Of A Race339
Interruption Of A Race After The Chequered Flag339
AUTO CYCLE UNION HANDBOOK 2015
SUPERMOTO
329
SECTION 10 RE-STARTING A RACE THAT HAS BEEN INTERRUPTED 340
SECTION 11 FINISH OF A RACE AND RACE RESULTS
11.1
11.2
11.3
Finish Of A Race340
Chequered Flag340
Race Results340
SECTION 12 SAFETY
12.1
12.2
12.3
12.4
12.5
12.6
12.7
12.8
Medical Services. Minimum Requirements For Supermoto Meetings341
Track Safety Precautions341
Fire Extinguishers342
Fire Extinguishers At Circuits342
Warning And Prohibition Signs At Circuits342
Declaration – Admission Tickets, Armbands And Passes343
Declaration On The Official Programme343
Signing On343
SECTION 13 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
13.1Classes343
13.2
Noise Control344
13.3
Number Plates344
13.4
Protective Clothing344
13.5Helmets344
13.6
Identification Discs344
13.7
Body Jewellery344
330
SUPERMOTO
AUTO CYCLE UNION HANDBOOK 2015
The National Sporting Code of the ACU and the Standing Regulations together with the
Supplementary Regulations and any Final Instructions shall apply to all Supermoto Races held
under an ACU Permit.
SECTION 1 MEETINGS
1.1 CATEGORIES OF MEETINGS
•
International Meetings
•
European Open Meetings
•
National Meetings
•
Open Meetings
•
Restricted Meetings
Permits for all Supermoto competitions are issued by ACU Headquarters
1.2INTERNATIONAL
1
The Permit shall be issued by the ACU Headquarters for a meeting inscribed on the
International Calendar of the FIM and having an FIM International Meeting Number (IMN).
2
An International meeting is open to Entrants and Riders of more than one nation who must
hold an International Licence or a National Licence issued by the ACU valid for the particular
meeting concerned
3
All riders not holding a Licence issued by the ACU or SACU must carry proof of Insurance and
a written Start Permission document issued by their FMN.
Note: This includes all riders holding a licence issued by the MCUI.
1.3 EUROPEAN OPEN
1
The permit shall be issued by ACU Headquarters for a meeting inscribed on the Calendar of the
Fédération Internationale de Motocyclisme Europe (FIME) and having a European Meeting
Number (EMN).
2
A European Open meeting is open to Entrants and Riders of more than one European nation
who must hold the appropriate Competition Licence valid for the particular meeting concerned.
3
All riders not holding a Licence issued by the ACU or SACU must carry proof of Insurance and
a written Start Permission document issued by their FMN.
Note: This includes all riders holding a licence issued by the MCUI
1.4NATIONAL
1
The Permit shall be issued by the ACU Headquarters.
2
A National meeting is open to Entrants and Riders who are the holders of a National or
International Licence valid for the particular meeting concerned issued by any Federation.
3
All riders not holding a Licence issued by the ACU or SACU must carry proof of Insurance and
a written Start Permission document issued by their FMN.
Note: This includes all riders holding a licence issued by the MCUI.
1.5OPEN
1
An Open permit is issued by ACU Headquarters.
2
An Open meeting is open to Entrants and Riders who hold a valid ACU or SACU Licence for
the meeting concerned.
1.6RESTRICTED
1
A Restricted Permit is issued by ACU Headquarters.
2
A Restricted meeting is open to Entrants and Riders who hold a current ACU Licence valid for
the meeting concerned.
AUTO CYCLE UNION HANDBOOK 2015
3
SUPERMOTO
331
The Supplementary Regulations issued for the event must specify all restrictions and
requirements of eligibility.
1.7 ELIGIBILITY OF FOREIGN RIDERS IN OPEN AND RESTRICTED MEETINGS
1
The Supplementary Regulations issued for the event must specify the licence qualification and
eligibility requirements of foreign riders.
2
All riders must have a current Licence and Start Permission from their own Federation valid
for the event.
1.8PRACTICE MEETINGS AND TEST DAYS
1
Permits for Practice Meetings and Test Days may be issued on application to the Permit Issuing
Authority.
2
No such event may be held unless the appropriate Permit and Insurance has been issued.
1.9 CONDITIONS FOR SUPERMOTO MEETINGS
1
The ACU Road Race Committee must approve the Organiser.
2
The Venue must hold a current Track Licence or Track Certificate issued by the ACU Road
Race Committee.
3
The ACU Secretariat must approve the Supplementary Regulations for the event and issue an
ACU Permit prior to publication and circulation.
4
For all ACU Championships an ACU decal, supplied by the ACU Secretariat, must be
displayed on the front number plate of each machine. Any rider not complying will be
disqualified from the results of the race.
5
All officials and marshals must remain at the circuit and available to the Clerk of the Course
and the Stewards during the period provided for the lodging of a Protest that period.
6
On venues where the average lap speed is expected to be greater than 65 kph and the maximum
speed is greater than 130 kph the Clerk of the Course must be a Road Race National B official
or above. This will be known as Supermoto R.
7
On venues where the average lap speed is expected to be less than 65 kph and the maximum
speed is less than 130 kph the Clerk of the Course can be a National MX or Road Race National
C official or above. This will be known as Supermoto X.
8
A Riders Briefing will be conducted by the Clerk of the Course before the start of practice or as
detailed in the Final Instructions.
SECTION 2 LICENCES – COMPETITORS
2.1GENERAL
1
To participate in Supermoto events an annual Licence issued by the ACU is required. Residents
in Scotland apply to the Scottish ACU.
2
A Licence can be upgraded at any time during the year.
3
The parent or legal guardian must accompany all competitors, or participants in parades,
under 18 years of age to every meeting. This person must attend at signing-on and be present
throughout the meeting.
2.2GRADES
1
Clubman Entry level for all first time applicants.
2
National After competing and finishing in 10 races at 10 separate race days at 3 different
venues during the current year and preceding 3 years Clubman Competitors may apply to be
upgraded to a National licence.
3
International National licence holders who have held their National licence for 12 months and
who have competed at a minimum of 3 meetings in the previous 12 months may apply for an
332
4
SUPERMOTO
AUTO CYCLE UNION HANDBOOK 2015
FIM Non-Championship International licence.
A medical examination is required.
International Championship National licence holders who have held their National licence
for 12 months and who have competed at a minimum of 3 meetings in the previous 12 months
may apply for a Championship licence as described in the appropriate Sporting Code of the
FIME or FIM.
A medical examination is required.
2.3 LAPSED LICENCES
Licence holders who have allowed their licence to lapse for more than 3 years will be issued with a
clubman licence.
2.4 CAPACITY AND LICENCE RESTRICTIONS
For each category the tables indicate the minimum licence requirements for their specified ages and
machines
Min Age Grade
Capacity/Machine
11 yrs
All
up to 125cc two stroke or 250cc four stroke
14 yrs
All
up to 250cc two strokes and 450cc four strokes.
16 yrs
All
up to 750cc four strokes
Important Notice If a participant is under 18 years of age he/she must be accompanied to every
meeting by their Parent or Legal Guardian. The Parent or Legal Guardian must attend signing on
with the competitor and be available for the duration of the meeting.
SECTION 3 LICENCES AND REGISTRATIONS – OFFICIALS
3.1QUALIFICATIONS AND CONDITIONS
Supermoto Officials are divided into two categories:
Those that are Licenced and those that are Registered. Fees may be charged in respect of any Licences
or Registration or for the appropriate form of identification issued.
Licences: Senior Supermoto Officials are required to hold an ACU Licence of the appropriate Grade
for the performance of their duties.
Registration: A Register is maintained of Officials not required to hold a Licence.
3.2 SUPERMOTO OFFICIALS WHO REQUIRE A LICENCE
Clerk of the Course
Chief Steward
Chief Technical Officer
Sound Inspector
Measurer
Timekeeper
See Note Below
1
2
3
4
5
Attendance at Seminar/Training Session
Every third year maximum
Every third year maximum
Every third year maximum
Required for First Issue only
Required for First Issue only
Equipment and operators check
All the above licences are valid for 3 years
Clubs and Centres shall only nominate candidates whose aptitude and integrity for the position they
can fully justify. Official ACU approval and the issue of a Licence is only after the candidates have
proved to be competent according to the special requirements for each discipline. The respective
Committees and Panels organise Seminars that are compulsory for certain Officials.
AUTO CYCLE UNION HANDBOOK 2015
SUPERMOTO
333
3.3 GRADES FOR SUPERMOTO CLERK OF THE COURSE
1Probationary
Any club may nominate a Probationary Clerk of the Course. Such a Registered Official may
only act as an Assistant Clerk of the Course at a Closed to Club event.
2
Road Race National Grade C or National Grade A Motocross
A Clerk of the Course who may officiate at a Supermoto X meeting. May act as Deputy or
Assistant Clerk of the Course at a Supermoto R Meetings.
3
Road Race National Grade B
A Clerk of the Course who may officiate at a Supermoto R meeting.
Note 1 Clerk of the Course
Age Limits: Licences for Clerks of the Course who have attained their 70th birthday will be reviewed
annually. Officials will be required to satisfactorily attend a seminar annually. The issuing of a licence
will be subject to Road Race Committee approval.
Note 2 Chief Steward
Grading: There is only one grade of Steward’s Licence for all Road Race disciplines.
Age Limits: Stewards may not normally officiate beyond the end of the season in which they attain
their 70th birthday. The Road Race, Drag and Sprint Committee will review Stewards who reach the
age of 70 for appointments on an annual basis.
Note 3 Chief Technical Officer
The Chief Technical Officer will be licenced by the Technical Panel to be in charge of the Technical
Control at an event. The Technical Panel may restrict the disciplines of licence holders.
Note 4 Measurer
The Measurer is required for ACU National Championships and National events. The Licence is
issued by the Technical Panel and may be restricted by discipline.
Note 5 Timekeepers
Will be required to pay for their Licence.
Licence Fees:
All licences (exception Timekeepers licences) will be issued, free of charge, for a period of three years.
No fee will be charged for attendance at all Seminars organised by the Road Race Drag and Sprint
Committee or the relevant Panel with the exception of FIM Seminars.
3.4 SUPERMOTO OFFICIALS WHO DO NOT REQUIRE A LICENCE
Registration of the officials and marshals below will be renewed annually and they will receive an
appropriate form of identification from the ACU.
See Note Below Attendance at Seminar/Training Session
1 and 4
May attend Clerk of the Course Seminar at ACU HQ for
information purposes
Secretary of the Meeting 2 and 4
Will receive Training at meetings and if required at Regional
or ACU HQ Seminars
Technical Official
Will receive training via the Chief Technical Officer at
meetings. May attend Regional Training Seminars
Club Stewards
3
May attend Regional or ACU HQ Seminars for information
purposes
Chief Marshal
May receive training at ACU HQ or Regional Training Days
Marshal
May receive training at Regional Training days and at
meetings via the Chief Marshal
Medical Officer
None required
Incident Officer
334
SUPERMOTO
AUTO CYCLE UNION HANDBOOK 2015
Note 1 Incident Officer
Will collate all information and documentation, and prepare reports relating to serious accidents and
to all incidents involving Offcials or Spectators.
Note: A Deputy Clerk of the Course may undertake these duties. An Incident Officer may be
nominated to attend a Clerk of the Course Seminar to assist with these duties.
Note 2 Secretary of the Meeting
Will be responsible for all administration connected with the organisation of a meeting.
Note 3 Club Stewards
Will together with the Chief Steward form the judicial authority over the running of the meeting.
Note 4 Incident Officer and Secretary of the Meeting
Currently there is no requirement for these officials to be Registered for Road Race Disciplines.
SECTION 4 PRACTICE
4.1A MINIMUM PERIOD OF TIME MUST BE PUT ASIDE FOR THE PRACTICE SESSIONS
AND MENTIONED IN THE SUPPLEMENTARY REGULATIONS OF THE MEETING.
1
Riders will commence practice under the instructions of the Start Officials.
2
The duration of practice will commence from the time the 1st rider joins the circuit.
3
The end of practice will be indicated by the waving of a chequered flag at which time the pit exit
will be closed. A rider’s time will continue to be recorded until he passes the finish line after the
allotted time has lapsed.
4
If practice is interrupted due to an incident or any other reason then a red flag will be displayed
at the start line and at marshals posts. All riders must return slowly to the pit lane or as
otherwise instructed by the Marshals under the direction of the Clerk of the Course.
5
When the practice is restarted the time remaining will be decided by the Clerk of the Course.
SECTION 5 GRID POSITIONS
5.1POSITIONS
1
Pole position, and the configuration of the grid, will be determined at the time of the Track
Inspection.
2
Grid positions will be established according to the provisions of the Supplementary
Regulations.
5.2 TIMED PRACTICE
1
Where timed practice is used and identical times are recorded by more than one rider in the
official qualifying practice session for the race the rider first setting such a time will receive the
better starting position.
2
A qualifying maxima may be specified in the Supplementary Regulations.
5.3BALLOTED
1
Where the Organiser decides that the grid positions will be by ballot this must be conducted by
the competitors at the meeting.
5.4ALLOCATED
1
Organisers wishing to allocate grid positions will specify this and the method to be adopted in
the Supplementary Regulations.
5.5SUPERPOLE
1
The riders, as detailed in the Supplementary Regulations, will take part in the Superpole.
2
Each Rider will have one warm-up lap, one timed lap and one slowing down lap.
AUTO CYCLE UNION HANDBOOK 2015
3
4
SUPERMOTO
335
The Rider with the fastest timed lap will have pole position for the race, the second fastest the
second grid position and so on. Any rider that does not complete the Superpole will start the
race from the last grid position allocated to Superpole riders.
If there is a tie for positions the fastest lap during the normal timed qualifying will be used.
SECTION 6 START PROCEDURE
6.1 START METHODS
Races may be started by one of the following methods:
1
Group Starts
2
Interval Starts
Where competitors are started individually or in groups at pre-determined intervals. e.g. Superpole
Starts will be made with engines running unless specified otherwise in the Supplementary
Regulations.
6.2PROCEDURE
The final choice of motorcycle to be used in a race should be made before the motorcycle is brought
into the waiting area.
1
15 minutes before the start of the Warm-Up laps: The entrance to the waiting area is open. The
motorcycle of each rider must be placed in the waiting area.
2
3 minutes before the start of the Warm-Up laps: Sound or whistle signal. Riders may leave the
waiting area to take their positions on the starting grid. The entrance from the paddock to the
waiting area closes. The penalty for arriving late at the waiting area is loss of starting position.
Late arriving motorcycles will be held in the waiting area. The riders concerned must obey the
instructions from the officials.
3
1 minute before the start of the Warm-Up laps:
1. The entrance from the waiting area to the grid is closed.
2. On instructions from the Start Line Official the riders will proceed on the 2 compulsory
warm-up laps. Any rider not completing the warm-up laps will start from the back of the grid
3. The Start Line Official will stand at the front of the starting grid displaying a red flag. A
second Official will stand at the back of the starting grid with a green flag and display it when
the grid is complete.
4. Any rider who encounters mechanical problems during the warm-up laps may go to the
repair zone and make repairs.
5. On returning to the grid the riders must take their position with the front wheel of their
motorcycle up to the line defining their starting position and keep their engines running.
6. Once a rider has taken his allocated position on the grid, he cannot change it, return to the
pit lane or receive assistance prior to the start.
7. When all the riders have taken up their grid positions the Official at the rear of the grid will
raise the green flag.
8. Any rider who arrives back from the warm-up laps after the Official at the rear of the starting
grid has raised the green flag, will be considered a “late arrival” and start the race from a
position behind the Official at the rear of the grid.
9. If a rider has mechanical problems at the starting grid, he must remain on his motorcycle
and raise his arm.
10. Any rider who is unable to start his motorcycle within a reasonable time, must obey the
instructions of the officials and remove his motorcycle from the grid
11. If he manages to start his machine he may start the race after all other machines have left
the grid at the start of the race.
12. The Startline Official moves to the side of the track, holding up the red flag.
13. The Startline Official puts down the red flag and the start light sequence begins.
336
SUPERMOTO
14. The red lights come on and remain on for upto five seconds the red lights will then be
switched off and the Race starts.
15. Any alteration to this Start Procedure must be conveyed to the riders at the Riders Briefing.
AUTO CYCLE UNION HANDBOOK 2015
6.3 ANTICIPATION OF THE START
1
Anticipation of the start is defined as the motorcycle moving forward when the Red Lights are
on.
2
Any competitor who takes up the incorrect grid position will also be adjudged to have
anticipated the start.
3
The Clerk of the Course will award a time penalty of up to 20 seconds to any competitor who
anticipates the start. The decision as to an anticipated start is a matter of fact with no right of
appeal.
SECTION 7 FLAGS AND LIGHTS
Marshals and other officials display flags or lights to provide information and/or convey instructions
to the riders:
7.1 FLAGS AND LIGHTS USED TO PROVIDE INFORMATION
1
GREEN FLAG
1
The track is clear. This flag must be shown motionless at each flag marshal post for the first lap
of each practice session and of the warm up, for the sighting lap(s) and for the warm up lap.
2
This flag must be shown motionless at the flag marshal post immediately after the incident that
necessitated the use of one or more yellow flags.
3
This flag must be waved by the starter to signal the start of the warm up lap.
4
When the pit-lane exit is open, this flag must be waved at the pit-lane exit.
2
1
GREEN LIGHT
This light must be switched on at the pit lane exit to signal the start of each practice session and
of the warm up, the start of the sighting lap(s) and the start of the warm up lap.
3
1
BLUE FLAG
Shown waved at the flag marshal post, this flag indicates to a rider that he is about to be
overtaken.
During the practice sessions, the rider concerned must keep his line and slow down gradually
to allow the faster rider to pass him.
During the race, the rider concerned is about to be lapped. He must allow the following rider(s)
to pass him at the earliest opportunity.
Any Infringement of this rule will be penalised with one or more of the following penalties: fine
– disqualifcation – withdrawal of Championship points.
At all times, this flag will be shown waved to a rider leaving the pit lane if traffic is approaching
on the track.
2
3
4
5
4
1
CHEQUERED BLACK/WHITE FLAG
This flag will be waved at the finish line on track level to indicate the finish of race or practice
session.
7.2 FLAGS WHICH CONVEY INFORMATION AND INSTRUCTIONS
1
YELLOW FLAG
1
Shown waved at each row of the starting grid, this flag indicates that the start of the race is
delayed.
AUTO CYCLE UNION HANDBOOK 2015
2
3
4
5
6
7
2
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
3
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
SUPERMOTO
337
Shown waved at the flag marshal post, this flag indicates that there is a danger ahead. The riders
must slow down and be prepared to stop.
Overtaking is forbidden up until the point where the green flag is shown.
Any Infringement of this rule during a practice session will result in the cancellation of the time
of the lap during which the infraction occurred.
In case of infringement of this rule during the race, a time penalty will be imposed.
In both cases, further penalties (such as fine – suspension) may also be imposed.
During the final inspection lap, this flag must be waved at the exact place where the flag
marshal will be positioned during the practices, warm ups and races.
RED FLAG AND RED LIGHTS
When the race or practice is being interrupted, the red flag will be waved at each flag marshal
post and the red lights around the track will be switched on.
Riders must return slowly to the pits.
When the pit-lane exit is closed, this flag will be shown motionless at the pit-lane exit and the
light will be switched on. Riders are not allowed to exit the pit lane.
Any infringement of this rule will be penalised with one or more of the following penalties: fine
– disqualification – withdrawal of Championship points – suspension.
The red flag will be shown motionless on the starting grid at the end of the sighting lap(s) and
at the end of the warm up lap(s).
The red flag may also be used to close the track.
The red lights will be switched on at the start line for upto 5 seconds to start each race.
BLACK FLAG
This flag is used to convey instructions to one rider only and is displayed motionless at each
flag marshal post together with the rider’s number.
The rider must stop at the pits at the end of the current lap and cannot restart.
Any infringement of this rule will be penalised with one or more of the following penalties: fine
– disqualification – withdrawal of Championship points – suspension.
BLACK FLAG WITH ORANGE DISK (RADIUS 40 CM)
This flag is used to convey instructions to one rider only and is displayed motionless together
with the rider’s number.
This flag informs the rider that his motorcycle has mechanical problems likely to endanger
himself or others, and that he must immediately leave the track.
Any infringement of this rule will be penalised with one or more of the following penalties: fine
– disqualification – withdrawal of Championship points – suspension.
7.3 FLAG DIMENSIONS
The flag dimension should be approximately 80cms in the vertical and 100cms in the horizontal.
7.4 FLAG COLOURS
The Pantones for the colours are as follows:
Black:
Pantone Black C
Blue:
Pantone 286C or 298C
Red:
Pantone 186C
Yellow: Pantone Yellow C
Green:
Pantone 348C
338
SUPERMOTO
AUTO CYCLE UNION HANDBOOK 2015
SECTION 8 BEHAVIOUR DURING PRACTICE AND RACE
8.1RIDERS MUST OBEY THE FLAG SIGNALS, THE LIGHT SIGNALS, AND THE BOARDS
WHICH CONVEY INSTRUCTIONS. ANY INFRINGEMENT TO THIS RULE WILL BE
PENALISED ACCORDING TO THE PROVISIONS OF ARTICLE 7.2.
1
Riders must ride in a responsible manner which does not cause danger to other competitors or
participants, either on the track or in the pit-lane.
Any infringement of this rule will be penalised with one or more of the following penalties: fine
– time penalty – disqualification – withdrawal of Championship points – suspension.
2
Riders should use only the track and the pit-lane. However, if a rider accidentally leaves the
track then he may rejoin it at the place indicated by the marshals or at a place which does not
provide an advantage to him. Any infringement of this rule during the practices or warm up
will be penalised by the cancellation of the lap time concerned and during the race, by a time
penalty.
Further penalties (such as fine – disqualification – withdrawal of Championship points) may
also be imposed.
3
Any repairs or adjustments along the race track must be made by the rider working alone with
absolutely no outside assistance. The marshals may assist the rider to the extent of helping him
to lift the machine and holding it whilst any repairs or adjustments are made. The marshal may
then assist him to re-start the machine.
4
If the rider intends to retire, then he must park his motorcycle in a safe area as indicated by the
marshals.
5
If the rider encounters a problem with the machine which will result in his retirement from the
practice or the race, then he should not attempt to tour at reduced speed to the pits but should
pull off the track and park his machine in a safe place as indicated by the marshals.
6
Riders are not permitted to return slowly to the pits for remedial work.
7
Riders may enter the pits during the race, but taking the motorcycle inside the pit box is not
permitted. Any infringement of this rule will be penalised with a disqualification Refuelling is
strictly prohibited.
Riders who stop their engines in the pits may be assisted to re-start their motorcycle by the
mechanics.
8
Riders are not allowed to transport another person on their machine or to be transported by
another rider on his machine.
9
Riders who fall from their machine may remount and continue unless the Incident Marshal
considers the machine too damaged or the Medical Personnel consider the rider unfit to
continue. In this situation Riders who fall from their machine are not permitted to continue
with the practice or race until passed fit by the Medical Officer and his machine re-inspected by
technical control.
10 Riders must not ride or push their motorcycles in the opposite direction of the circuit, either on
the track or in the pit lane, unless doing so under the direction of an Official.
11 No signal of any kind may pass between a moving motorcycle and anyone connected with the
motorcycle’s entrant or rider, save for the signal from the time keeping transponder, or legible
messages on a pit board or body movements by the rider.
12 The carrying of on board cameras is only permitted with the prior approval, in writing of the
Clerk of the Course. The installation of the camera must be approved by the Chief Technical
Officer. Automatic lap timing devices, provided they do not disrupt official timekeeping
methods, are not considered as telemetry.
13 A speed limit may be imposed in the Pit Lane.
1. Any rider found to have exceeded the limit during the practice will be subject to a penalty as
described in the Supplementary Regulations.
AUTO CYCLE UNION HANDBOOK 2015
14
15
16
17
18
19
SUPERMOTO
339
2. Any rider who exceeds the pit lane speed limit during a race will be penalised with a time
penalty as described in the Supplementary Regulations.
3. The Clerk of the Course must communicate the offence to the pit of the rider.
In the interest of safety, a rider may not stop his machine on the racing surface during the slow
down lap, (exception see Art 8.16) when returning to the pits after the chequered flag.
Stopping on the track during practices and races is forbidden. (exception see Art 8.16)
During the practice sessions and warm ups, practice starts are permitted, when it is safe to do
so, at the pit lane exit before joining the track and after the chequered flag is shown at the end
of practice sessions and warm ups, when it is safe to do so.
These practice starts must take place off the racing line.
The spinning of rear wheels (burn-outs) is strictly forbidden. Breach of this rule will result in a
penalty of disqualification.
Any competitor who in any ACU or MCRCB Permitted Event participates on a machine for
which he is not eligible through age or licence restrictions will be penalised by a fine of £500.00
and a suspension for one year from the date of the hearing.
Riders who enter the Paddock during a race will be deemed to have retired from the race.
SECTION 9 INTERRUPTION OF A RACE
9.1 INTERRUPTION OF A RACE
If the Clerk of the Course decides to interrupt a race, then red flags will be displayed at the finish line
and at all marshals’ posts and he will switch on the red lights around the circuit, where available.
1
Riders must immediately slow down and return to the pit lane, or as directed by the marshals,
upon instructions from the Clerk of the Course.
2
Only riders still racing when the red flag is displayed will be counted as finishers.
3
The results will be the results taken at the last point where the leader had completed a full lap
without the red flag being displayed.
4
If the results show that less than three laps have been completed by the leader of the race then
the race will be null and void and a completely new race will be run.
5
If less than 50% of the race has been completed there will be a new race over a distance decided
by the Clerk of the Course
6
The grid will be in the order of the last time riders crossed the finish line before the red flag was
displayed. Riders will return to the Pit Lane, they may change motorcycles. The Clerk of the
Course may disqualify any riders who in his opinion caused the race to be interrupted.
7
If it is found impossible to restart the race, then the results will count and half Championship
points will be awarded.
8
If more than 50% of the race distance has been completed by the leader when the red flag is
displayed the race will be considered completed. The Clerk of the Course may disqualify any
riders who in his opinion caused the race to be interrupted.
9.2 INTERRUPTION OF A RACE AFTER THE CHEQUERED FLAG
If the race is interrupted after the chequered flag, the following procedure will apply:
1
For all the riders to whom the chequered flag was shown before the interruption, a partial
classification will be established at the end of the last lap of the race.
2
For all the riders to whom the chequered flag was not shown before the interruption, a partial
classification will be established at the end of the penultimate lap of the race.
3
The complete classification will be established by combining both partial classifications as per
the lap/time procedure.
340
SUPERMOTO
AUTO CYCLE UNION HANDBOOK 2015
SECTION 10 RE-STARTING A RACE THAT HAS BEEN INTERRUPTED
10.1IF A RACE HAS TO BE RE-STARTED, THEN IT WILL BE DONE AS QUICKLY AS
POSSIBLE, CONSISTENT WITH TRACK CONDITIONS ALLOWING. AS SOON AS THE
RIDERS HAVE RETURNED TO THE PITS THE CLERK OF THE COURSE WILL ANNOUNCE
A TIME FOR THE NEW START PROCEDURE TO BEGIN WHICH, CONDITIONS
PERMITTING, SHOULD NOT BE LATER THAN 10 MINUTES AFTER THE INITIAL
DISPLAY OF THE RED FLAG.
1
The results of the first race must be available to teams before the second part of a race can be
started.
2
The start procedure will be identical to a normal start with sighting lap(s), warm-up lap etc.
3
Conditions for the re-started race will be as follows:
1. Only riders who are classified as finishers in the first race may re-start.
2. Motorcycles may be repaired or changed. Refuelling is permitted.
3. The race distance will be announced by the Clerk of the Course.
4. The grid position will be based on the finishing order of the first race.
SECTION 11 FINISH OF A RACE AND RACE RESULTS
11.1 FINISH OF A RACE
1
When the leading rider has completed the designated number of laps for the race, he will be
shown a chequered flag by an official standing at the finish line, at track level.
11.2 CHEQUERED FLAG
1
The chequered flag will continue to be displayed to the subsequent riders.
2
When the chequered flag is shown to the leading rider, no other rider will be permitted to enter
the track from the pit lane.
3
In case of a photo-finish between two, or more, riders, the decision shall be taken in favour of
the competitor whose front wheel leading edge crosses the plane of the finish line first. In case
of ties, the riders concerned will be ranked in the order of the best lap time made during the
race.
4
The Clerk of the Course may require machines to be presented for post race/practice
verification. Where this is required the competitors must be informed before the start of the
race or practice session that they must attend the Parc Ferme. Presentation of the machine will
imply that it fully complies with the regulations.
11.3 RACE RESULTS
1
The results will be based on the order in which the riders cross the line and the number of laps
completed.
2
To be counted as a finisher in the race and be included in the results a rider must:
a – Complete 75% of the race distance.
b – Cross the finish line on the race track (not in the pit lane) within two minutes of the race
winner. The rider must be in contact with his machine.
3
A new lap record for a circuit can only be established by a rider during a race.
4
Both for practice and for race, the lap time is the subtraction of the time between two
consecutive crossings of the finish line painted on the track.
AUTO CYCLE UNION HANDBOOK 2015
SUPERMOTO
341
SECTION 12 SAFETY
12.1 MEDICAL SERVICES. MINIMUM REQUIREMENTS FOR SUPERMOTO MEETINGS
PERSONNEL
Doctors Paramedic(s) First Aid Ambulance(s)
MO
PM
personnel
Supermoto (R)
1 MO
2
1
Supermoto (X)
1PM
2
1
Supermoto (R)
1 MO
2
1
Test Day
VEHICLES
Fast Intervention
Vehicle
1
Special
Notes
(i)
The following applies to all events run under this code.
1
Medical Officer (MO) – Doctor A medical practitioner (doctor) fully registered with the
General Medical Council (GMC), and holding appropriate personal medical malpractice
insurance cover (excludes NHS Crown Indemnity).
2
Paramedic (PM) A State Registered Paramedic with the HPC (Health Professions Council)
Paramedics must have appropriate personal medical malpractice insurance cover.
3
Ambulance A vehicle registered as an ambulance with the DVLA (Driver and Vehicle
Licencing Agency) or similar government licencing authority and complying with FIM
minimum equipment regulations for a type C vehicle; that is:
Medical: A stretcher (preferably standardised), oxygen supply, apparatus to immobilise limbs
and vertebral column. First aid medicaments and materials.
Technical: Radio communication. Visible and audible signals.
Staffing: An ambulance must be staffed by 2 First Aid Personnel (who can be two of the
minimum First Aid Personnel required in the table).
An ambulance may act as a Medical Centre BUT if so it must be a vehicle additional to the
minimum ambulance requirement.
4
First Aid Personnel A person holding a current certificate of First Aid competency. (Where
an event is open to the public event organisers should ensure that all First Aid personnel are
insured against malpractice for the event concerned)
Special Note (i) The minimum medical requirements specific for this discipline also apply to
associated Test Days.
5
Medical Examination At any time during a meeting the Clerk of the Course may require a
competitor to undergo a medical examination to determine his fitness to ride. The decision of
the medical officer is final without right of appeal.
12.2 TRACK SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
1
The safety precautions of circuits will be as laid down for each permanent course licence or
temporary course certificate following an inspection of the course.
2
It should be generally realised that the organisers of speed events have a legal responsibility to
the general public and therefore it is the duty of these organisers to ensure that all reasonable
precautions are taken to protect the public.
3
Whilst organising clubs are insured under the Promoters Third Party Policy in respect of their
legal liability, it is a condition of the policy that the promoters of an event must comply strictly
with the National Sporting Code and any additional requirements as may be specified by the
Permanent Course Licence or Temporary Course Certificate. Clubs failing to do so stand in
grave danger of any claims being repudiated to the club by the insurers under the terms of the
policy covering legal liability.
4
The safety precautions to be adopted are provided with the Permanent Course Licence or
342
5
6
SUPERMOTO
AUTO CYCLE UNION HANDBOOK 2015
Temporary Course Certificate for the particular course but the following general requirements
must be observed.
The attention of organisers is drawn to the provision of the NSC which stipulates that no
alteration of the requirements contained in the Permanent Course Licence or Temporary
Course Certificate shall be made without the prior approval, in writing, of the ACU.
It is recognised that circumstances may arise in which it is necessary to make certain alterations
to the course on the day of the meeting but any such alterations must be approved by the
Stewards of the Meeting and details given in their report to the authority granting the permit.
12.3 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS
Each working vehicle in the Paddock must have a 2kg (minimum) dry powder fire extinguisher
available for immediate use. This extinguisher must show the date of the last annual inspection.
Noncompliance with this regulation will incur a penalty imposed by the Clerk of the Course.
12.4 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS AT CIRCUITS
At all race and speed events, there must be a valid certificate, issued annually immediately prior to the
start of each season’s racing by the manufacturer or his agent, to the effect that all fire extinguishers
are in effective working order. This certificate must be available for inspection by the Stewards. All fire
posts must be clearly marked. In addition to the fire equipment at each post there must be:
1
Fire extinguishers in the paddock and assembly area.
2
At least two fire extinguishers in the Technical Control Area.
3
Fire extinguishers in every medical room/centre.
4
In the case of National or lesser events during which machines may be refuelled and more than
five gallons (22 litres) of fuel is held in any one pit, there shall be a minimum of one fire tender
and crew in attendance, appropriately equipped and with immediate access to the pit area.
International events must comply with appropriate FIM requirements.
12.5 WARNING AND PROHIBITION SIGNS AT CIRCUITS
1
WARNING NOTICES
Th e following requirements regarding the display of Warning notices are applicable to all Road
Racing events.
1
WARNING NOTICE (A) (29 × 20 inches.) Warning notices as detailed below must be
displayed on each side of every entrance to the course, including the entrance to car parks and
paddock.
These notices must be prominently displayed where they can be easily read by the public before
any admission charge is paid, or where no admission charge is made before entry is gained into
the circuit.
Where it is not possible to define the limits of the site and to control admission of the public
(e.g. War Department and heath land) warning notices must be profusely displayed around the
course and also in the car parks.
2
WARNING NOTICE (B) (20 × 15 inches.) Those parts of the course to which the public may
be admitted and where it is neither practical nor necessary to erect a barrier, e.g. those parts of
the course which are straight and are only used by the public to reach other parts of the course,
may be indicated by the erection of the special type of Warning Notice (B). These notices
should be displayed at least 30ft from the course. It is recommended that the limit of these areas
should also be defined by a boundary tape.
AUTO CYCLE UNION HANDBOOK 2015
SUPERMOTO
343
2
PROHIBITION NOTICES
The following requirements regarding the display of Prohibition notices are applicable to all Road
Racing events.
PROHIBITED AREA NOTICE (C) (29 × 20 inches.) Areas where the public are not permitted
must be clearly defined by the display of an adequate number of “Prohibited Area” notices (B).
Notices should be displayed within the prohibited area, facing the public.
12.6 DECLARATION – ADMISSION TICKETS, ARMBANDS AND PASSES
Subject to the provision of the Sunday Observance Act 1780, no person may be allowed to any part
of the circuit without a suitable pass or ticket. All tickets and passes must bear the following wording
shown below in full and if the wording appears on the reverse side then the words “ For Conditions
of Admission See Over” must be clearly printed on the face thereof. Where a ticket is cancelled by
being torn in half, the full wording and, where applicable, the “For conditions of admission see over”
must appear on each half. Where a charge is made for admission into special or “reserved” enclosures
a ticket bearing the approved declaration must be issued in exchange for payment to enter these
enclosures.
Declaration.
WARNING. MOTOR SPORT CAN BE DANGEROUS. Despite the organisers taking all reasonable
precautions, unnavoidable accidents can happen. Please comply with all instructions of marshals and
notices and remain in permitted areas only. THEY ARE CONCERNED WITH YOUR SAFETY.
All vehicle passes must bear the same wording and comply with the above requirements.
12.7 DECLARATION ON THE OFFICIAL PROGRAMME
The declaration as outlined above should be printed in full on the outside front cover of all Official
Programmes. Where this is not possible it must be printed in full in the programme and the words
“For conditions of admission see inside” printed on the outside cover.
12.8 SIGNING ON
All riders, passengers, officials and assistants, press and team crew must sign a declaration on the
relevant signing on form (available from the ACU).
1
Age Limits for Officials
All event Executive and Administrative Officials shall be 18 years of age or over.
2
Age Limits for Marshals
1. All Assistant Officials whose function is to be carried out at the immediate track-side must be
at least 16 years of age.
2. All Assistant Officials who are under 18 years of age must have obtained parental agreement
to carry out the duty and the signing-on signature must be countersigned by the person
responsible for the official at the event.
3. When using the services of officials under 18 years of age for any duties at any event special
attention must be given to any risks which may be associated with the duty, and to the previous
experience of the official.
SECTION 13 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
All machines must comply with the National Sporting Code Appendix B and general technical
regulations. Any part of the motorcycle except the frame can be modified, altered or replaced.
13.1CLASSES
1
SM4 – Junior Class up to 125cc two stoke single cylinder or up to 250cc four stroke single
cylinder machines
2
SM2 – 450 Class up to 450cc two or four stroke single or twin cylinder machines
3
SM1 – Open Class 251 to 750cc two or four stroke single or twin cylinder machines
344
SUPERMOTO
AUTO CYCLE UNION HANDBOOK 2015
13.2 NOISE CONTROL
The noise limit is 96 dB/A with no post race tolerance. The noise is measured according to the FIM
Sound Control method.
13.3 NUMBER PLATES
Junior Class
White numbers on Green (RAL code 6002) plates
450 Class
Black numbers on White (RAL code 9010) plates
Open Class
Black numbers on Yellow (RAL code 9005) plates
All numbers must comply with the numbers diagram printed elsewhere in this handbook.
13.4PROTECTIVE CLOTHING
During practice and racing riders and passengers must wear the following clothing and footwear:
1
A complete all in one leather suit of at least 1.2mm in thickness on all parts of the suit, suits
zipped together at the waist are not permitted. Non-leather material may be used if it meets
with the following requirements.
2
The following characteristics of the material must be at least equivalent to 1.5mm of cowhide
(not split leather). Fire retardant quality – Resistance to abrasion – Coefficient of friction
against all types of asphalt – perspiration absorbing qualities – Medical test – non toxic and
non allergenic – Fabric of a quality that does not melt. It must be non-flammable.
3
The following areas must be padded with at least a double layer of leather or enclosed plastic
foam at least 8mm thick:
Shoulders, elbows, both sides of the torso and hip joint, the back of the torso, knees.
4
Competitors must wear complete undergarments if they use suits which are not lined. Suitable
undergarments may be of the Nomex type, they may also be of silk or simply cotton. Synthetic
materials which may melt and which could harm the riders skin in an accident are not allowed,
neither for the suit nor for the undergarments.
5
Competitors footwear must be of leather or an approved substitute material and of a minimum
height of 200mm to provide, with the suit, complete protection (i.e. no exposed areas).
6
Competitors must wear leather protective gloves.
7
The use of metallic material in any item of clothing or personal protection which regularly
comes into contact with the track is prohibited (i.e. metal studs in knee sliders, boots etc.).
8
A back protector is compulsory.
13.5HELMETS
Helmets bearing the current ACU gold stamp and in sound condition and properly fitted must be
worn by all riders and passengers while practising and racing. Overseas riders may use helmets as
approved by their own FMN.
13.6 IDENTIFICATION DISCS
While practising and racing, riders and passengers are required to wear an identification disc around
the neck, attached by a material approved by the technical officer. Thin chains should be avoided. The
disc must be permanently marked with the wearer’s full name and date of birth.
Identification discs shall be of a durable material, circular in shape, between 20mm and 25mm in
diameter and having rounded edges with no sharp or ragged projections.
13.7 BODY JEWELLERY
It is recommended that any body piercing studs, ring etc. are removed.
AUTO CYCLE UNION HANDBOOK 2015
Drag Race
Standing Regulations
DRAG RACE
345
346
DRAG RACE
AUTO CYCLE UNION HANDBOOK 2015
SECTION 1 MEETINGS
1.1
Categories of Meetings350
1.2International350
1.3
European Open350
1.4National350
1.5Open350
1.6Restricted350
1.7
Eligibility of Foreign Riders in Open and Restricted Meetings351
1.8
Practice Meetings and Test Days351
1.9
Conditions for Drag Meetings351
SECTION 2 LICENCES – COMPETITORS
2.1General351
2.2Grades351
2.3
Lapsed Licences353
2.4
Capacity and Licence Restrictions for Junior Competitors353
SECTION 3 LICENCES AND REGISTRATIONS – OFFICIALS
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
Qualifications and Conditions353
Drag Officials who require a Licence354
Grades for Clerk of the Course354
Drag Officials who do not require a Licence355
SECTION 4 BEHAVIOUR AT A MEETING
355
SECTION 5 SAFETY
5.1
5.2
5.3
5.4
5.5
5.6
5.7
5.8
Medical Services Minimum Requirements for Drag Meeting356
Track Safety Precautions356
Fire Extinguishers357
Fire Extinguishers at Circuits357
Warning and Prohibition Signs at Circuits357
Declaration – Admission Tickets, Armbands and Passes358
Declaration on the Official Programme358
Signing On358
SECTION 6 GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS OF MOTORCYCLES
6.1Brakes358
6.2Tyres359
6.3Appearance359
6.4
Capacity Restrictions359
6.5
Drain Plugs359
6.6
Fuel Lines359
6.7
Fuel Tanks359
6.8
Fuel Pumps359
6.9Fuels359
6.10
Nitrous Oxide Injection Systems359
6.11Overflows360
6.12
Handlebars and Control Levers360
6.13Throttle360
6.14Streamlining360
6.15Engine361
AUTO CYCLE UNION HANDBOOK 2015
DRAG RACE
347
6.16
Engine Restraints361
6.17Ignition361
6.18Computers361
6.19
Gear Shift Systems361
6.20Footrests361
6.21Batteries361
6.22Numbers361
6.23
Primary Transmission362
6.24
Ground Clearance362
6.25
Drive Chains and Guards362
6.26Superchargers/Turbochargers362
6.27
Red Rear Lights362
SECTION 7 PROTECTIVE CLOTHING
7.1
Protective Clothing362
7.2
Body Jewellery362
7.3Helmets362
7.4
Identification Discs363
SECTION 8 9.50 BIKE
8.1Carburettor363
8.2Clutch363
8.3Engine363
8.4Exhaust363
8.5Frame363
8.6Gearbox363
8.7
Lights and Mirrors363
8.8Mudguards363
8.9Seat363
8.10Stands363
8.11
Superchargers and Turbochargers363
8.12Fuel363
8.13
Nitrous Oxide Injection364
8.14Suspension364
8.15Tyres364
8.16Wheels364
8.17
Wheelie Bars364
SECTION 9 SUPER STREET BIKE
9.1Carburettor364
9.2Clutch364
9.3Engine364
9.4Exhaust364
9.5Frame364
9.6Gearbox364
9.7
Lights and Mirrors364
9.8Mudguards364
9.9Seat364
9.10Stands365
9.11
Superchargers and Turbochargers365
9.12Fuel365
348
DRAG RACE
AUTO CYCLE UNION HANDBOOK 2015
9.13
Nitrous Oxide Injection365
9.14Suspension365
9.15Tyres365
9.16Wheels365
9.17
Wheelie Bars365
SECTION 10 8.50 BIKE
10.1
Clutch and Primary Transmission365
10.2Engine365
10.3Exhaust365
10.4Frame365
10.5Mudguards365
10.6Seat366
10.7Superchargers/Turbochargers366
10.8
Front Tyre366
10.9Wheels366
10.10Wheelbase366
SECTION 11 PRO STOCK BIKE (PS)
11.1Definition366
11.2Frames366
11.3
Front Suspension366
11.4Controls366
11.5Body367
11.6Seats367
11.7Wheels367
11.8Tyres367
11.9Wheeliebar367
11.10Engine367
11.11 Cylinder Head367
11.12 Fuel Injection367
11.13Ignition367
11.14Fuel367
11.15 Weight Breaks368
11.16Transmission368
11.17 Engine/Weight Control368
SECTION 12 COMPETITION BIKE (CB)
12.1
Clutch and Primary Transmission368
12.2Engine368
12.3Exhaust368
12.4Frame368
12.5Mudguards369
12.6Seat369
12.7Superchargers/Turbochargers369
12.8
Front Tyre369
12.9Wheels369
12.10Wheelbase369
SECTION 13 TOP FUEL (TF)
13.1Designation369
AUTO CYCLE UNION HANDBOOK 2015
DRAG RACE
349
13.2Engine369
13.3
Engine/Weight control370
13.4Body370
13.5Frame370
13.6
Front suspension370
13.7Exhaust370
13.8Superchargers370
13.9
Fuel shut off370
13.10 Throttle linkage370
13.11 Wheels and Tyres370
SECTION 14 FUNNY BIKE (FB)
14.1Designation370
14.2
Class Requirements371
14.3
Fuel Shut Off371
SECTION 15 JUNIOR DRAG BIKE (JRB)
15.1Engine371
15.2
Suspension and Brakes371
15.3Frame371
15.4
Wheels and Tyres371
15.5Body371
15.6Starting372
SECTION 16 SUPER TWINS
16.1Categories372
16.2
Super Twin Top Fuel372
16.3
Super Twin ET Bike373
16.4
Super Twin Top Gas373
SECTION 17 ACU/UK DRAG BIKE CHAMPIONSHIP
17.1Classes374
17.2Eligibility374
17.3Specifications375
17.4Classification375
17.5Points375
17.6Ties375
17.7Awards375
17.8Publicity375
17.9Abandonment375
17.10 Establishing Records376
17.11Qualifying376
17.12 Choice of Lane376
17.13 Elimination Ladder and Field Sizes376
17.14Alternates377
17.15Staging377
17.16 First or Worst Procedure377
17.17 Machine Weighing377
17.18 Series Co-ordinator377
17.19 Race Results377
350
DRAG RACE
AUTO CYCLE UNION HANDBOOK 2015
The National Sporting Code of the ACU and the Standing Regulations together with the
Supplementary Regulations and any Final Instructions shall apply to all Drag Races held under
an ACU Permit.
SECTION 1 MEETINGS
1.1 CATEGORIES OF MEETINGS
•
International Meetings
•
European Open Meetings
•
National Meetings
•
Open Meetings
•
Restricted Meetings
Permits for all Drag Race competitions are issued by ACU Headquarters.
1.2INTERNATIONAL
1
The Permit shall be issued by the ACU Headquarters for a meeting inscribed on the
International Calendar of the FIM and having an FIM International Meeting Number (IMN).
2
An International meeting is open to Entrants and Riders of more than one nation who must
hold an International Licence or a National Licence issued by the ACU valid for the particular
meeting concerned.
3
All riders not holding a Licence issued by the ACU or SACU must carry proof of Insurance and
a written Start Permission document issued by their FMN.
Note: This includes all riders holding a licence issued by the MCUI.
1.3 EUROPEAN OPEN
1
The permit shall be issued by ACU Headquarters for a meeting inscribed on the Calendar of the
Fédération Internationale de Motocyclisme Europe (FIME) and having a European Meeting
Number (EMN).
2
A European Open meeting is open to Entrants and Riders of more than one European nation
who must hold the appropriate Competition Licence valid for the particular meeting concerned.
3
All riders not holding a Licence issued by the ACU or SACU must carry proof of Insurance and
a written Start Permission document issued by their FMN.
Note: This includes all riders holding a licence issued by the MCUI.
1.4NATIONAL
1
The Permit shall be issued by the ACU Headquarters.
2
A National meeting is open to Entrants and Riders who are the holders of a National or
International Licence valid for the particular meeting concerned issued by any Federation.
3
All riders not holding a Licence issued by the ACU or SACU must carry proof of Insurance and
a written Start Permission document issued by their FMN.
Note: This includes all riders holding a licence issued by the MCUI.
1.5OPEN
1
An Open permit is issued by ACU Headquarters.
2
An Open meeting is open to Entrants and Riders who hold a valid ACU or SACU Licence for
the meeting concerned.
1.6RESTRICTED
1
A Restricted Permit is issued by ACU Headquarters.
2
A Restricted meeting is open to Entrants and Riders who hold a current ACU Licence valid for
the meeting concerned.
AUTO CYCLE UNION HANDBOOK 2015
3
DRAG RACE
351
The Supplementary Regulations issued for the event must specify all restrictions and
requirements of eligibility.
1.7 ELIGIBILITY OF FOREIGN RIDERS IN OPEN AND RESTRICTED MEETINGS
1
The Supplementary Regulations issued for the event must specify the licence qualification and
eligibility requirements of foreign riders.
2
All riders must have a current Licence and Start Permission from their own Federation valid
for the event.
1.8PRACTICE MEETINGS AND TEST DAYS
1
Permits for Practice Meetings and Test Days may be issued on application to the Permit Issuing
Authority.
2
No such event may be held unless the appropriate Permit and Insurance has been issued.
1.9 CONDITIONS FOR DRAG MEETINGS
1
The ACU Road Race Committee must approve the Organiser.
2
The Venue must hold a current Track Licence or Track Certificate issued by the ACU Road
Race Committee.
3
The ACU Secretariat must approve the Supplementary Regulations for the event and issue an
ACU Permit prior to publication and circulation.
4
For all ACU Championships an ACU decal, supplied by the ACU Secretariat, must be
displayed on the number plate of each machine. Any rider not complying will be disqualified
from the results of the race.
5
The Race Control must remain operative with all equipment in place until the end of the period
provided for the lodging of a protest, and all officials and marshals must remain at the circuit
and available to the Clerk of the Course and the Stewards during that period.
6
There will be a minimum turn-around time of 30 minutes for all classes except for Pro-stock
and Funny Bike where the turn-around time will be 45 minutes and for Top Fuel where the
turn-around time will be 60 minutes. In all cases these turn-around times are subject to track
conditions permitting.
SECTION 2 LICENCES – COMPETITORS
2.1GENERAL
1
To participate in Drag Race events a Licence issued by the ACU is required. Residents in
Scotland apply to the Scottish ACU.
2
A Licence can be upgraded at any time during the year, providing the correct criteria have been
complied with.
3
The parent or legal guardian must accompany all competitors under 18 years of age to every
meeting. This person must attend at signing-on and be present throughout the meeting.
4
A Clubman Licence will be issued to all new riders to include a record form, which, on
completion of requirements set out below, will be completed by the Clerk of the Course at a
RWYB meeting or an ACU recognised event.
5
Any rider competing on a new bike to him/her must first complete single runs to the
satisfaction of the Clerk of the Course.
2.2GRADES
1
Clubman
Entry level for first time applicants for Category 1 or Category 2 machines.
Category 1
8.50
352
DRAG RACE
AUTO CYCLE UNION HANDBOOK 2015
9.50
Super Twin Top Gas (STG)
Super Twin RET Bracket (SET)
Clubman Licence holders can compete on a Category machine 1 once they have completed the
following requirements to the satisfaction of an ACU Clerk of the Course.
• Be conversant with the start & race procedure;
• Perform a tyre burnout and start correctly
• Complete a satisfactory Launch.
• Make a half pass (1⁄8 mile) under power to the satisfaction of the Clerk of the Course;
• Make a full run (1⁄4 mile) representative of the performance expected within the category.
All tasks must be made as single runs during qualifying sessions at an ACU recognised drag
race meeting or under the control of an ACU licenced National or International Drag Race
Clerk of the Course at RWYB meetings.
The Clerk of the Course may request the rider to repeat tasks until they are satisfied a
satisfactorily safe standard has been achieved, which may take more than one race meeting and
is at the sole discretion of the Clerk of the Course.
The 1⁄4 mile pass will count towards qualifying at an ACU recognised event.
Category 2 – Riders 18 yrs of age and over
Clubman licence holders are not eligible to compete on Category 2 machines. They are
permitted to ride a category 2 machine to complete the tasks required to upgrade to a National
licence as detailed below.
Super Twin Top Fuel (STF)
Super Street Bike
Competition Bike
Pro Stock Bike
Funny Bike
Top Fuel Bike
2.
National
Clubman Licence holders who have completed the following tasks to the satisfaction of an
ACU National or International Clerk of the Course and whose record card has been endorsed
by the Clerk of the Course for each task completed may apply to upgrade to National.
• Be conversant with the start & race procedure;
• Perform a tyre burnout and start correctly
• Complete a satisfactory Launch.
• Make a half pass (1⁄8 mile) under power to the satisfaction of the Clerk of the Course;
• Make a full run (1⁄4 mile) representative of the performance expected within the category.
All tasks must be made as single runs during qualifying sessions at an ACU recognised drag
race meeting or under the control of an ACU licenced National or International Drag Race
Clerk of the Course at RWYB meetings.
The Clerk of the Course may request the rider to repeat tasks until they are satisfied a
satisfactorily safe standard has been achieved, which may take more than one race meeting and
is at the sole discretion of the Clerk of the Course.
National licence holders are eligible to compete on Category 1 or Category 2 machines.
National licence holders who have competed at 3 ACU permitted events may apply for Start
Permission to compete abroad.
3.
International
National Licence holders who have held their National Licence for 12 months may apply for an
FIM Non-Championship Licence.
A medical examination is required.
DRAG RACE
AUTO CYCLE UNION HANDBOOK 2015
353
4.
International Championship
National Licence holders who have held their National Licence for 12 months may apply for a FIME
or FIM Championship Licence as described in the appropriate Sporting Code.
A medical examination is required.
2.3 LAPSED LICENCES
Clubman or National Licence holders who have allowed their Licences to lapse for more than 3 years
will be re-issued with a Clubman Licence and will be required to complete the criteria set out above to
retain the Clubman Licence or upgrade to the National Licence.
2.4 CAPACITY AND LICENCE RESTRICTIONS FOR JUNIOR COMPETITORS
For each category the table indicates the minimum licence requirements for their specified ages and
machines.
Riders must be a minimum of 8 years of age.
To be eligible to enter Junior Pro Bike, a rider must be at least 14 years of age and must have
competed in Junior Bike Mod for a minimum of five ACU Junior Drag Bike meetings.
Class
Junior Bike
Junior Mod Bike
Junior Pro Bike
Engine Restrictions
50cc automatic or
125cc 4 Stroke
125cc 2 Stroke or
250cc 4 Stroke
250cc 2 Stroke or
500cc 4 Stroke
Min Age
8
Max Age
11*
Min ET
12.90
11
17*
8.90
14
17*
7.90
*A rider may compete in a class until the end of the calendar year in which he reaches the
maximum age for that class.
Junior riders will compete over a maximum distance of ⅛ mile, and will be run on an ET dial in basis.
Important Notice
If a participant is under 18 years of age he/she must be accompanied to every meeting by their Parent
or Legal Guardian. The Parent or Legal Guardian must attend signing on with the competitor and be
available for the duration of the meeting.
Penalties
A rider recording an ET of 0.2 seconds or quicker below their class minimum will receive one
warning.
A repetition of the offence at the same event will result in disqualification from the remainder of the
event.
However, a rider recording a time of 0.4 seconds or quicker below their class ET or exceeding 85mph
will be immediately disqualified from the event.
The above penalties will be imposed regardless of whether the infraction occurs during qualifying or
eliminations.
SECTION 3 LICENCES AND REGISTRATIONS – OFFICIALS
3.1QUALIFICATIONS AND CONDITIONS
Drag Officials are divided into two categories: Those that are Licensed and those that are Registered.
Fees may be charged for attendance at Seminars. Licences: Senior Drag Officials are required to hold
an ACU Licence of the appropriate Grade for the performance of their duties.
Registration: A Register is maintained of Officials not required to hold a Licence.
354
DRAG RACE
AUTO CYCLE UNION HANDBOOK 2015
3.2 DRAG OFFICIALS WHO REQUIRE A LICENCE
Clerk of the Course
Chief Steward
Chief Technical Officer
Sound Inspector
Measurer
Timekeeper
See Note Below
1
2
3
4
5
Attendance at Seminar/Training Session
Every third year maximum
Every third year maximum
Every third year maximum
Required for First Issue only
Required for First Issue only
Equipment and operators check
All the above licences are valid for 3 years
Clubs and Centres shall only nominate candidates whose aptitude and integrity for the position they
can fully justify. Official ACU approval and the issue of a Licence is only after the candidates have
proved to be competent according to the special requirements for each discipline. The respective
Committees and Panels organise Seminars that are compulsory for certain Officials.
3.3 GRADES FOR CLERK OF THE COURSE
1
Probationary. Any club may nominate a Probationary Clerk of the Course. Such a Registered
Official may only act as an Assistant Clerk of the Course at a Closed to Club event.
2
National Grade D. A Clerk of the Course who may officiate at any Closed to Club, National
Restricted or National event for Hill Climb, Drag or Sprint. May officiate as a Deputy to a
National Grade E Clerk of the Course.
3
National Grade E. A Clerk of the Course who may officiate at any event held under an ACU
Permit for Hill Climb, Drag or Sprint. May officiate as a Deputy or Assistant to an FIM
International Clerk of the Course for Hill Climb, Drag or Sprint. To upgrade from a National
D to a National E a licence holder must officiate as a National D Clerk of the Course at 5 events.
He must act as a Deputy to a National E Clerk of the Course at 5 events and be recommended
by the Clerk of the Course at each.
In addition members of the Road Race, Drag and Sprint Committee may be appointed to
observe him.
A club must nominate him as being required to take charge of a specific future event.
Note 1 Clerk of the Course
Age Limits: Regardless of age or type of licence held Clerks of the Course of all grades may not
officiate beyond the end of the season in which they attain their 70th birthday.
Note 2 Chief Steward
There is only one grade of Steward’s Licence for all Road Race disciplines
Age Limits: Stewards may not normally officiate beyond the end of the season in which they attain
their 70th birthday.
The Road Race, Drag and Sprint Committee will review Stewards who reach the age of 70 for
appointments on an annual basis.
Note 3 Chief Technical Officer
The Chief Technical Officer will be licenced by the Technical Panel to be in charge of the Technical
Control at an event.
The Technical Panel may restrict the disciplines of licence holders.
Note 4 Measurer
The Measurer is required for ACU National Championships and National events. The Licence is
issued by the Technical Panel and may be restricted by discipline.
Note 5 Timekeepers
Will be required to pay for their Licence.
Licence Fees: All licences (exception Timekeepers licences) will be issued, free of charge, for a period
AUTO CYCLE UNION HANDBOOK 2015
DRAG RACE
355
of three years. A fee will be charged for attendance at all Seminars organised by the Road Race Drag
and Sprint Committee or the relevant Panel.
3.4 DRAG OFFICIALS WHO DO NOT REQUIRE A LICENCE
Registration of the following officials and marshals will be renewed annually and they will receive an
appropriate form of identification from the ACU.
See Note Below Attendance at Seminar/Training Session
1 and 4
May attend Clerk of the Course Seminar at ACU HQ for
information purposes.
Secretary of the Meeting 2 and 4
Will receive Training at meetings and if required at Regional
or ACU HQ Seminars.
Technical Official
Will receive training via the Chief Technical Officer at
meetings. May attend Regional Training Seminars
Club Stewards
3
May attend Regional or ACU HQ Seminars for information
purposes
Chief Marshal
May receive training at ACU HQ or Regional Training Days
Marshal
May receive training at Regional Training days and at days
and at meetings via the Chief Marshal
Medical Officer
None required
Incident Officer
Note 1 Incident Officer
Will collate all information and documentation, and prepare reports relating to serious accidents and
to all incidents involving Officials or Spectators.
A Deputy Clerk of the Course may undertake these duties. An Incident Officer may be nominated to
attend a Clerk of the Course Seminar to assist with these duties.
Note 2 Secretary of the Meeting
Will be responsible for all administration connected with the organisation of a meeting.
Note 3 Club Stewards
Will together with the Chief Steward form the judicial authority over the running of the meeting.
SECTION 4 BEHAVIOUR AT A MEETING
4.1 ANY INFRINGEMENT OF THESE RULES WILL BE PENALISED
1
Riders who fall from their machine are not permitted to continue in the meeting until passed
fit by the Medical Personnel and his machine re-inspected by technical control. In the event
of a serious accident organisers may impound any machines, equipment or clothing of riders
involved in the accident.
2
Riders must not ride or push their motorcycles in the opposite direction of the circuit, unless
doing so under the direction of an Official.
3
The carrying of on board cameras is only permitted with the prior approval, in writing of the
Clerk of the Course. The installation of the camera must be approved by the Chief Technical
Officer.
4
Stopping on the track during a run is forbidden except for machine failure.
5
The spinning of rear wheels (burn-outs) is strictly forbidden on the track, with the exception of
the Start Area. Breach of this rule will result in a penalty of disqualification.
6
All competitors finishing an event must submit the machine for final examination if required.
The organisers may retain that machine for a reasonable period to allow for that examination.
7
Any competitor who in any ACU or MCRCB Permitted Event participates on a machine for
which he is not eligible through age or licence restrictions will be penalised by a fine of £500.00
and a suspension for one year from the date of the hearing.
356
DRAG RACE
AUTO CYCLE UNION HANDBOOK 2015
SECTION 5 SAFETY
5.1 MEDICAL SERVICES MINIMUM REQUIREMENTS FOR DRAG MEETING
Drag Race
PERSONNEL
Doctors Paramedic(s) First Aid Ambulance(s)
MO
PM
personnel
1 MO or 1 Paramedic
2
1
VEHICLES
Fast Intervention
Vehicle
Special
Notes
The following applies to all events run under this code.
1
Medical Officer (MO) – Doctor A medical practitioner (doctor) fully registered with the
General Medical Council (GMC), and holding appropriate personal medical malpractice
insurance cover (excludes NHS Crown Indemnity).
2
Paramedic (PM) A State Registered Paramedic with the HPC (Health Professions Council).
Paramedics must have appropriate personal medical malpractice insurance cover.
3
Ambulance A vehicle registered as an ambulance with the DVLA (Driver and Vehicle
Licencing Agency) or similar government licencing authority and complying with FIM
minimum equipment regulations for a type C vehicle; that is:
Medical: A stretcher (preferably standardised), oxygen supply, apparatus to immobilise limbs
and vertebral column. First aid medicaments and materials.
Technical: Radio communication. Visible and audible signals
Staffing: An ambulance must be staffed by two First Aid Personnel (who can be the two
minimum First Aid Personnel.
An ambulance may act as a Medical Centre BUT if so it must be a vehicle in addition to the
minimum ambulance requirement.
4
First Aid Personnel A person holding a current certificate of First Aid competency. (Where an
event open to the public event organisers should ensure that all First Aid personnel are insured
against malpractice for the event concerned).
Special Notes
The minimum medical requirements specific for this discipline also apply to associated Test Days.
5
Medical Examination At any time during a meeting the Clerk of the Course may require a
competitor to undergo a medical examination to determine his fitness to ride. The decision of
the medical officer is final without right of appeal.
5.2 TRACK SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
1
The safety precautions of circuits will be as laid down for each permanent course licence or
temporary course certificate following an inspection of the course.
2
It should be generally realised that the organisers of speed events have a legal responsibility to
the general public and therefore it is the duty of these organisers to ensure that all reasonable
precautions are taken to protect the public.
3
Whilst organising clubs are insured under the Promoters Third Party Policy in respect of their
legal liability, it is a condition of the policy that the promoters of an event must comply strictly
with the National Sporting Code and any additional requirements as may be specified by the
Permanent Course Licence or Temporary Course Certificate.
Clubs failing to do so stand in grave danger of any claims being repudiated to the club by the
insurers under the terms of the policy covering legal liability.
4
The safety precautions to be adopted are provided with the Permanent Course Licence or
Temporary Course Certificate for the particular course but the following general requirements
must be observed.
5
The attention of organisers is drawn to the provision of the NSC which stipulates that no
AUTO CYCLE UNION HANDBOOK 2015
6
DRAG RACE
357
alteration of the requirements contained in the Permanent Course Licence or Temporary
Course Certificate shall be made without the prior approval, in writing, of the ACU.
It is recognised that circumstances may arise in which it is necessary to make certain alterations
to the course on the day of the meeting but any such alterations must be approved by the
Stewards of the Meeting and details given in their report to the authority granting the permit.
5.3 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS
Each working vehicle in the Paddock must have a 2 Kg (minimum) dry powder fire extinguisher
available for immediate use. This extinguisher must show the date of the last annual inspection. Noncompliance with this regulation will incur a penalty imposed by the Clerk of the Course.
5.4 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS AT CIRCUITS
At all race and speed events, there must be a valid certificate, issued annually immediately prior to the
start of each season’s racing by the manufacturer or his agent, to the effect that all fire extinguishers
are in effective working order. This certificate must be available for inspection by the Stewards.
All fire posts must be clearly marked. In addition to the fire equipment at each post there must be:
1
Fire extinguishers in the paddock and assembly area.
2
At least two fire extinguishers in the Technical Control Area.
3
Fire extinguishers in every medical room/centre.
5.5 WARNING AND PROHIBITION SIGNS AT CIRCUITS
For full details regarding Warning Notices and Prohibition Notices please refer to the Safety
Precautions section of this Handbook.
1
1
2
2
WARNING NOTICES
The following requirements regarding the display of Warning notices are applicable to all Road
Racing events.
WARNING NOTICE (A) (29 × 20 inches.) Warning notices as detailed below must be
displayed on each side of every entrance to the course, including the entrance to car parks and
paddock.
These notices must be prominently displayed where they can be easily read by the public before
any admission charge is paid, or where no admission charge is made before entry is gained into
the circuit.
Where it is not possible to define the limits of the site and to control admission of the public
(e.g. War Department and heath land) warning notices must be profusely displayed around the
course and also in the car parks.
WARNING NOTICE (B) (20 × 15 inches.) Those parts of the course to which the public may
be admitted and where it is neither practical nor necessary to erect a barrier, e.g. those parts of
the course which are straight and are only used by the public to reach other parts of the course,
may be indicated by the erection of the special type of Warning Notice (B). These notices
should be displayed at least 30ft. from the course. It is recommended that the limit of these
areas should also be defined by a boundary tape.
PROHIBITION NOTICES
The following requirements regarding the display of Prohibition notices are applicable to all
Road Racing events.
PROHIBITED AREA NOTICE (C) (29 × 20 inches.) Areas where the public are not permitted
must be clearly defined by the display of an adequate number of “Prohibited Area” notices (B).
Notices should be displayed within the prohibited area, facing the public.
358
DRAG RACE
AUTO CYCLE UNION HANDBOOK 2015
5.6 DECLARATION – ADMISSION TICKETS, ARMBANDS AND PASSES
Subject to the provision of the Sunday Observance Act 1780, no person may be allowed to any part
of the circuit without a suitable pass or ticket. All tickets and passes must bear the following wording
shown below in full and if the wording appears on the reverse side then the words “For Conditions of
Admission See Over” must be clearly printed on the face thereof. Where a ticket is cancelled by being
torn in half, the full wording and, where applicable, the “For conditions of admission see over” must
appear on each half. Where a charge is made for admission into special or “reserved” enclosures a ticket
bearing the approved declaration must be issued in exchange for payment to enter these enclosures.
Declaration.
WARNING. MOTOR SPORT CAN BE DANGEROUS. Despite the organisers taking all reasonable
precautions, unavoidable accidents can happen. Please comply with all instructions of marshals and
notices and remain in permitted areas only. THEY ARE CONCERNED WITH YOUR SAFETY.
All vehicle passes must bear the same wording and comply with the above requirements.
5.7 DECLARATION ON THE OFFICIAL PROGRAMME
The declaration as outlined above should be printed in full on the outside front cover of all Official
Programmes. Where this is not possible it must be printed in full in the programme and the words
“For conditions of admission see inside” printed on the outside cover.
5.8 SIGNING ON
All riders, passengers, officials and assistants, press and team crew must sign a declaration on the
relevant signing on form (available from the ACU).
1
Age Limits for Officials
All event Executive and Administrative Officials shall be 18 years of age or over.
2
Age Limits for Marshals
1. All Assistant Officials whose function is to be carried out at the immediate track-side must be
at least 16 years of age.
2. All Assistant Officials who are under 18 years of age must have obtained parental agreement
to carry out the duty and the signing-on signature must be countersigned by the person
responsible for the official at the event.
3. When using the services of officials under 18 years of age for any duties at any event special
attention must be given to any risks which may be associated with the duty, and to the previous
experience of the official.
SECTION 6 GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS OF MOTORCYCLES
Motorcycles must comply with these general conditions unless they are amended in the specific class
conditions.
6.1BRAKES
1
All machines must be equipped with at least one efficient brake per wheel, operating
independently, and acting directly on the wheel.
2
Hydraulic brakes may be fitted to any wheel, provided that the cylinders and lines are
adequately protected from accidental damage. The hydraulic fluid reservoir must be mounted
in such a position as to allow easy inspection of the fluid level.
3
All disc brakes must be of the double calliper pattern, e.g. having brake pads on each side of the
disc. Must be able to operate from normal riding position i.e. both hands on handlebars and
feet on footrests.
4
Minimum disc sizes:
Front:
250mm × 4.5mm single
200mm × 4.5mm dual
220mm × 4.5mm dual (for Nitromethane powered machines)
AUTO CYCLE UNION HANDBOOK 2015
Rear:
DRAG RACE
359
250mm × 4.5mm if single front disc fitted
200mm × 4.5mm if dual front discs fitted
250mm × 4.5mm (for Nitromethane powered machines)
6.2TYRES
1
The minimum cross section of tyre allowed for any class is 50mm.
2
Dust caps must be fitted to all tyre valves.
3
For street tyre classes readily available street tyres only, 1mm minimum tread depth, slicks,
hand cut slicks, and tyres marked “Not for Highway Use” not allowed.
4
Any tyre which, in the opinion of the Technical Official, bears any signs of having sidewall
markings or lettering tampered with will be grounds for immediate disqualification of the rider
from the event.
6.3APPEARANCE
All machines must be of presentable appearance at all times. Entries may be refused where
appearance is not considered to be up to the general standards of competition.
6.4 CAPACITY RESTRICTIONS
Where the individual class regulations allow, superchargers and turbochargers are allowed up to
2400cc, normally aspirated engines are allowed up to 3300cc.
6.5 DRAIN PLUGS
All drain plugs securing any liquid must be so fitted as to prevent any leakage, and positively locked
against loosening, with wire.
6.6 FUEL LINES
Must be securely fitted at all joints and a quick action fuel tap must be within easy reach of the rider.
Where nitromethane fuel is used in any percentage, a lanyard is mandatory to operate a spring loaded
fuel shut off valve which must completely cut off the fuel supply to the engine.
6.7 FUEL TANKS
All fuel tanks must be securely fitted to the machine and incorporate securely fitting filler caps. Tanks
must be robustly constructed.
6.8 FUEL PUMPS
Any make of fuel pump may be fitted. If electrically operated, the pump must be connected to the
ignition switch so that they are switched off with the ignition.
6.9FUELS
For petrol-burning classes, the dielectric constant as per DC meter may be no greater than 4, and
Propylene Oxide is prohibited. Octane boosters are permitted. For non petrol-burning classes,
hydrazine and propylene oxide are not permitted, otherwise there is no limitation to the types of fuel
allowed. Competitors should check the class regulations for any specific restrictions.
Unless otherwise specified for any series or championship, leaded or unleaded pump or racing fuel
will be permitted. The use of E85 fuel is permitted but fuel tank should be clearly marked with the
words ‘Bio Fuel’.
6.10 NITROUS OXIDE INJECTION SYSTEMS
1
Only gas storage cylinder certified for use at the working pressure of the system may be used
(this also applies to any machine with a pressurised gas fuel system).
2
All receiving cylinders should have rupture discs or safety valve to prevent over pressurisation.
360
DRAG RACE
3
The bottle to solenoid supply pipe should be of a high quality braided steel hose attached to the
frame at regular intervals.
For any machine running Nitrous Oxide, the system must remain inoperable until the throttle
is fully open.
Any other switches must be wired through the throttle switch. The engine must be able to
be cranked over without the ignition system operable to enable purging of any gas from the
combustion chambers.
A separately operated ignition arming switch must be fitted.
4
5
6
AUTO CYCLE UNION HANDBOOK 2015
6.11OVERFLOWS
All breathers must terminate in a catch can/tank of 550ml minimum capacity or vent into the
exhaust/induction system. Cans should be of a two chamber design or with intake isolated from
outlet to ensure oil cannot exit directly from the inlet.
6.12 HANDLEBARS AND CONTROL LEVERS
1
Any type or make of handlebar may be fitted at the owner’s discretion.
2
It is compulsory to fit lock stops to ensure a minimum clearance of 25mm between the
handlebars and any other part of the machine, to prevent trapping of the rider’s hands.
3
The minimum angle of rotation either side of centre line or mid point is 20 degrees.
4
Handlebar grips, if fitted, must be securely attached.
5
All control levers (clutch, brake etc.) must be in principle ‘ball ended’, diameter of ball end to
be 12.5mm minimum. The ball end may be flattened to a minimum thickness of 12.5mm, but
all edges must be rounded. Ball ends must be permanently fixed and form an integral part of
the lever.
6.13THROTTLE
1
All motorcycles must have the throttle controlled by a hand operated twistgrip, incorporating a
positive acting spring attached directly to the carburettor throttle arm.
2
The throttle must close automatically upon releasing the twistgrip.
3
For any motorcycle running nitromethane fuel, it is mandatory to have a positive return cable
as well as a return spring, i.e. a push-pull twistgrip.
4
Any machine running Nitrous Oxide, the system must remain inoperable until the throttle is
fully open.
5
Any other switches must be wired through the throttle switch.
6
For nitro fuelled bikes with slider clutches a throttle locking device that will positively lock the
butterfly to barrel valve linkage is mandatory.
1. It is recommended that this device is located at the butterfly end of the linkage, however a
drilled throttle twist grip with locking pin is acceptable.
2. This device is to be operated when the machine is being pushed back with the engine
running.
3. The locking device must be suitably flagged to clearly indicate when it is in use.
6.14STREAMLINING
1
There must be clearance of at least 20mm between the streamlining and the extremities of the
handlebars or steering device, including any attachment thereto, whatever the position of the
handlebars.
2
It must not be possible for the front wheel to make contact with the streamlining whatever the
position of the handlebars.
3
The streamlining must be constructed of metal or other suitable material, and fitted to allow
complete liberty of movement of the rider, both when riding and when getting on and off the
machine, without the streamlining or any part of it having to be displaced.
AUTO CYCLE UNION HANDBOOK 2015
4
DRAG RACE
361
The screen, if fitted, must be constructed of a shatterproof material.
6.15ENGINE
Car engines prohibited. Aftermarket cases must have same number of cylinder studs as OEM
motorcycle manufacture and located within 2mm of stock position, twin or v8 engines excepted.
6.16 ENGINE RESTRAINTS
V-Twin motors running injected nitromethane must utilise cylinder head restraint. Restraints
meeting SFI 46.1 are highly recommended.
6.17IGNITION
1
Any type or make of ignition system may be fitted.
2
A positive acting cut out switch must be fitted, and attached to the top fork yoke or handlebars.
Ignition KILL buttons are not acceptable.
3
For 8.50, 9.50, Super Street, Pro Stock, Competition Bike, Funny Bike, and Top Fuel (where
applicable), all machines except Nitromethane fueled machines must have a positive KILL
switch attached to the rider by lanyard that shuts down ALL electrical systems on the machine.
The lanyard/KILL switch must be able to work when pulled in any direction.
4
A lanyard assembly must be of sufficient strength for purpose. Any lanyard assembly that, in
the opinion of the technical team, is not fit for purpose is grounds for disqualification.
6.18COMPUTERS
Can be used for information gathering only. Throttle operation, shifting, clutch activation, control of
fuel injection metering etc., are to be solely under the control of the rider or preset prior to any run.
6.19 GEAR SHIFT SYSTEMS
1
Where individual class rules allow, timed gear shift allowed as long as preset prior to run.
Automatic gear shifting prohibited unless OEM of engine used. RPM gear shifting strictly
prohibited.
2
Where the gear shift is air and/or electrically assisted, all wiring and switches for this system
must be separate from the main wiring harness, and must be readily identifiable, traceable and
accessible for inspection by the Technical Official.
3
Except where clearly part of an ignition kill device, any part of the wiring in the gear shift
system which, in the opinion of the Technical Officer, passes through, or is connected to a
closed control box or unit of any type, will be grounds for disqualification.
4
Speed sensing is only permitted from the driven wheel
5
Suspension travel and ride height sensing is not permitted
See also NSC Appendix D paragraph 2 (Any form of traction control is not permitted)
6.20FOOTRESTS
Unless original equipment is used the footrests should be of minimum 19mm diameter and 75mm
long and ball ended.
6.21BATTERIES
May be located at the owner’s discretion, providing that the mounting is of sound construction.
6.22NUMBERS
Competitors should display their class and vehicle numbers to the rear and each side of the
motorcycle, in numbers and letters at least 75mm high.
362
DRAG RACE
AUTO CYCLE UNION HANDBOOK 2015
6.23PRIMARY TRANSMISSION
1
If the clutch and/or primary transmission is exposed it must be fitted with a guard as a safety
measure to protect the rider even as a result of breakage.
2
The guard must be conceived in such a manner as to minimise the risk of a rider coming into
accidental contact with these transmission parts and designed to protect the rider from injury.
3
Outboard mounted clutches must have a cover of at least 3mm aluminium or 1mm steel.
4
Any suitable make or type of drive chain/belt may be installed.
6.24 GROUND CLEARANCE
Where no particular class rules apply. Immediately after a run machines must have a minimum
ground clearance of 50mm with the rider sitting on the machine in the normal riding position with
their feet off the ground. Failure to comply will result in disqualification of the run.
6.25 DRIVE CHAINS AND GUARDS
Any suitable make or type of chain may be used, but must be adequately guarded. Stock chain guards,
or guards manufactured from 3mm Dural (or equivalent strength alternative) must be fitted to
prevent the chain contacting the rider as a result of breakage.
6.26SUPERCHARGERS/TURBOCHARGERS
Considered the same device.
6.27 RED REAR LIGHTS
Machines must be equipped with a non-pulsating rear-facing red light. If the Clerk of the Course
deems it necessary these red lights must be switched on.
SECTION 7 PROTECTIVE CLOTHING
7.1PROTECTIVE CLOTHING
1
Bulky hard objects such as tools etc. are NOT to be carried in pockets or on the person.
2
During practice and racing, riders and passengers must wear the following clothing and
footwear:
3
Competitors must wear a complete leather suit of at least 1.2mm in thickness (on all parts of
the suit), two piece suits that zip together at the waist are acceptable. Each part of the zip should
be securely attached to the jacket or the trousers respectively and the suit must zip together
over at least 75% of the waist band.
4
Non-leather material may be used if it meets with the requirements laid down by ACU Road
Racing Standing Regulations.
5
Competitors footwear must be of leather (i.e. outer hide) or an approved substitute material
and of a minimum height of 200mm to provide, with the suit, complete protection i.e. no
exposed areas.
6
Competitors must wear leather (or an approved substitute material) protective gloves.
7.2 BODY JEWELLERY
It is recommended that any body piercing studs, ring etc. are removed.
7.3HELMETS
Helmets bearing the current ACU gold stamp and in sound condition and properly fitted must be
worn by all riders and passengers while practicing and racing. Overseas riders may use helmets as
approved by their own FMN.
AUTO CYCLE UNION HANDBOOK 2015
DRAG RACE
363
7.4 IDENTIFICATION DISCS
While practising and racing, riders and passengers are required to wear an identification disc around
the neck, attached by a material approved by the technical officer. Thin chains should be avoided. The
disc must be permanently marked with the wearer’s full name and date of birth.
Identification discs shall be of a durable material, circular in shape, between 20mm and 25mm in
diameter and having edges with no sharp or ragged projections.
SECTION 8 9.50 BIKE
A petrol-burning street tyred class with a 9.50 index.
8.1CARBURETTOR
Any type of carburettor or fuel injection may be used.
8.2CLUTCH
Any type, make or pattern of clutch assembly may be installed. All clutches must be fully enclosed.
8.3ENGINE
May be of any type with any modifications. Only one engine allowed.
8.4EXHAUST
Any type of exhaust allowed. No flexible pipe is allowed. Open exhaust permitted.
8.5FRAME
Steering head geometry, trail and wheelbase may be altered to improve the stability of the machine,
provided that all modifications are undertaken to a safe and professional standard. Maximum
wheelbase permitted is 1730mm, measured with the rear wheel in the most extended position allowed
by the swinging arm.
8.6GEARBOX
Any make or type may be fitted.
8.7 LIGHTS AND MIRRORS
1
Lights need not be operational, but must be of stock appearance, lenses must be taped over.
2
Mirrors should be removed or taped over.
8.8MUDGUARDS
Must be fitted to comply with the Road Traffic Act.
8.9SEAT
Any type allowed, must be securely fitted to machine. Any padding used must securely attached to
the seat.
8.10STANDS
Must be wired up or removed.
8.11 SUPERCHARGERS AND TURBOCHARGERS
Allowed.
8.12FUEL
Generally available pump or racing petroleum is allowed. The use of E85 Fuel is permitted but the
words ‘Bio Fuel’ must be clearly displayed on the tank.
364
DRAG RACE
AUTO CYCLE UNION HANDBOOK 2015
8.13 NITROUS OXIDE INJECTION
Allowed.
8.14SUSPENSION
Any type allowed, but if fitted must be operational. Rear struts allowed.
8.15TYRES
See General Technical Regulations
8.16WHEELS
Any type or size permitted, as long as they comply with the Road Traffic Act. It is highly
recommended that rear rim width should not exceed tyre width.
8.17 WHEELIE BARS
Not permitted.
SECTION 9 SUPER STREET BIKE
A petrol-burning street tyred class.
9.1CARBURETTOR
Any type of carburettor or fuel injection may be used.
9.2CLUTCH
Any type, make or pattern of clutch assembly may be installed. All clutches must be fully enclosed.
9.3ENGINE
May be of any type with any modifications. Only one engine allowed.
9.4EXHAUST
Any type of exhaust allowed. No flexible pipe is allowed. Open exhaust permitted.
9.5FRAME
Steering head geometry, trail and wheelbase may be altered to improve the stability of the machine,
provided that all modifications are undertaken to a safe and professional standard. Maximum
wheelbase permitted is 1730mm, measured with the rear wheel in the most extended position allowed
by the swinging arm.
9.6GEARBOX
Any make or type may be fitted.
9.7 LIGHTS AND MIRRORS
1
Lights need not be operational, but must be of stock appearance, lenses must be taped over.
2
Mirrors should be removed or taped over.
9.8MUDGUARDS
Must be fitted to comply with the Road Traffic Act.
9.9SEAT
Any type allowed, must be securely fitted to machine. Any padding used must securely attached to
the seat.
AUTO CYCLE UNION HANDBOOK 2015
DRAG RACE
365
9.10STANDS
Must be wired up or removed.
9.11 SUPERCHARGERS AND TURBOCHARGERS
Allowed.
9.12FUEL
Generally available pump or racing petroleum is allowed. The use of E85 Fuel is permitted but the
words ‘Bio Fuel’ must be clearly displayed on the tank.
9.13 NITROUS OXIDE INJECTION
Allowed.
9.14SUSPENSION
Any type allowed, but if fitted must be operational. Rear struts allowed.
9.15TYRES
See General Technical Regulations
9.16WHEELS
Any type or size permitted, as long as they comply with the Road Traffic Act. It is highly
recommended that rear rim width should not exceed tyre width.
9.17 WHEELIE BARS
Not permitted.
SECTION 10 8.50 BIKE
A class for machines complying with the general and safety regulations.
Standing Regulations as per Competition Bike.
10.1 CLUTCH AND PRIMARY TRANSMISSION
Any type, make or pattern of clutch assembly and/or drive chain/belt may be installed.
10.2ENGINE
Aftermarket cases must have the same number of cylinder studs as OEM motorcycle manufacture
and located within 2mm of stock position, twin or v8 engines excepted.
10.3EXHAUST
Any make or type of exhaust system allowed. No flexible pipe allowed.
10.4FRAME
1
Frame may be original factory equipment, altered or modified at the owner’s discretion, or
of tubular type frame construction. All butt welds must have visible reinforcement, and no
grinding or filling of welds is permitted.
2
It is not permitted to use the engine as a stressed member of the frame.
10.5MUDGUARDS
1
Are not compulsory, but if fitted must be constructed of material with no sharp edges, and
must be securely fitted to the machine.
2
If a stock front mudguard is removed, and an aftermarket item used, a fork brace of adequate
dimensions must be fitted on machines weighing 205kg and over.
366
DRAG RACE
AUTO CYCLE UNION HANDBOOK 2015
10.6SEAT
Must be securely attached to frame, and be so constructed as to prevent slipping backwards from the
proper seating position. Any padding used must be securely attached.
10.7SUPERCHARGERS/TURBOCHARGERS
1
May be fitted at the owner’s discretion.
2
It is recommended that a guard be fitted over the belt drive on superchargers mounted in front
of the engine.
3
Where a supercharger is mounted behind the engine, such a guard is mandatory.
4
Where a supercharger is chain driven, guards of 3mm thick dural or equivalent strength, are
the minimum requirement, irrespective of the position of the unit.
5
Explosion proof blankets fully surrounding the supercharger are highly recommended.
10.8 FRONT TYRE
Front tyres to be of road type, minimum specification ‘V’ rated or racing tyre specification.
10.9WHEELS
1
All wire spoked wheels must utilise steel spokes of adequate strength and properly laced.
2
Wheels manufactured for cars may be used providing the fitting to the machine is of sound
engineering.
3
All wheels must run true and all bearings must be in good condition.
4
Balance weights must be securely attached.
5
Maximum 10" tyre
10.10WHEELBASE
At the owner’s discretion.
SECTION 11 PRO STOCK BIKE (PS)
A petrol-burning class
11.1DEFINITION
This class will be for stock appearance (factory produced motorcycles available to the general public,
modified for drag racing) petroleum burning motorcycles.
11.2FRAMES
1
Aftermarket frames permitted.
2
Steering head geometry, trail and wheel base may be changed if done in a safe and professional
manner.
3
Steering head angle may not be less than stock rake or more than 40 degrees maximum rake.
4
Maximum wheel base is 1780mm, measured from the most extendable point on the swing arm.
11.3 FRONT SUSPENSION
Minimum usable travel: 10mm, inner tube diameter minimum 34mm. Replacement front ends are
allowed. Steering damper mandatory and may not act as a fork stop.
11.4CONTROLS
1
All handlebar controls must remain in the stock location. Replacement bars are permitted.
Welded aluminium handlebars are prohibited. Welded steel or chrome-moly extensions are
allowed, but cannot extend more than 100mm from stock location. Minimum handlebar width
560mm.
2
Brake pedals and foot pegs may be rear set, but must be at least 380mm in front of the rear axle.
AUTO CYCLE UNION HANDBOOK 2015
3
DRAG RACE
367
Throttle and clutch levers must be manually operated by the rider. Electronic, pneumatic,
hydraulic or other devices may in no way affect the operation of the throttle or clutch.
11.5BODY
1
Must have originally been produced with a 750cc or larger engine. All main body parts must
have stock appearance and shape, and cannot be mixed between models.
2
Replacement parts permitted, but must retain the shape of the stock parts they replaced.
3
Lower portion of fairing may be modified for exhaust pipe clearance or removed completely.
4
Windscreen may be trimmed.
5
Must have simulated headlight and tail light of same configuration and design from specific
body used, holes for air passage and aerodynamic devices prohibited unless originally
incorporated into same OEM of that year.
11.6SEATS
Custom seats with a step to prevent the rider from sliding backwards permitted. Seat, tail section and
rear fender may be incorporated in one unit. Minimum seat height 500mm from lowest point of seat
to ground.
11.7WHEELS
Replacement wheels are permitted.
Front: 16" minimum, 19" maximum, or as stock.
Rear: 15" minimum.
11.8TYRES
Front tyre minimum width 2.75". Maximum rear tyre (rubber on ground) 10".
11.9WHEELIEBAR
Maximum length of 3300mm from centre of front axle to centre of wheeliebar axle, measured in a
straight line from axle to axle. Wheels must be nonmetallic.
11.10ENGINE
1
Engine manufacturer will determine make of bike.
2
Must be of a type specifically designed and manufactured for a production motorcycle.
3
External modifications to engine cases are not allowed except for repair purposes.
4
Aftermarket cases, EFI and side by side rod configuration permitted on V twin configuration.
11.11
CYLINDER HEAD
Cylinder head casting must be manufactured by the same manufacturer as the main engine cases.
FIM Technical Steward accepted aftermarket cylinder heads permitted.
11.12
FUEL INJECTION
Is permitted. Any type or size of fuel injection and throttle bodies allowed, but must be of the open
loop type i.e. fuel metering must not be controlled by computer data gathering during the run.
11.13IGNITION
Any ignition is allowed.
11.14FUEL
Generally available pump or racing petroleum is allowed. The use of E85 Fuel is permitted but the
words ‘Bio Fuel’ must be clearly displayed on the tank.
368
DRAG RACE
AUTO CYCLE UNION HANDBOOK 2015
11.15
WEIGHT BREAKS
Minimum weights of bike and rider at conclusion of run:
3 or 4 Cylinder
Maximum 1510cc
260kg
3 or 4 Cylinder
Maximum 1600cc
270kg
3 or 4 Cylinder
Maximum 1655cc
275kg
3 or 4 cylinder
Maximum 1755cc
280kg
3 or 4 Cylinder
Maximum 1800cc
280kg*
2 Cylinder
Maximum 2000cc
220kg
2 Cylinder OHC or DOHC
Maximum 2700cc
285kg
2 Cylinder Pushrod > 45 degree
Maximum 2700cc
290kg
2 Cylinder Pushrod 45 degree
Maximum 3278cc
265kg
* Plain Bearing Crank only
The ACU Drag Racing Sub Committee reserve the right to make changes to weight breaks or
combinations during the season. If this circumstance should arise then the changes will be published
on the ACU website.
11.16TRANSMISSION
1
Any transmission with a maximum of six forward gears, minimum three forward gears, may be
used.
2
Transmission must be shifted from gear to gear manually or by air shifter.
3
RPM, computer controlled or timed shifts prohibited.
4
Transmission must be contained within the stock case, except two cylinder or two stroke
engines.
11.17
ENGINE/WEIGHT CONTROL
1
In order to check the capacity of the machines of Pro-Stock Bike Finalists, both must remove
the cylinder heads in the presence of the technical inspector.
2
In order to make sealing of Pro-Stock bikes possible, a 1mm hole must be made in the cylinder
head and cylinder casting.
3
Riders must present themselves and their machine immediately before or after each run in both
qualifying and racing, at the location specified by the organisers.
4
Failure to comply with any control procedure will render a run null and void, and could result
in elimination from the competition.
SECTION 12 COMPETITION BIKE (CB)
12.1 CLUTCH AND PRIMARY TRANSMISSION
Any type, make or pattern of clutch assembly and/or drive chain/belt may be installed.
12.2ENGINE
Aftermarket cases must have the same number of cylinder studs as OEM motorcycle manufacture
and located within 2mm of stock position, twin or v8 engines excepted.
12.3EXHAUST
Any make or type of exhaust system allowed. No flexible pipe allowed.
12.4FRAME
1
Frame may be original factory equipment, altered or modified at the owner’s discretion, or
of tubular type frame construction. All butt welds must have visible reinforcement, and no
grinding or filling of welds is permitted.
2
It is not permitted to use the engine as a stressed member of the frame.
AUTO CYCLE UNION HANDBOOK 2015
DRAG RACE
369
12.5MUDGUARDS
1
Are not compulsory, but if fitted must be constructed of material with no sharp edges, and
must be securely fitted to the machine.
2
If a stock front mudguard is removed, and an aftermarket item used, a fork brace of adequate
dimensions must be fitted on machines weighing 205kg and over.
12.6SEAT
Must be securely attached to frame, and be so constructed as to prevent slipping backwards from the
proper seating position. Any padding used must be securely attached.
12.7SUPERCHARGERS/TURBOCHARGERS
1
May be fitted at the owner’s discretion.
2
It is recommended that a guard be fitted over the belt drive on superchargers mounted in front
of the engine.
3
Where a supercharger is mounted behind the engine, such a guard is mandatory.
4
Where a supercharger is chain driven, guards of 3mm thick dural or equivalent strength, are
the minimum requirement, irrespective of the position of the unit.
5
Explosion proof blankets fully surrounding the supercharger are highly recommended.
12.8 FRONT TYRE
Front tyres to be minimum specification ‘V’ rated or racing tyre specification.
12.9WHEELS
1
All wire spoked wheels must utilise steel spokes of adequate strength and properly laced.
2
Wheels manufactured for cars may be used providing the fitting to the machine is of sound
engineering.
3
All wheels must run true and all bearings must be in good condition.
4
Balance weights must be securely attached.
5
Maximum 10" tyre
12.10WHEELBASE
At the owner’s discretion.
SECTION 13 TOP FUEL (TF)
13.1DESIGNATION
1
TF followed by rider number. Reserved for motorcycles running a minimum of 50%
Nitromethane fuel.
2
A maximum of two engines allowed with unlimited modifications.
3
No appearance restrictions.
4
Turbo chargers and super chargers considered the same.
13.2ENGINE
1
Displacement limited to 1700cc for supercharged 4 cylinder engines, and 2000cc for Twin
cylinder supercharged engines.
2
For V8 configurations, 1350cc on each bank with a maximum of 2700cc.
3
Twin cylinder engines limited to maximum 3400cc
4
Lower engine ballistic/restraint device recommended.
5
Aftermarket cases must have same number of cylinder studs as OEM motorcycle manufacture
and located within 2mm of stock position, twin or v8 engines excepted.
370
DRAG RACE
AUTO CYCLE UNION HANDBOOK 2015
13.3 ENGINE/WEIGHT CONTROL
Super charged 4 cylinder engines: 9lbs/inch3 (0.25kg/cc). V8 engines: no weight restriction.
1
In order to check the capacity of the machines of Finalists, both must be prepared to remove
the cylinder heads in the presence of the technical inspector if required.
2
Riders must present themselves and their machine immediately before or after each run in both
qualifying and racing, at the location specified by the organisers.
3
Failure to comply with any control procedure will render a run null and void, and could result
in elimination from the competition.
13.4BODY
All rear fenders must extend past the rear axle.
13.5FRAME
Minimum wheel base 84 inches (2134mm).
13.6
1
2
3
FRONT SUSPENSION
Hydraulic tube type only. Minimum tube diameter 34mm, minimum travel 10mm.
Positive steering stops for both directions of travel mandatory.
Two steering dampers recommended but may not be used as steering stops.
13.7EXHAUST
Any make or type allowed.
13.8SUPERCHARGERS
1
Belt drive guards highly recommended for front mounts, mandatory when rear mounted.
2
If chain driven 3mm thick dural or equivalent strength mandatory irrespective of mounting
position.
3
Explosion proof ballistic or restraint device highly recommended.
13.9 FUEL SHUT OFF
1
Pre-loaded fuel shut offs mandatory.
2
A lanyard is mandatory to operate a spring loaded fuel shut off valve which must completely
cut off the fuel supply to the engine.
3
A separate device to completely cut off fuel supply by handlebar control is mandatory.
13.10
THROTTLE LINKAGE
1
For nitro fuelled bikes with slider clutches a throttle locking device that will positively lock the
butterfly to the barrel valve linkage is mandatory.
2
It is recommended that this device is located at the butterfly end of the linkage, however, a
drilled throttle twist grip with locking pin is acceptable.
13.11
WHEELS AND TYRES
1
Front Tyre must be a minimum V rating road tyre or Race Tyre Specification.
2
Rear tyre width must not exceed rim width by 2 inches. Rear wheel bead locks highly
recommended.
SECTION 14 FUNNY BIKE (FB)
14.1DESIGNATION
1
FB followed by rider number.
AUTO CYCLE UNION HANDBOOK 2015
2
DRAG RACE
371
A class for single engine methanol and petrol burning machines in addition to single or double
engine nitromethane burning twin cylinder machines.
14.2 CLASS REQUIREMENTS
Superchargers and turbo chargers will be considered the same.
1
All machines except those running non unitary engine and gearbox combinations must run a
fuel tank, either real or dummy, in OEM stock location with the engine manufacturer’s name
clearly visible on both sides of the tank.
2
All bikes must have front and rear mudguards. All machines except nitro methane burning
Twins must have head light or nose piece.
3
Engine: Maximum 2500cc with gears or 3278cc without gearbox. Maximum 2500cc with turbo
or supercharger (petrol or methanol only)
4
Stock cases permitted; aftermarket cases are highly recommended. Aftermarket cases must have
same number of cylinder studs as OEM motorcycle manufacture and located within 2mm of
stock position, twin or V8 engines excepted.
5
Minimum rear tyre size width is 10 inches. Maximum rear tyre size width is 14 inches
14.3 FUEL SHUT OFF
1
Pre-loaded fuel shut off is mandatory for Nitro burning bikes.
2
A lanyard is mandatory to operate a spring loaded fuel shut off valve which must completely
cut off the fuel supply to the engine.
3
A separate device to completely cut off fuel supply by handlebar control is mandatory.
SECTION 15 JUNIOR DRAG BIKE (JRB)
Reserved for non-street legal single or twin cylinder two and four stroke motorcycles built to
give the appearance of a top fuel or funny bike.
For minimum age and machine restrictions please refer to Section 2.4
Requirement and Specifications:
15.1ENGINE
Engine: Any make or model. Any configuration or engine is permitted. Small engine modifications
are permitted such as: exhaust, air filter, and carburettor. Air Shifters: are permitted.
15.2 SUSPENSION AND BRAKES
1
Brakes: Front and rear mandatory (disc or drum).
2
Suspension: Front suspension minimum size 27mm and minimum travel of 2 inches. Rear
suspension not permitted.
15.3FRAME
1
Must be purpose built and of tubular construction utilizing a rigid rear end.
2
Rider must be able to reach all controls safely and able to place both feet flat on the ground.
3
Wheelie Bars: Mandatory.
15.4 WHEELS AND TYRES
Tyres: Slicks are permitted, any make or size.
Wheels: Any make or size permitted.
15.5BODY
1
Must have rear mudguard or body work extending past the rear axle.
2
The Seat must be securely attached so as to prevent the rider from sliding backwards.
372
DRAG RACE
AUTO CYCLE UNION HANDBOOK 2015
15.6STARTING
Electric, kick or off-board starters permitted. No push or roller starts.
For any other construction rules refer to the general rules.
SECTION 16 SUPER TWINS
16.1CATEGORIES
SUPER TWINS – A category for motorcycles with one twin cylinder engine. For unlimited capacity
motorcycles, with modifications outlined in the following regulations.
These Regulations are in addition to the Drag Regulations for General Specifications for Motorcycles.
Super Twin top Fuel STF
Super Twin ET Bike SET
Super Twin Top Gas STG
16.2 SUPER TWIN TOP FUEL
Designation – STF Preceded by bike number.
A class designed for motorcycles with unrestricted modifications running heads up from a pro start.
1
Engine Engine may be of any internal combustion type, provided that the drive is transmitted
through one road wheel. Engine may be mounted in any position and any modifications are
permitted.
2
Superchargers and Turbochargers May be fitted at the owner’s discretion.
3
Exhaust Any make or type of exhaust system allowed. No flexible pipe allowed.
4
Fuel Shut off
1 Pre-loaded fuel shut off is mandatory for nitromethane burning machines.
2 A lanyard is mandatory to operate a spring loaded fuel shut off valve which must completely
cut off the fuel supply to the engine.
3 A separate device to completely cut off fuel supply by handlebar control is mandatory.
5
Engine Restraints V-Twin motors running injected nitromethane must utilise cylinder head
restraint. Restraints meeting SFI 46.1 are highly recommended.
6
Clutch and Primary Transmission Any type, make or pattern of clutch assembly and/or drive
chain/belt may be install.
7
Suspension The minimum front fork stanchion diameter is as follows:
Bike weight
Diameter
300lbs (136kg) 28mm
350lbs (158kg) 30mm
450lbs (204kg) 32mm
Over 450lbs (204kg)
34mm
8
Frame Frame may be original factory equipment, altered or modified at the owner’s discretion,
or of tubular type frame construction. All butt welds must have visible reinforcement, and no
grinding or filling of welds is permitted. Positive steering stops for both directions of travel
mandatory. Steering dampers may not be used as steering stops.
9
Alignment Sufficient trail must be incorporated into the alignment to ensure proper handling,
recommended 6 inches.
10 Ground Clearance Minimum of 75mm is recommended.
11 Wheelbase At the owner’s discretion.
12 Tyres and Wheels
1. Front tyre
To be of racing type, or if of road type, minimum spec ‘v’ rated or racing type spec.
2. Wheels
All wire spoked wheels must utilise steel spokes of adequate strength and properly laced.
Wheels manufactured for car may be used providing the fitting to the machine is of sound
AUTO CYCLE UNION HANDBOOK 2015
13
14
DRAG RACE
373
engineering. All wheels must run true and all bearings must be in good condition. Balanced
weights must be securely attached.
Seat Must be securely attached to frame, and be so constructed as to prevent slipping
backwards from the proper seating position. Any padding used must be securely attached.
Mudguards Are not compulsory, but if fitted must be constructed of material with no sharp
edges and must be securely fitted to the machine. If a stock front mudguard is removed and
an aftermarket item used, a fork brace of adequate dimensions must be fitted on machines
weighing 450lbs (204kg) and over.
16.3 SUPER TWIN ET BIKE
Designation – SET Preceded by bike number
A class designed for petrol burning street tyred bikes running to a fixed index of their choice.
1
Engine May be of any type with any modifications.
2
Carburettor Any type of carburettor or fuel injection may be used.
3
Superchargers and Turbochargers May be fitted at the owner’s discretion.
4
Nitrous Oxide Injection Allowed.
5
Exhaust Any make or type of exhaust system allowed. No flexible pipe allowed.
6
Clutch Any type, make or pattern of clutch assembly may be installed. All clutches must be
fully enclosed.
7
Gearbox Any make or type may be fitted.
8
Suspension Any type allowed, but if fitted must be operational. Rear struts allowed.
9
Frame Steering head geometry, trail and wheelbase may be altered to improve the stability
of the machine, provided that all modifications are undertaken to a safe and professional
standard. Positive steering stops for both directions of travel mandatory. Steering dampers may
not be used as steering stops.
10 Stands Must be wired up or removed.
11 Wheelie Bars Not allowed
12 Tyres and wheels
1. Tyres
Readily available street tyres only.
2. Wheels
Any type and size allowed, as long as they comply with the road traffic act. It is highly
recommended that rear rim width should not exceed tyre width. All wire spoked wheels must
utilise steel spokes of adequate strength and properly laced.
13 Seat Must be securely attached to frame. Any padding used must be securely attached.
14 Mudguards Must be fitted to comply with the Road Traffic Act.
15 Mirrors Mirrors should be removed or taped over.
16 Ignition Lanyard If the motorcycle has any aftermarket race accessory fitted, then it needs a
ignition lanyard.
16.4 SUPER TWIN TOP GAS
Designation – STG Preceded by bike number
A class designed for motorcycles with unrestricted modifications running heads up from a pro start
A petrol burning class.
1
Engine Engine may be of any internal combustion type, provided that the drive is transmitted
through one road wheel. Engine may be mounted in any position and any modifications are
permitted.
2
Fuel Generally available pump or racing petroleum is allowed. The use of E85 Fuel is permitted
but the words ‘Bio Fuel’ must be clearly displayed on the tank.
3
Superchargers and Turbochargers May be fitted at the owner’s discretion.
4
Exhaust Any make or type of exhaust system allowed. No flexible pipe allowed.
374
DRAG RACE
5
Clutch and Primary Transmission Any type, make or pattern of clutch assembly and/or drive
chain/belt may be installed.
Suspension The minimum front fork stanchion diameter is as follows:
Bike weight
Diameter
300lbs (136kg)
28mm
350lbs (158kg)
30mm
450lbs (204kg)
32mm
Over 450lbs (204kg)
34mm
Frame Frame may be original factory equipment, altered or modified at the owner’s discretion,
or of tubular type frame construction. All butt welds must have visible reinforcement, and no
grinding or filling of welds is permitted.
Alignment Sufficient trail must be incorporated into the alignment to ensure proper handling,
recommended 6 inches.
Ground Clearance Minimum of 75mm is recommended.
Wheelbase At the owner’s discretion.
Tyres and wheels
1. Front Tyre
Front tyres to be of racing type, or if of road type, minimum spec ‘v’ rated or racing type spec.
2. Wheels
All wire spoked wheels must utilise steel spokes of adequate strength and properly laced.
Wheels manufactured for car may be used providing the fitting to the machine is of sound
engineering. All wheels must run true and all bearings must be in good condition. Balanced
weights must be securely attached.
Seat Must be securely attached to frame. Any padding used must be securely attached.
Mudguards Are not compulsory, but if fitted must be constructed of material with no sharp
edges and must be securely fitted to the machine. If a stock front mudguard is removed and
an aftermarket item used, a fork brace of adequate dimensions must be fitted on machines
weighing 450lbs (204kg) and over.
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
AUTO CYCLE UNION HANDBOOK 2015
SECTION 17 ACU/UK DRAG BIKE CHAMPIONSHIP
17.1CLASSES
Riders who wish to enter the championship should register with the championship co-ordinator
The classes will be as follows:
1
SUPER STREET Modified street motorcycles running heads up.
2
PRO STOCK Ultimate street appearing class.
3
COMPETITION BIKE Motorcycles designed to run on the quarter mile with unrestricted
modifications.
4
FUNNY BIKE As per ACU Regulations.
5
TOP FUEL BIKE The ultimate Drag racing motorcycle, designed to run on the quarter mile
with unrestricted modifications.
Note: A minimum of two events per class to comprise the Championship.
17.2ELIGIBILITY
1
Open only to holders of current Drag Race Licences issued by:
a) The Auto Cycle Union. b) The Scottish Auto Cycle Union. c) EU Federations
2
For all ACU Championships an ACU decal, supplied by the ACU, will be displayed on the
front number plate.
3
The decal to be supplied by the organiser. Any Competitor failing to display such a decal shall
forfeit the right to any prize money or Championship points. This will be treated as a matter of
fact.
AUTO CYCLE UNION HANDBOOK 2015
DRAG RACE
375
17.3SPECIFICATIONS
Motorcycles must comply with the Standing Regulations and the class structure as outlined in this
book.
17.4CLASSIFICATION
1
At the conclusion of the Series all points scored will be added together and the rider with the
highest number of points will be declared the winner.
2
Where a class is run at more than five rounds additional rounds may be non-scoring. Number
of scoring rounds to be announced prior to the start of the championship.
17.5POINTS
Points at each round will be allocated as follows:
1
Attendance points: Each competitor who has signed on and whose machine has passed
technical verification – 100 points.
2
Qualifying Points: 10 points will be allocated per qualifying position from last qualifier
upwards, i.e. last qualifier 10 points, second from last 20 points and so on in increments of 10
points per position.
Eliminations: 100 points for each winning run.
Bonus points:
Event Low ET 25 points Championship Record ET 100 points
Event High TS 25 points Championship Record TS 100 points
In the event of a rain off points are scored up to the last complete round of qualifying or
elimination.
3
If the race distance is reduced after commencement of an event, due to adverse weather or track
conditions, then bonus points will only be awarded to those riders establishing the low ET or
high mph over the distance for which the last complete round of qualifying or eliminations has
been contested.
17.6TIES
In the event of a tie between riders for first place in a Championship after the conclusion of all
rounds, the winner will be determined in the following manner:
a) The rider who has won the most races during the Championship. If there is still a tie, then:
b) The rider who qualified highest at the final round of the Championship.
17.7AWARDS
The overall winner per class will receive an ACU trophy (1 year retention) to be presented at the
annual presentation ceremony. There will be an end of season ACU prize fund.
17.8PUBLICITY
Round Promoters and Organising Clubs must give maximum publicity to the Championship
before and after each round. The current up-to-date positions of the Championship and current
Championship records must be given in the programme at each round.
17.9ABANDONMENT
In the event of a round being interrupted or abandoned by bad weather, the following conditions will
apply:
1
Qualifying
If less than 75% of the total number of competitors entered in a class have made qualifying
runs, the Emergency QT’s (Emergency Qualifying Times) will be used.
1. If more than 75% have made qualifying runs, then EQT’s will only be used for the competitors
who were unable to run. Everyone else will be paired by the QT’s they were able to record.
376
DRAG RACE
2. A record of championship EQT’s will be maintained and will be the competitors quickest
time from the past 2 championship meetings.
3. In the case of one or more identical times arising in the same class, the next quickest time will
be considered, with the lowest ET taking precedence in the pairing selection.
4. When no previous ET has been recorded, competitors concerned will assume the lowest
positions in their class if there are vacant spots.
5. When qualifying positions are determined by EQT’s their fields will be on an all run basis.
Racing
1. In the event of racing being terminated, before conclusion, points will be awarded up to the
last complete round of competition.
Subject to the prior written approval of the promoter the following shall apply
1. In the event of the race being terminated before conclusion any class prize monies not
awarded to riders at that point will be equally divided within the particular class to those riders
still remaining in the competition.
2. In the event of a race being terminated before eliminations have commenced then first round
loser monies for a particular class will be awarded to each competitor in that class who has
signed on and whose machine has passed technical verification.
2
3
AUTO CYCLE UNION HANDBOOK 2015
17.10 ESTABLISHING RECORDS
1
For all records the following criteria must be satisfied:
1. The vehicle must comply with all class regulations, Technical Crew decisions will be final.
2. Records can only be set during qualifying or eliminations, practice run performances will not
count.
3. In order to ensure the validity of all new records, a back up performance of within 1% of the
mark is required at the same event. In the event that two runs exceed the existing records but are
not within 1% of each other, the quicker time or faster speed will be acceptable as the back up for
the slower time, which will stand as the new record.
4. Only the driver/rider holding the record at the conclusion of the event will be credited with
the record. A driver/rider setting and then losing a record at the same event will not receive
credit for establishing a record, or receive points for doing so.
17.11 QUALIFYING
The following minimum number of qualifying sessions will be held:
2 day qualifying – 4 sessions (2 per day)1 day qualifying – 3 sessions Track conditions permitting.
There will be compulsory alternate lane qualifying. For first qualifying run pairs should be run where
possible, lane choice for first qualifier is at the discretion of the start crew and singles should be
restricted to one only per session, track conditions permitting.
A valid qualifying run must be made under engine power and an E.T. and/or T.S. must be recorded. If
the race distance is reduced before the conclusion of qualifying then the positions in the ladder will be
established over the distance for the last complete round of qualifying.
17.12 CHOICE OF LANE
The rider with the quickest time from the preceding round will be allowed to inspect the start line, if
required, immediately prior to the running of his/her class.
17.13 ELIMINATION LADDER AND FIELD SIZES
Professional ladders will be used. All classes will be operated on an all qualified basis up to a 8 bike
maximum field. Above that number the fields will be set on the following basis:
9–12 Qualifiers
8 Bike field
13–24 Qualifiers
16 Bike field
24+ Qualifiers
32 Bike field
AUTO CYCLE UNION HANDBOOK 2015
DRAG RACE
377
A minimum of 3 riders are required to comprise a class.
17.14 ALTERNATES
Once qualifying has concluded and a ladder has been established, pairings will not be changed.
However, should a qualified bike and rider be unable to make the first round of eliminations (not
reach the burnout water area) an alternative will be inserted in their place. The quickest non-qualifier
will take the first available space, the second quickest non qualifier the next available space and so on.
17.15 STAGING
Both riders must be in pre-stage before either rider can stage. In any case riders must stage when
instructed to do so by the Start line Marshal.
17.16 FIRST OR WORST PROCEDURE
If both riders commit a foul during a race the rider committing the worst foul would be disqualified.
If both riders commit the same foul then the first rider to commit the foul is disqualified. The
following is the list of fouls in descending order (i.e. 1 is the worst).
1
Contact with the guard rail barriers, or any other track fixture (i.e. Christmas tree, timing
equipment, cones etc.) is grounds for disqualification.
2
Crossing any part of the track centreline.
3
Red light.
4
Crossing any part of the lane boundary lines.
5
Pushing the machine over the finish line.
NB. On a solo bye run a competitor is considered the winner once he stages his machine under power
and the start sequence is initiated.
17.17 MACHINE WEIGHING
It is the responsibility of the Clerk of the Course to weigh machines before or after each qualifying or
elimination run where weighted brakes are in force.
17.18 SERIES CO-ORDINATOR
The Series will be co-ordinated by:
Mr. I. King, 11 Cockhall Close, Litlington, Royston, Herts SG8 0RB. Fax: 01763 852707
Mobile: 07785 341099 email: [email protected]
17.19 RACE RESULTS
A list of ALL competitors who have signed-on, qualifying lists and elimination ladders, highlighting
fastest time and highest speed for the class (including qualifying) and any records established at the
event must be submitted to the Road Race Department and the Series Co-ordinator within two days
of the event, by fax, mail or email.
378
HILLCLIMB AND SPRINT
AUTO CYCLE UNION HANDBOOK 2015
Hillclimb and Sprint
Standing Regulations
AUTO CYCLE UNION HANDBOOK 2015
HILLCLIMB AND SPRINT
379
SECTION 1 MEETINGS
1.1
Categories of Meetings381
1.2International381
1.3
European Open381
1.4National381
1.5Open381
1.6Restricted381
1.7
Eligibility of Foreign Riders in Open and Restricted Meetings382
1.8
Practice Meetings and Test Days382
1.9
Conditions for Hill Climb Meetings382
SECTION 2 LICENCES – COMPETITORS
2.1General382
2.2Grades382
2.3
Lapsed Licences383
2.4
Capacity and Licence Restrictions383
SECTION 3 LICENCES AND REGISTRATIONS – OFFICIALS
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
Qualifications and Conditions383
Hill Climb and Sprint Officials who require a Licence384
Grades for Clerk of the Course384
Hill Climb and Sprint Officials who do not require a Licence385
SECTION 4 START AND FINISH PROCEDURE
4.1
Timing Equipment385
4.2Starts385
4.3Finish385
SECTION 5 FLAGS AND LIGHTS
5.1
5.2
5.3
5.4
Flags and Lights Used to Provide Information386
Flags Which Convey Information and Instructions386
Flag Dimensions386
Flag Colours386
SECTION 6 BEHAVIOUR AT A MEETING
SECTION 7 SAFETY
7.1
7.2
7.3
7.4
7.5
7.6
7.7
7.8
Medical Services Minimum Requirements for Hill Climb and Sprint Meetings387
Track Safety Precautions388
Fire Extinguishers388
Fire Extinguishers at Circuits388
Warning and Prohibition Signs at Circuits388
Declaration – Admission Tickets, Armbands and Passes389
Declaration on the Official Programme389
Signing On389
SECTION 8 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
8.1Drive390
8.2Brakes390
8.3Tyres390
8.4Mudguards390
380
HILLCLIMB AND SPRINT
AUTO CYCLE UNION HANDBOOK 2015
8.5
Clutch and Brake Levers390
8.6
Primary and Auxiliary Devices390
8.7Throttles390
8.8Handlebars390
8.9Superchargers390
8.10Fuel391
8.11Footrests391
8.12
Oil Drain Plugs and Supply Pipes391
8.13
Oil Catch Tanks391
8.14
Number Plates391
8.15
Control of Exhaust Sound Level392
8.16
Exhaust Pipes392
8.17Construction392
8.18
Streamlining for Sprint Machines392
8.19
Sprint Additional Specifications for Solo Machines 1300cc and over392
8.20
Hill Climb – Additional Specifications for Three Wheel Machines393
8.21
Sprint – Additional Specifications for Three-Wheelers393
SECTION 9 PROTECTIVE CLOTHING
9.1
Protective Clothing393
9.2
Body Jewellery394
9.3Helmets394
9.4
Identification Discs394
SECTION 10 RUN WHAT YOU BRUNG –
CLASSES FOR ROAD LEGAL MACHINES
10.1Definition394
10.2Eligibility394
10.3
Machine Eligibility394
10.4
Technical Control394
10.5
Protective Clothing394
SECTION 11 ACU SPRINT CHAMPIONSHIP QUALIFYING ROUNDS
(TO BE ANNOUNCED)
11.1Title395
11.2Eligibility395
11.3Classes395
11.4Points395
11.5
Overall Classification395
11.6Ties396
11.7
Results Return Method396
SECTION 12 SPRINT RECORD ATTEMPTS
396
AUTO CYCLE UNION HANDBOOK 2015
HILLCLIMB AND SPRINT
381
The National Sporting Code of the ACU and the Standing Regulations together with the
Supplementary Regulations and any Final Instructions shall apply to all Hill Climb and Sprint
Races held under an ACU Permit.
SECTION 1 MEETINGS
1.1 CATEGORIES OF MEETINGS
•
International Meetings
•
European Open Meetings
•
National Meetings
•
Open Meetings
•
Restricted Meetings
Permits for all Hill Climb and Sprint competitions are issued by ACU Headquarters
1.2INTERNATIONAL
1.
The Permit shall be issued by the ACU Headquarters for a meeting inscribed on the
International Calendar of the FIM and having an FIM International Meeting Number (IMN).
2.
An International meeting is open to Entrants and Riders of more than one nation who must
hold an International Licence or a National Licence issued by the ACU valid for the particular
meeting concerned.
3.
All riders not holding a Licence issued by the ACU or SACU must carry proof of Insurance and
a written Start Permission document issued by their FMN.
Note: This includes all riders holding a licence issued by the MCUI.
1.3 EUROPEAN OPEN
1.
The permit shall be issued by ACU Headquarters for a meeting inscribed on the Calendar of the
Fédération Internationale de Motocyclisme Europe (FIME) and having a European Meeting
Number (EMN).
2.
A European Open meeting is open to Entrants and Riders of more than one European nation
who must hold the appropriate Competition Licence valid for the particular meeting concerned.
3.
All riders not holding a Licence issued by the ACU or SACU must carry proof of Insurance and
a written Start Permission document issued by their FMN.
Note: This includes all riders holding a licence issued by the MCUI.
1.4NATIONAL
1.
The Permit shall be issued by the ACU Headquarters.
2.
A National meeting is open to Entrants and Riders who are the holders of a National or
International Licence valid for the particular meeting concerned issued by any Federation.
3.
All riders not holding a Licence issued by the ACU or SACU must carry proof of Insurance and
a written Start Permission document issued by their FMN.
Note: This includes all riders holding a licence issued by the MCUI.
1.5OPEN
1.
An Open permit is issued by ACU Headquarters.
2.
An Open meeting is open to Entrants and Riders who hold a valid ACU or SACU Licence for
the meeting concerned.
1.6RESTRICTED
1.
A Restricted Permit is issued by ACU Headquarters.
2.
A Restricted meeting is open to Entrants and Riders who hold a current ACU Licence valid for
the meeting concerned.
382
HILLCLIMB AND SPRINT
3.
The Supplementary Regulations issued for the event must specify all restrictions and
requirements of eligibility.
AUTO CYCLE UNION HANDBOOK 2015
1.7 ELIGIBILITY OF FOREIGN RIDERS IN OPEN AND RESTRICTED MEETINGS
1.
The Supplementary Regulations issued for the event must specify the licence qualification and
eligibility requirements of foreign riders.
2.
All riders must have a current Licence and Start Permission from their own Federation valid
for the event.
1.8PRACTICE MEETINGS AND TEST DAYS
1.
Permits for Practice Meetings and Test Days may be issued on application to the Permit Issuing
Authority.
2.
No such event may be held unless the appropriate Permit and Insurance has been issued.
1.9 CONDITIONS FOR HILL CLIMB MEETINGS
1.
The ACU Road Race Committee must approve the Organiser.
2.
The Venue must hold a current Track Licence or Track Certificate issued by the ACU Road
Race Committee.
3.
The ACU Secretariat must approve the Supplementary Regulations for the event and issue an
ACU Permit prior to publication and circulation.
4.
For all ACU Championships an ACU decal, supplied by the ACU Secretariat, must be
displayed on the front number plate of each machine. Any rider not complying will be
disqualified from the results of the race.
5.
The Race Control must remain operative with all equipment in place until the end of the period
provided for the lodging of a protest, and all officials and marshals must remain at the circuit
and available to the Clerk of the Course and the Stewards during that period.
6.
Where a class is cancelled because of insufficient entries the organisers may merge such entries
with the next higher capacity class.
SECTION 2 LICENCES – COMPETITORS
2.1GENERAL
1.
To participate in events an annual Licence issued by the ACU is required. Residents in Scotland
apply to the Scottish ACU.
2.
A Licence can be upgraded at any time during the year.
3.
The parent or legal guardian must accompany all competitors, or participants in parades,
under 18 years of age to every meeting. This person must attend at signing-on and be present
throughout the meeting.
4.
A One – Event Licence is available to Competitors resident in the UK. For meetings up to
National Level.
2.2GRADES
1.
Clubman Entry Level for first time applicants.
2.
National. After competing satisfactorily in 10 separate race days during the current year and
preceding 3 years a Clubman Competitor may apply to be upgraded to a National licence.
3.
International. National licence holders who have competed at 5 race days may apply for an
FIM Non-Championship International Licence.
A medical examination is required.
4.
International Championship. National licence holders who have competed at 5 race days may
apply for a FIME or FIM Championship licence as described in the appropriate Sporting Code.
A medical examination is required.
AUTO CYCLE UNION HANDBOOK 2015
HILLCLIMB AND SPRINT
383
2.3 LAPSED LICENCES
1.
Clubman. Clubman licence holders who have allowed their licence to lapse for more than 5
years will be re-issued with a Clubman licence.
2.
National. National licence holders who have allowed their licence to lapse for more than 5
years will be re-issued with a Clubman licence.
2.4 CAPACITY AND LICENCE RESTRICTIONS
For each category the table indicates the Class, ages and machine specifications.
1.
Minimum Age
8 yrs
11 yrs
12 yrs
13 yrs
14 yrs
15 yrs
16 yrs and over
Licence
Clubman
Clubman up to
Clubman up to
Grade of Capacity of Machine
50cc automatic Machine
125cc Production Scooter Automatic
125cc Production up to 250 single cylinder 4 stroke production
machine (restricted)
National up to 125cc GP Machine up to 250cc single cylinder 4 stroke machine
(unrestricted)
Clubman up to 125cc GP Machine up to 350cc single cylinder 4 stroke machine
(unrestricted)
National
up to 500cc twin Cylinder, 4 Stroke Production Based Machine
No restrictions
2. Junior riders 16 yrs of age and under
1.
Junior riders must satisfy the Clerk of the Course for the meeting that they can ride and control
the machine they have entered before being permitted to race at that meeting.
2.
Junior riders are restricted to a maximum Sprint of ¼ mile.
3.
When a rider reaches the maximum age limit for his class, he may continue to compete in that
class until the end of the calendar year or upgrade on his birthday.
4.
A junior rider may only compete in one class. Any junior rider being issued with an adult
licence cannot revert back to junior status.
5.
For Junior Classes superchargers and turbochargers are not permitted. For Junior classes
rebores are permitted to a maximum increase in engine capacity of 3cc
Important Notice
If a participant is under 18 years of age he/she must be accompanied to every meeting by their Parent
or Legal Guardian. The Parent or Legal Guardian must attend signing on with the competitor and be
available for the duration of the meeting.
SECTION 3 LICENCES AND REGISTRATIONS – OFFICIALS
3.1QUALIFICATIONS AND CONDITIONS
Hill Climb and Sprint Officials are divided into two categories:
Those that are Licensed and those that are Registered.
Fees are payable in respect of any Licences or Registration or for the appropriate form of
identification issued.
Licences: Senior Hill Climb and Sprint Officials are required to hold an ACU Licence of the
appropriate Grade for the performance of their duties.
Registration: A Register is maintained of Officials not required to hold a Licence.
384
HILLCLIMB AND SPRINT
AUTO CYCLE UNION HANDBOOK 2015
3.2 HILL CLIMB AND SPRINT OFFICIALS WHO REQUIRE A LICENCE
All the following licences are valid for 3 years
Clerk of the Course
Chief Steward
Chief Technical Officer
Sound Inspector
Measurer
Timekeeper
See Note Below
1
2
3
4
5
Attendance at Seminar/Training Session
Every third year maximum
Every third year maximum
Every third year maximum
Required for First Issue only
Required for First Issue only
Equipment and operators check
Clubs and Centres shall only nominate candidates whose aptitude and integrity for the position they
can fully justify. Official ACU approval and the issue of a Licence is only after the candidates have
proved to be competent according to the special requirements for each discipline. The respective
Committees and Panels organise Seminars that are compulsory for certain Officials.
3.3 GRADES FOR CLERK OF THE COURSE
1.
Probationary Any club may nominate a Probationary Clerk of the Course. Such a Registered
Official may only act as an Assistant Clerk of the Course at a Club event.
2.
National Grade D A Clerk of the Course who may officiate at any Club, National Restricted or
National event for Hill Climb, Drag or Sprint. May officiate as a Deputy to a National Grade E
Clerk of the Course
To upgrade from a National D to a National E a licence holder must officiate as a National D
Clerk of the Course at 5 events. He must act as a Deputy to a National E Clerk of the Course
at 5 events and be recommended by the Clerk of the Course at each. In addition members of
the Road Race, Drag and Sprint Committee may be appointed to observe him. A club must
nominate him as being required to take charge of a specific future event.
3.
National Grade E A Clerk of the Course who may officiate at any event held under an ACU
Permit for Hill Climb, Drag or Sprint. May officiate as a Deputy or Assistant to an FIM or
FIME International Clerk of the Course for Hill Climb, Drag or Sprint.
Note 1 Clerk of the Course
AGE LIMITS:
Licences for Clerks of the Course who have attained their 70th birthday will be reviewed annually.
Officials will be required to satisfactorily attend a seminar annually. The issuing of a licence will be
subject to Road Race Committee approval
Note 2 Chief Steward
Grading: There is only one grade of Steward’s Licence for all Road Race disciplines.
Age Limits: Stewards may not normally officiate beyond the end of the season in which they attain
their 70th birthday. The Road Race, Drag and Sprint Committee will review Stewards who reach the
age of 70 for appointments on an annual basis.
Note 3 Chief Technical Officer
The Chief Technical Officer may be a Senior Technical Official or a Registered Technical Official to be
in charge of the Technical Control at an event.
Note 4 Measurer
The Measurer is required for ACU National Championships and National events. The Licence is
issued by the Technical Panel and may be restricted by discipline.
Note 5 Timekeepers
Will be required to pay for their Licence.
Licence Fees:
All licences (exception Timekeepers licences) will be issued, free of charge, for a period of three years.
AUTO CYCLE UNION HANDBOOK 2015
HILLCLIMB AND SPRINT
385
A fee may be charged for attendance at all Seminars organised by the Road Race Drag and Sprint
Committee or the relevant Panel.
3.4 HILL CLIMB AND SPRINT OFFICIALS WHO DO NOT REQUIRE A LICENCE
See Note Below Attendance at Seminar/Training Session
1 and 4
May attend Clerk of the Course Seminar at ACU HQ for
information purposes
Secretary of the Meeting 2 and 4
Will receive Training at meetings and if required at Regional
or ACU HQ Seminars
Technical Official
Will receive training via the Chief Technical Officer at
meetings May attend Regional Training Seminars
Club Stewards
3
May attend Regional or ACU HQ Seminars for information
purposes
Chief Marshal
May receive training at ACU HQ or Regional Training Days
Marshal
May receive training at Regional Training
Medical Officer
None required
Incident Officer
Registration of the above officials and marshals will be renewed annually and they will receive an
appropriate form of identification from the ACU.
Note 1 Incident Officer
Will collate all information and documentation, and prepare reports relating to serious accidents and
to all incidents involving Officials or Spectators.
Note: A Deputy Clerk of the Course may undertake these duties. An Incident Officer may be
nominated to attend a Clerk of the Course Seminar to assist with these duties.
Note 2 Secretary of the Meeting
Will be responsible for all administration connected with the organisation of a meeting.
Note 3 Club Stewards
Will together with the Chief Steward form the judicial authority over the running of the meeting.
Note 4 Incident Officer and Secretary of the Meeting
Currently there is no requirement for these officials to be Registered for Road Race Disciplines.
SECTION 4 START AND FINISH PROCEDURE
4.1 TIMING EQUIPMENT
1.
Unless otherwise provided for in the Supplementary Regulations, the timing apparatus shall
not be placed beneath the wheels of the motorcycle in order to actuate the timing equipment.
2.
The ACU grade of the timing apparatus must be stated in the Supplementary Regulations.
4.2STARTS
1.
Starts shall be made from a stationary position with the engine running and foremost part of
the motorcycle a distance of 100mm behind an actual start line or a stage beam set 100mm
behind a start beam. A single or 2 beam system may be used.
2.
A chock may be placed against a rear wheel of the motorcycle upon lining up with the 100mm
mark and may be retained in position.
3.
A rider must start within one minute of receiving the start signal. Any rider failing to start
within this period may be disqualified.
4.
A rider will be deemed to have started when his machine actuates the timing equipment.
4.3FINISH
1.
The finishing line shall be clearly marked and defined by a chequered flag or board.
386
HILLCLIMB AND SPRINT
2.
The limit of the braking area shall be clearly defined. The distance of the braking area must
be stated in the Supplementary Regulations. If ropes are used, coloured streamers (minimum
300mm in length) must be attached at intervals of not more than 2 metres.
AUTO CYCLE UNION HANDBOOK 2015
SECTION 5 FLAGS AND LIGHTS
Marshals and other officials display flags or lights to provide information and/or convey instructions
to the riders:
5.1 FLAGS AND LIGHTS USED TO PROVIDE INFORMATION
1.
1.
2.
GREEN FLAG
The track is clear
This flag must be shown motionless at each flag marshal post for the first practice run to
indicate the flag marshal posts.
2.
1.
YELLOW AND RED STRIPED FLAG (OPTIONAL)
The adhesion on this section of the track could be affected.
3.
1.
CHEQUERED BLACK/WHITE FLAG OR BOARD
This flag or board will be displayed to indicate the finish line.
5.2 FLAGS WHICH CONVEY INFORMATION AND INSTRUCTIONS
1.
1.
2.
3.
4.
2.
1.
2.
YELLOW FLAG (OPTIONAL)
Shown waved at the flag marshal post, this flag indicates that there is a danger ahead
The riders must slow down and be prepared to stop.
Any Infringement of this rule during a run will result in the cancellation of the time of the run
during which the infraction occurred.
Further penalties (such as fine – suspension) may also be imposed.
RED FLAG AND RED LIGHTS
When the run is being interrupted, the red flag will be waved at each flag marshal post and the
red lights (where provided) switched on. Riders must stop and await instructions.
Any infringement of this rule will be penalised with one of the following penalties:
fine – disqualification – withdrawal of Championship points – suspension.
The red flag may also be used to close the track.
5.3 FLAG DIMENSIONS
The flag dimension should be approximately 80cms in the vertical and 100cms in the horizontal.
5.4 FLAG COLOURS
The Pantones for the colours are as follows:
Red:
Pantone 186C
Yellow: Pantone Yellow C
Green:
Pantone 348C
SECTION 6 BEHAVIOUR AT A MEETING
6.1
6.2
6.3
Riders are not allowed to transport another person on their machine or to be transported by
another rider on his machine.
Solo riders must adopt a position with their feet on the footrests.
Riders who fall from their machine are not permitted to continue in the meeting until passed
AUTO CYCLE UNION HANDBOOK 2015
6.4
6.5
6.6
6.7
6.8
6.9
HILLCLIMB AND SPRINT
387
fit by the Medical Personnel and the machine re-inspected by technical control. In the event
of a serious accident organisers may impound any machines, equipment or clothing of riders
involved in the accident.
Riders must not ride or push their motorcycles in the opposite direction of the circuit, unless
doing so under the direction of an Official.
The carrying of on board cameras is only permitted with the prior approval, in writing of the
Clerk of the Course. The installation of the camera must be approved by the Chief Technical
Officer.
Stopping on the track during a run is forbidden except for machine failure.
The spinning of rear wheels (burn-outs) is strictly forbidden on the track, with the exception of
the start area. Breach of this rule will result in a penalty of disqualification.
All competitors finishing an event must submit the machine for final examination if required.
The organisers may retain that machine for a reasonable period to allow for that examination.
Any competitor who in any ACU or MCRCB Permitted Event participates on a machine for
which he is not eligible through age or licence restrictions will be penalized by a fine of £500.00
and a suspension for one year from the date of the hearing.
SECTION 7 SAFETY
7.1MEDICAL SERVICES MINIMUM REQUIREMENTS FOR HILL CLIMB AND
SPRINT MEETINGS
Sprint and
Hillclimb
PERSONNEL
Doctors Paramedic(s) First Aid Ambulance(s)
MO
PM
personnel
1 MO or 1PM
2
1
VEHICLES
Fast Intervention
Vehicle
Special
Notes
The following applies to all events run under this code.
1.
Medical Officer (MO) – Doctor A medical practitioner (doctor) fully registered with the
General Medical Council (GMC), and holding appropriate personal medical malpractice
insurance cover (excludes NHS Crown Indemnity)
2.
Paramedic (PM) A State Registered Paramedic with the HPC (Health Professionals Council)
Paramedics must have appropriate personal medical malpractice insurance cover.
3.
Ambulance A vehicle registered as an ambulance with the DVLA (Driver and Vehicle Licencing
Agency) or similar government licencing authority and complying with FIM minimum
equipment regulations for a type C vehicle; that is:
Medical: A stretcher (preferably standardised), oxygen supply, apparatus to immobilise limbs
and vertebral column. First aid medicaments and materials.
Technical: Radio communication. Visible and audible signals.
Staffing: An ambulance must be staffed by two First Aid Personnel (who can be the two
minimum First Aid Personnel). An ambulance may act as a Medical Centre BUT if so it must be
a vehicle in addition to the minimum ambulance requirement.
4.
First Aid Personnel A person holding a current certificate of First Aid competency. (Where
an event is open to the public event organisers should ensure that all First Aid personnel are
insured against malpractice for the event concerned).
Special Notes
The minimum medical requirements specific for this discipline also apply to associated Test
Days.
5.
Medical Examination At any time during a meeting the Clerk of the Course may require a
388
HILLCLIMB AND SPRINT
AUTO CYCLE UNION HANDBOOK 2015
competitor to undergo a medical examination to determine his fitness to ride. The decision of
the Medical Officer is a matter of fact without right of protest.
7.2 TRACK SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
1.
The safety precautions of circuits will be as laid down for each Permanent Course Licence or
Temporary Course Certificate following an inspection of the course.
2.
It should be generally realised that the organisers of speed events have a legal responsibility to
the general public and therefore it is the duty of these organisers to ensure that all reasonable
precautions are taken to protect the public.
3.
Whilst organising clubs are insured under the Promoters Third Party Policy in respect of their
legal liability, it is a condition of the policy that the promoters of an event must comply strictly
with the National Sporting Code and any additional requirements as may be specified by the
Permanent Course Licence or Temporary Course Certificate.
Clubs failing to do so stand in grave danger of any claims being repudiated to the club by the
insurers under the terms of the policy covering legal liability.
4.
The safety precautions to be adopted are provided with the Permanent Course Licence or
Temporary Course Certificate for the particular course but the following general requirements
must be observed.
5.
The attention of organisers is drawn to the provision of the NSC which stipulates that no
alteration of the requirements contained in the Permanent Course Licence or Temporary
Course Certificate shall be made without the prior approval, in writing, of the ACU.
6.
It is recognised that circumstances may arise in which it is necessary to make certain alterations
to the course on the day of the meeting but any such alterations must be approved by the
Stewards of the Meeting and details given in their report to the authority granting the permit.
7.3 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS
Each working vehicle in the Paddock must have a 2 Kg (minimum) dry powder fire extinguisher
available for immediate use. This extinguisher must show the date of the last annual inspection. Non
– compliance with this regulation will incur a penalty imposed by the Clerk of the Course.
7.4 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS AT CIRCUITS
At all race and speed events, there must be a valid certificate, issued annually immediately prior to the
start of each season’s racing by the manufacturer or his agent, to the effect that all fire extinguishers
are in effective working order. This certificate must be available for inspection by the Stewards.
All fire posts must be clearly marked. In addition to the fire equipment at each post there must be:
1.
Fire extinguishers in the paddock and assembly area.
2.
At least two fire extinguishers in the Technical Control Area.
3.
Fire extinguishers in every medical room/centre.
7.5 WARNING AND PROHIBITION SIGNS AT CIRCUITS
For full details regarding Warning Notices and Prohibition Notices please refer to the Safety
Precautions section of this Handbook.
1.
1.
WARNING NOTICES
The following requirements regarding the display of Warning notices are applicable to all Hill
Climb and Sprint events.
WARNING NOTICE (A) (29 × 20 inches.) Warning notices as detailed below must be
displayed on each side of every entrance to the course, including the entrance to car parks and
paddock.
These notices must be prominently displayed where they can be easily read by the public before
AUTO CYCLE UNION HANDBOOK 2015
2.
HILLCLIMB AND SPRINT
389
any admission charge is paid, or where no admission charge is made before entry is gained into
the circuit.
Where it is not possible to define the limits of the site and to control admission of the public
(e.g. War Department and heath land) warning notices must be profusely displayed around the
course and also in the car parks.
WARNING NOTICE (B) (20 × 15 inches.) Those parts of the course to which the public may
be admitted and where it is neither practical nor necessary to erect a barrier, e.g. those parts of
the course which are straight and are only used by the public to reach other parts of the course,
may be indicated by the erection of the special type of Warning Notice (B). These notices
should be displayed at least 30ft from the course. It is recommended that the limit of these areas
should also be defined by a boundary tape.
2.
PROHIBITION NOTICES
The following requirements regarding the display of Prohibition notices are applicable to all Speed
events.
PROHIBITED AREA NOTICE (C) (29 × 20 inches.) Areas where the public are not permitted
must be clearly defined by the display of an adequate number of “Prohibited Area” notices (B).
Notices should be displayed within the prohibited area, facing the public.
7.6 DECLARATION – ADMISSION TICKETS, ARMBANDS AND PASSES
Subject to the provision of the Sunday Observance Act 1780, no person may be allowed to any part
of the circuit without a suitable pass or ticket. All tickets and passes must bear the following wording
shown below in full and if the wording appears on the reverse side then the words “ For Conditions
of Admission See Over” must be clearly printed on the face thereof. Where a ticket is cancelled by
being torn in half, the full wording and, where applicable, the “For conditions of admission see over”
must appear on each half. Where a charge is made for admission into special or “reserved” enclosures
a ticket bearing the approved declaration must be issued in exchange for payment to enter these
enclosures.
Declaration.
WARNING. MOTOR SPORT CAN BE DANGEROUS. Despite the organisers taking all reasonable
precautions, unavoidable accidents can happen. Please comply with all instructions of marshals and
notices and remain in permitted areas only. THEY ARE CONCERNED WITH YOUR SAFETY.
All vehicle passes must bear the same wording and comply with the above requirements.
7.7 DECLARATION ON THE OFFICIAL PROGRAMME
The declaration as outlined above should be printed in full on the outside front cover of all Official
Programmes. Where this is not possible it must be printed in full in the programme and the words
“For conditions of admission see inside” printed on the outside cover.
7.8 SIGNING ON
All riders, passengers, officials and assistants, press and team crew must sign a declaration on the
relevant signing on form (available from the ACU).
1.
Age Limits for Officials
All event Executive and Administrative Officials shall be 18 years of age or over.
2.
Age Limits for Marshals
1. All Assistant Officials whose function is to be carried out at the immediate track-side must be
at least 16 years of age.
2. All Assistant Officials who are under 18 years of age must have obtained parental agreement
to carry out the duty and the signing-on signature must be countersigned by the person
responsible for the official at the event.
3.
When using the services of officials under 18 years of age for any duties at any event special
390
HILLCLIMB AND SPRINT
AUTO CYCLE UNION HANDBOOK 2015
attention must be given to any risks which may be associated with the duty, and to the previous
experience of the official.
SECTION 8 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Specification of motorcycle Motorcycles must be of Solo Category I, Group A1 or Category II,
Group F, Sidecars, Category I, Group B1 or B2 or Category II Group F (Sprint and Drag Racers),
Three Wheelers, Category I, Group B3 or Category II, Group F.
8.1DRIVE
The drive to the machine shall be only through the road wheel or wheels.
8.2BRAKES
1.
Solo motorcycles must be equipped with one efficient brake operating on each wheel, and
operated independently.
2.
Motorcycles in Group B1, B2 and B3 must be equipped with at least two brakes, operating
independently, on at least two of the road wheels, each giving complete control.
8.3TYRES
1
Tyres for Hill climb Any type of tyre is permissible.
2
Tyres for Sprint There is no restriction on the type or size of tyres that may be used however
the cross section must not be less than 50mm
8.4MUDGUARDS
Mudguards are not compulsory.
8.5 CLUTCH AND BRAKE LEVERS
Clutch and brake levers must be ball ended, the diameter of the ball being not less than 16mm and
either an integral part of the lever or a permanent fixture.
8.6PRIMARY AND AUXILIARY DEVICES
Adequate guards must be fitted to prevent the drives being accidentally touched at any part of the run
not in contact with the sprockets.
8.7THROTTLES
All machines must be fitted with self-closing throttles.
8.8HANDLEBARS
1.
Handlebar minimum width 450mm
2.
The minimum angle of rotation of the handlebars, each side of the centre line or mid-position
must be 20 degrees.
3.
Whatever the position of the handlebars, it must not be possible for the front wheel to make
contact with any streamlining.
4.
It is compulsory to fit a stop or stops or other devices to ensure a minimum clearance of 30mm
between the handlebars and tank when on full lock to prevent the trapping of the rider’s
fingers.
8.9SUPERCHARGERS
1.
Hill Climb Superchargers are permitted.
2.
Sprint The use of superchargers is permitted on machines up to 2000cc
AUTO CYCLE UNION HANDBOOK 2015
HILLCLIMB AND SPRINT
391
8.10FUEL
1.
Hill Climb
1. Fuel may be Methanol or unleaded petrol, see ACU/FIM Fuel Regulations for physical
properties, fuel test costs and penalties for non-compliance. (Test costs and penalties also apply
if Methanol is used).
2. Power boosters nitrous oxide injection and octane boosters are forbidden.
3. Fuel must be stored in a labelled metal container.
4. Machines of a type manufactured before 1975 may use leaded pump petrol.
2.
Sprint
1. Unless otherwise stated in the Supplementary Regulations, there shall be no restrictions as to
the type of fuel that may be used.
2. All machines of any capacity running on any percentage of Nitro Methane must have a
positive fuel cut off that can be activated from the handlebars without the rider having to
remove a hand from the handlebars and to display a red triangle on the front of the machine to
indicate to the technical officials the machine is running on Nitro.
3. For Junior Classes only unleaded petrol may be used. Nitrous oxide injection, power and
octane boosters are prohibited
8.11FOOTRESTS
1.
The footrests for the rider must be positioned to give easy access to any control pedal.
2.
The ends of the footrests must be rounded with a ball end of not less than 8mm diameter.
8.12 OIL DRAIN PLUGS AND SUPPLY PIPES
All oil drain plugs must be tight and must be drilled and wired in position. Oil supply pipes must be
adequately wired in position.
8.13 OIL CATCH TANKS
1.
Where an oil breather pipe is fitted the outlet must discharge into a catch tank located in an
easily accessible position and which must be emptied before the start of a meeting.
2.
Total loss engines must have an effective means of collecting all ejected oil with no discharge to
road.
8.14 NUMBER PLATES
1.
Whenever number plates are required to be carried at an event they will be three in number
and must comply with the following requirements.
2.
They must be made of rigid material and solidly constructed, rectangular in shape, measuring a
minimum of 235mm × 285mm in size with 50mm radius rounded corners.
3.
The plates must be flat or slightly curved (not more than one inch from the true plane) and
must not be otherwise bent or obscured in any way.
4.
One plate must be carried facing forward and not more than 25 degrees from the vertical and
others must be facing outwards and vertical, one on each side of the machine.
5.
The minimum dimension of the figures must be: height 140mm, width of stroke 25mm, and the
space between any two figures 25mm.
6.
The figures must be legible and both figures and background must be in a ‘matt’ (non-shiny)
colour
7.
They must be so fixed that they are clearly visible and not obscured by any part of the machine
or by the rider when he is in the riding position.
8.
In place of detachable plates similar areas may be painted on the body of the machine or on the
streamlining.
392
HILLCLIMB AND SPRINT
AUTO CYCLE UNION HANDBOOK 2015
9.
Any other number plate or any marking on the motorcycle that might be confused with a
number plate must be removed before the rider is allowed to start. The following colours shall
be used and they must be Matt colours following the RAL Colour table:
Black
9005,Blue
5010,Yellow
1003,Orange
2007,
Red
3020,Green
6002,White
9010
The front and side number plates for each class of motorcycles are:
Class
Up to 125cc
Up to 250cc
Up to 350cc
Up to 500cc
Up to 750cc
Up to 1300cc
Sidecars and Threewheelers
Background
Black background
Green background
Blue background
Yellow background
White background
Red background
White background
Numbers
White numbers
White numbers
White numbers
Black numbers
Black numbers
White numbers
Black numbers
8.15 CONTROL OF EXHAUST SOUND LEVEL
1.
The Clerk of the Course may disqualify any machine which exceeds the maximum permitted
sound level, or which in his opinion is deemed to be excessively noisy.
2.
The sound level of hill climb machines is controlled according to the ACU method.
3.
Machines must comply with the Supplementary Regulations for the meeting.
8.16 EXHAUST PIPES
The end of the exhaust pipe or pipes may not project beyond any part of the vehicle or its bodywork.
8.17CONSTRUCTION
The use of titanium in the construction of the frame, the front forks, the handlebars, the swinging
arm spindles and the wheel spindles is forbidden. For wheel spindles, the use of light alloy is also
forbidden. The use of titanium alloy nuts and bolts is allowed.
8.18 STREAMLINING FOR SPRINT MACHINES
1.
Unless otherwise stated in the Supplementary Regulations, there is no restriction on the type
of streamlining of a motorcycle except that there must be a clearance of at least 50mm between
the streamlining and the extremities of the handlebars or other form of steering device,
including any attachments thereto, whatever the position of the handlebars
2.
Should the streamlining totally enclose the rider and/or passenger, a firewall must be installed
between the engine and the rider and passenger and, in addition, a substantial roll bar must be
securely fitted.
3.
Any streamlining must be approved by the Technical Official and, unless so approved, the
motorcycle must not be driven in any event or in practice thereof
8.19 SPRINT ADDITIONAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR SOLO MACHINES 1300CC AND OVER
All motorcycles in or over 1300cc (Category) must comply with the following:
1.
A positive on-off ignition cut-out switch must be fitted in an accessible position on the
handlebar so as to be operated by a rider or marshal in an emergency.
2.
All fuel lines from the main supply tanks must be fitted with easily accessible on and off control
taps.
3.
A final drive steel guard with a minimum thickness of 1.5mm steel or 3mm alloy gauge must
be fitted to enclose the top run if a chain is used. If drive shafts are employed, restraining steel
rings must encircle the shafts, one at each end.
4.
A clutch guard of sufficient strength must be fitted to protect the rider and/or passenger in the
AUTO CYCLE UNION HANDBOOK 2015
5.
6.
7.
8.20
1.
2.
3.
4.
HILLCLIMB AND SPRINT
393
event of clutch parts breaking up. If cruciform in shape, it is to be made of minimum 38mm
wide 3mm steel. If a complete covering, minimum 1.5mm wall thickness.
All frames must be entirely self-supporting and stable in the event of one or more of the
engines disintegrating.
The front steering assembly must have a minimum trail of 100mm and be of sufficient strength
to obviate any likelihood of collapse during acceleration or under braking conditions. Flimsy
forks or frames are not permitted.
For Junior Classes superchargers and turbochargers are not permitted. For Junior Classes
standard rebores are permitted to a maximum increase in engine capacity of 3cc.
HILL CLIMB – ADDITIONAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR THREE WHEEL MACHINES
Class 1
1. Handlebar steering – handlebar minimum width 450mm.
2. Handlebar twist grip.
3. Single front wheel steering only.
4. Or be age related, historic three wheel machines.
Class 2
1. Modern three wheel car type machines.
2. Steering wheel.
3. Accelerator pedal.
All fully enclosed streamlined three-wheelers must carry a timing strut mounted on the most
forward part of the vehicle to activate timing devices in events where timing is activated by a
light beam.
The vertical strut must be opaque and non-reflecting and a height of 25.4cm by a depth of 5cm
between 20cm and 46cm from the ground.
A passenger must be carried in addition to the rider. The passenger must always be completely
protected from the road wheels and drive (both primary and final) either by mud guarding or
some other means.
8.21 SPRINT – ADDITIONAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR THREE-WHEELERS
1.
All fully enclosed streamlined three-wheelers must carry a timing strut mounted on the most
forward part of the vehicle to activate timing devices in events where timing is activated by a
light beam.
2.
Where fitted the vertical strut must be opaque and non-reflecting and a height of 25.4cm by a
depth of 5cm between 20cm and 46cm from the ground.
3.
A passenger or ballast must be carried in addition to the rider. If a passenger is replaced by
ballast this must weigh not less than 132lb and must be securely affixed under the supervision
of a Technical Official. Where a passenger is carried, the passenger must always be completely
protected from the road wheels and drive (both primary and final) either by mud guarding or
some other means.
SECTION 9 PROTECTIVE CLOTHING
9.1PROTECTIVE CLOTHING
1.
Bulky hard objects such as tools etc. are NOT to be carried in pockets or on the person.
2.
During practice and racing, riders and passengers must wear the following clothing and
footwear:
3.
Competitors must wear a complete leather suit of at least 1.2mm in thickness (on all parts of
the suit), two piece suits that zip together at the waist are acceptable. Each part of the zip should
be securely attached to the jacket or the trousers respectively and the suit must zip together
over at least 75% of the waist band.
394
HILLCLIMB AND SPRINT
4.
Non-leather material may be used if it meets with the requirements laid down by ACU Road
Racing Standing Regulations.
Competitors footwear must be of leather (i.e. outer hide) or an approved substitute material
and of a minimum height of 200mm to provide, with the suit, complete protection i.e. no
exposed areas.
Competitors must wear leather (or an approved substitute material) protective gloves.
5.
6.
AUTO CYCLE UNION HANDBOOK 2015
9.2 BODY JEWELLERY
It is recommended that any body piercing studs, ring etc. are removed.
9.3HELMETS
1.
Helmets bearing the current ACU gold stamp and in sound condition and properly fitted must
be worn by all riders and passengers while practicing and racing.
2.
Overseas riders may use helmets as approved by their own FMN.
9.4 IDENTIFICATION DISCS
While practising and racing, riders and passengers are required to wear an identification disc around
the neck, attached by a material approved by the technical officer. Thin chains should be avoided. The
disc must be permanently marked with the wearer’s full name and date of birth. Identification discs
shall be of a durable material, circular in shape, between 20mm and 25mm in diameter and having
rounded edges with no sharp or ragged projections.
SECTION 10 RUN WHAT YOU BRUNG –
CLASSES FOR ROAD LEGAL MACHINES
The National Sporting Code of the ACU, these Standing Regulations and the Disciplinary Section of
the Road Race Standing Regulations shall apply to all Sprint and Hill Climb “Run what you Brung”
events within a Sprint or Hill Climb Meeting together with the Supplementary Regulations and any
final instructions.
10.1DEFINITION
A race at a Sprint or Hill Climb meeting for Competitors competing on motorcycles registered and
licenced for use on the Public Highway.
10.2ELIGIBILITY
Open to competitors who are holders of a full DVLA motorcycle licence and who hold an ACU
Competition Licence or ACU One Event Licence.
10.3 MACHINE ELIGIBILITY
Any motorcycle registered and licenced for use on the Public Highway. A current MOT certificate,
if required, must be produced at Technical Control inspection. The machine must be in road legal
condition to be eligible to take part in this type of event.
10.4
1.
2.
3.
4.
TECHNICAL CONTROL
The machine must be free from all obvious fluid leaks.
A number issued by the organisers must be displayed on the machine, to enable identification.
All lights and indicators must be taped over.
All stands must be wired or taped up.
10.5PROTECTIVE CLOTHING
See Section 9
AUTO CYCLE UNION HANDBOOK 2015
HILLCLIMB AND SPRINT
395
SECTION 11 ACU SPRINT CHAMPIONSHIP QUALIFYING ROUNDS
(TO BE ANNOUNCED)
11.1TITLE
The main title of each round shall be the ACU Sprint Championship ‘X’ Round – this to appear on all
documentation. The title may however be abbreviated at the discretion of the ACU in the case of the
use of associated advertising material, where it would be impracticable to use the full title.
11.2ELIGIBILITY
1.
Open only to holders of a current ACU, Scottish ACU or MCUI competition licence for
sprinting.
2.
All Championship rounds shall be run under Restricted Permits.
3.
For all ACU Championships an ACU decal will be displayed on the front number plate. The
ACU decal will be supplied to riders by the organiser. Any Competitor failing to display such a
decal shall forfeit the right to any prize money or Championship points. This will be treated as a
matter of fact.
11.3CLASSES
Capacity From To
Racing Solo Motorcycles
50cc
up to 50cc
125cc
51cc to 125cc
250cc
126cc to 250cc
400cc
251cc to 400cc
500cc
401cc to 500cc
750cc
501cc to 750cc
1000cc
751cc to 1000cc
2000cc
1001cc to 2000cc
Ov. 2000cc. Ov.2000cc (normally aspirated)
Vintage Solo M/C Built before 1/1/59
Scooters – Category A2 Up to 250cc
Road Legal Solo Motorcycles
250cc
up to 250cc
400cc
251cc to 400cc
750cc
401cc to 750cc
1000cc
751cc to 1000cc
Unlimited
1001cc and above
Racing Sidecars & Three Wheelers – Category B
500cc
up to 500cc
1000cc
501cc to 1000cc
2000cc
1001cc to 2000cc
3500cc
2001cc to 3500cc
11.4POINTS
Points will be awarded in all rounds on the basis of the finishing places in each class.
10 points 1st place, 9 points 2nd, 8 points 3rd place, 7 points 4th place. 3 extra points will be awarded
to a competitor for breaking a class record. Points cannot be scored in Racing and Road Legal Classes
on the same machine. No points will be awarded for establishing a class record.
11.5 OVERALL CLASSIFICATION
At the conclusion of the Championship the points for each riders best six performances from the nine
396
HILLCLIMB AND SPRINT
AUTO CYCLE UNION HANDBOOK 2015
rounds will be added together, and the rider with the highest number of points in any one class will
be declared the winner.
11.6TIES
Ties will be decided as follows:
1.
By the rider gaining the highest number of wins from the six meetings counting for the riders
total.
2.
By the highest number of class records broken.
3.
By the greatest number of first and second places in all qualifying events.
4.
In the event of a continuing tie, the decision will be taken on the basis of the extent to which
class records have been broken.
11.7 RESULTS RETURN METHOD
1.
Immediately after each meeting organisers should send a copy of the result sheets to the Series
Coordinator –
Jayne Glover, 18 De Haviland Close, Wimborne BH21 1XU. [email protected]
2.
The Series Coordinator will assess the results, and will send them immediately after the final
round to the ACU for ratification. The Results form will be completed by him in the following
manner:
1. Heading: the number of the round, the venue and the date.
2. Name: riders name.
3. Number: Racing number allocated by round organiser.
4. Record Time: If a new track class record has been established the time will be
entered,otherwise a line will be drawn through the box.
5. Class: Each riders capacity class will be shown with ‘’Racing”” or ‘’Prod”” as appropriate.
6. Position: Results for each rider will be entered as follows:
10 points 1st place, 9 points 2nd place, 8 points 3rd place, 7 point 4th place. 3 extra points for
breaking a class record
SECTION 12 SPRINT RECORD ATTEMPTS
1.
2.
3.
An application for a National Record Attempt meeting must be lodged with the ACU at
least one month (International 3 months) before the attempt, together with the names of the
appointed Timekeeper and Measurer.
Applications for a permit to attempt records by a rider must be received at the ACU offices not
less than 28 days before the published day of the event.
Regulations governing attempts at British National Records and Elvington’ Production Records
are obtainable from the ACU Headquarters together with a list of current Records. Price £5.00
available from the ACU Road Race Department.
AUTO CYCLE UNION HANDBOOK 2015
Pocket Bike
POCKET BIKE
Standing Regulations
397
398
POCKET BIKE
AUTO CYCLE UNION HANDBOOK 2015
SECTION 1 GENERAL
1.1Eligibility399
SECTION 2 MACHINES
2.1Categories399
SECTION 3 CLOTHING
3.1
Protective Clothing400
3.2Jewellery400
3.3Helmets400
3.4
Identification Discs400
SECTION 4 SPECIFICATIONS
4.1
Solo Basic Dimensions in mm400
4.2Carburettors400
4.3
Spark Plugs400
4.4Fuel401
4.5
Kill Switch401
4.6Coolant401
4.7Wheels401
4.8Tyres401
4.9Brakes401
4.10Transmission401
4.11Exhaust401
4.12
Noise Control401
4.13Bodywork401
4.14
Number Plates401
4.15
Sidecar Specification401
4.16Engines402
4.17
Engine Position402
4.18
Oil and Coolant Containment402
4.19
Kill Switch402
4.20
Air Intakes402
4.21Carburettors402
4.22Wheels403
4.23
Sidecar Wheel403
4.24Tyres403
4.25Brake403
4.26Fuel403
4.27Coolant403
4.28
Number Plates403
SECTION 5 MEDICAL SERVICES
5.1
Medical Services. Minimum Requirements for Pocket Bike Meetings403
SECTION 6 ACU MINI BIKE CHAMPIONSHIP
404
POCKET BIKE
AUTO CYCLE UNION HANDBOOK 2015
399
The National Sporting Code of the ACU and these Standing Regulations shall apply to
all Pocket Bike Meetings, together with the Supplementary Regulations and any final
instructions.
Definition A sport where miniature motorcycles or sidecars with a rigid frame and propelled by an
internal combustion engine. They compete in massed start races around a specially designed metalled
road circuit.
SECTION 1 GENERAL
1.1ELIGIBILITY
1
Race Circuits These can be either permanent or temporary courses. The Circuit must hold a
current Track Licence for racing issued by the Auto Cycle Union. The course should ideally
have a minimum length of 500 metres. The minimum width must be 6 metres.
2
Competitors All competitors must hold a current competition licence for Road Racing or
Pocket Bike Racing issued by the Auto Cycle Union.
3
Categories
Class
Junior A
Junior B
Senior Open 40
Senior Open 50
Super
Mini GP50
Mini GP70
Pit Bike 140
Pit Bike 160
Junior Sidecar Drivers
Junior Sidecar Passengers
F2 Sidecars Drivers
F1 Sidecars Drivers
Sidecar Passengers
40cc 2-stroke or 80cc 4-stroke
40cc 2-stroke or 80cc 4-stroke
40cc 2-stroke or 80cc 4-stroke
50cc 2-stroke or 110cc 4-stroke
50cc 2-stroke or 110cc 4-stroke
50cc 2-stroke or 110cc 4-stroke
70cc 2-stroke or 110cc 4-stroke
140cc 4-stroke
160cc 4-stroke
Age limits
6 to 10 years
10 to 12 years
11 to 15 years
12 years and over
12 years and over
9 to 15 years
10 to 17 years
12 years and over
14 years and over
12–16 years
12 years and over
16 years and over
16 years and over
13 years and over
SECTION 2 MACHINES
2.1CATEGORIES
Maximum Power Outputs
Class
Junior A
Junior B
Senior Open 40
Senior Open 50
Super
Mini GP50
Mini GP70
Pit Bike 140
Pit Bike 160
40cc 2-stroke or 80cc 4-stroke
40cc 2-stroke or 80cc 4-stroke
40cc 2-stroke or 80cc 4-stroke
50cc 2-stroke or 110cc 4-stroke
50cc 2-stroke or 110cc 4-stroke
50cc 2-stroke or 110cc 4-stroke
70cc 2-stroke or 110cc 4-stroke
140cc 4-stroke
160cc 4-stroke
TBA
TBA
TBA
TBA
TBA
14 bhp
18 bhp
14 bhp
18 bhp
All power figures will be as measured at the rear wheel during post race or practice Parc Ferme
controls. There are no tolerances.
400
POCKET BIKE
AUTO CYCLE UNION HANDBOOK 2015
SECTION 3 CLOTHING
All competitors must wear protective clothing as described in the Road Race Technical Regulations.
3.1PROTECTIVE CLOTHING
Two piece leather suits zipped together at the waist are permitted. Proprietary Pocket Bike clothing is
acceptable, but must include back and knee protectors.
3.2JEWELLERY
It is recommended that all body piercing, studs, rings etc. are removed.
Competitors are advised not to wear hand, face or body jewellery/piercings which could prove
hazardous in the event of an accident. The mouth should be kept clear of anything likely to cause
a blockage of the airway in the event of an incident, e.g. chewing gum. This includes removing
dentures.
3.3HELMETS
All competitors must wear a helmet as described in Road Race Technical Regulations.
3.4 IDENTIFICATION DISCS
While practising and racing riders and passengers are required to wear an identification disc around
the neck, attached by a material approved by the technical official. Thin chains should be avoided. The
disc must be permanently marked with the wearer’s full name and date of birth. Identification discs
shall be of durable material, circular in shape, between 20mm and 25mm in diameter and having
rounded edges with no sharp or ragged projections.
SECTION 4 SPECIFICATIONS
4.1 SOLO BASIC DIMENSIONS IN MM
Minibikes
Midibikes
min
max
Wheelbase
620 max
675
730
Length
900 max
968
1060
Height of Saddle
385 max
425
460
Footrests
Non-foldingNon-folding
Total Height
540 max
620
Minimum length of Footpegs*
60 min
*Footpegs must be plastic or rubber covered and round tipped.
A tolerance of +/– 5% is allowed
All solo machines must have dry centrifugal clutch keyed into the crank shaft. The engine for solo
machines must have a recoil cord pull starting device.
4.2CARBURETTORS
1
Junior Classes Standard carburettors with the engine restrictor in place over a length of 3mm
between the cylinder and exhaust. The main jet may be modified.
2
Production Classes Standard SHA 14/14L Dellorto with any jet. This may be mounted on a
rubber manifold.
3
Senior and Super Classes No restrictions
4.3 SPARK PLUGS
No restrictions
AUTO CYCLE UNION HANDBOOK 2015
POCKET BIKE
401
4.4FUEL
Only unleaded fuel, that can be obtained from a roadside petrol station can be used.
4.5 KILL SWITCH
A kill switch must be located on the handlebars adjacent to the headstock.
4.6COOLANT
Water is the only coolant permitted in water cooled engines.
4.7WHEELS
Any make of wheel is permitted. The diameter of wheel and tyre is 280mm maximum. The width of
the wheels is 110mm maximum.
4.8TYRES
Any make of tyre, slick or treaded, is permitted. The maximum diameter of tyre is 280mm.
4.9BRAKES
Cable operated disc brakes are required on either wheel.
4.10TRANSMISSION
By chain with any ratios. A chain guard must be fitted in such a way as to prevent trapping between
the lower chain run and the final driven sprocket at the rear wheel.
4.11EXHAUST
1
For all 4.2 type engines the down pipe will be a cylindrical shape with a minimum length of
280mm from the flange (maximum 4mm thick) to the expansion box with an external diameter
of 25mm (+maximum 1.0mm tolerance) made of sheet metal with a thickness of between
1.0mm and 2.0mm.
2
The regulated exhaust pipe must have standard ribbing which may only be removed at the
point at which it would come into contact with the frame or other parts.
3
A cut may be made in the exhaust pipe to aid assembly but the manufacturer must prove the
need.
4.12 NOISE CONTROL
The maximum permitted noise is 97db/a (post race inspection tolerance 2dba) The noise control is
measured at an engine speed of 8,000rpm. The end of the exhaust must not project beyond the back
end of the tailpiece.
4.13BODYWORK
Fairing and streamlining are permitted. Covering of the headstock is compulsory.
4.14 NUMBER PLATES
1
Front numbers are compulsory and must be 70mm high. They must be of a contrasting colour
to the number plate (e.g. white numbers on a black plate).
2
Side number plates are optional.
3
The font for all numbers must be in accordance with the ACU Road Race Standing Regulations.
4.15 SIDECAR SPECIFICATION
1
A passenger must be carried and must always be protected from the road wheels and both
primary and final drive trains.
402
POCKET BIKE
2
Construction The chassis must be constructed of quality steel tube or box section with a
maximum diameter of 50mm.
Basic Dimensions
Length
1380mm Maximum including bodywork
Width
1020mm Maximum including bodywork
Height
560mm Maximum including bodywork
Wheelbase
1040mm Maximum
Track690mm Maximum (Measured as the distance between the centre of the track
left by the rear wheel to the centre of the track left by the sidecar wheel. A
tolerance of +/– 5% is allowed.)
3
AUTO CYCLE UNION HANDBOOK 2015
4.16ENGINES
1
Junior Sidecars Maximum 6 gears. Honda GXQ4 200cc 4 stroke engine. No tuning is
permitted other than polishing internal parts.
2
F2 Sidecar Maximum 6 gears. Single cylinder engine maximum 80cc (two stroke), 125cc (four
stroke) derived from road motorcycles. Tuning permitted to any engine to a maximum rating
of 15hp.
3
F1 Sidecars Maximum 6 gears.
4
Single cylinder engine maximum 80cc (two stroke), 200cc (four stroke) derived from Moto X/
Enduro motorcycles.
5
For four stroke engines tuning is permitted to a maximum rating of 26hp. Two stroke engines
must remain as standard including the ignition, carburettor and exhaust.
4.17 ENGINE POSITION
The engine must be positioned between the front and rear spindles. The drive must be transmitted
through the rear wheel.
4.18 OIL AND COOLANT CONTAINMENT
1
In the area directly below the engine, the oil containment tray must be constructed to hold, in
case of an engine breakdown, at least half of the total oil and engine coolant capacity used in
the engine (minimum 5 litres).
2
The surrounding edges of the tray must be at least 50mm above the bottom of the tray.
3
Four stroke machines must use this tray
4
Oil lines containing positive pressure must, if replaced, be of a metal construction, with swaged
or threaded connectors.
5
Oil coolers must not be mounted on or above the body of the sidecar.
6
The location of the oil tank and oil cooler should not be placed in a location where it is likely to
be damaged in an accident.
7
Where an oil breather pipe is fitted the outlet must discharge into a catch tank in an easily
accessible position which must be emptied before the start of the meeting, minimum capacity
500ml.
4.19 KILL SWITCH
A kill switch must be located on the handlebars adjacent to the headstock.
4.20 AIR INTAKES
Air or cooling ducts must not project outside the maximum length or width.
4.21CARBURETTORS
No restrictions.
AUTO CYCLE UNION HANDBOOK 2015
POCKET BIKE
403
4.22WHEELS
All wheels must be of metal construction with a maximum diameter of 127mm.
4.23 SIDECAR WHEEL
This must be off set to the left with the axle forward of the rear wheel. The sidecar wheel must be
enclosed from the sidecar platform and level with the platform on the outside and right round the
periphery. A cut out to check the tyres is permitted.
4.24TYRES
Any make of tyre, slick or treaded, is permitted. Kart tyres are permitted.
4.25BRAKE
Both road wheels must have effective brakes, one of which must be of the hydraulic type. A brake on
the sidecar wheel is optional.
4.26FUEL
Only unleaded fuel that can be obtained from a roadside petrol station can be used.
4.27COOLANT
Water is the only coolant permitted in water cooled engines.
4.28 NUMBER PLATES
Front numbers are compulsory and must be 70mm high. They must be of a contrasting colour to the
number plate (e.g. white numbers on a black plate).
The font for all numbers must be in accordance with the ACU Road Race Standing Regulations.
SECTION 5 MEDICAL SERVICES
5.1 MEDICAL SERVICES. MINIMUM REQUIREMENTS FOR POCKET BIKE MEETINGS
The minimum requirements for practice or racing to commence are as follows:
2 Paramedics, 2 First Aid technicians and 2 Ambulances.
If one Ambulance has to leave the venue for any reason, the event can continue provided that there
are a minimum of 1 ambulance and 2 Paramedics present and available.
A Doctor may replace 1 or the 2 Paramedics
An ambulance may act as a Medical Centre BUT if so it must be a vehicle additional to the minimum
ambulance requirement.
First Aid Personnel A person holding a current certificate of First Aid competency. (Where an event
is open to the public event organisers should ensure that all First Aid personnel are insured against
malpractice for the event concerned).
Special Notes
The minimum medical requirements specific for this discipline also apply to associated Test Days
404
POCKET BIKE
AUTO CYCLE UNION HANDBOOK 2015
SECTION 6 ACU MINI BIKE CHAMPIONSHIP
The National Sporting Code of the ACU, the Pocket Bike Standing Regulations together with
these Mini Bike Championship Conditions and the Disciplinary Section of the Road Race
Standing Regulations shall apply to all rounds of the ACU Mini Bike Championship together
with the Supplementary Regulations and any final instructions
6.1 CHAMPIONSHIP STATUS
The Championship will be held under the auspices of the ACU Ltd.
6.2 CHAMPIONSHIP ROUNDS AND VENUES
There will be 6 two day events between March and October
6.3CIRCUITS
The circuit should be inspected and approved by the ACI Track Inspector. The circuit licence will
be valid for a period of three years. The minimum width should be 6 metres. The minimum length
should be 500with the maximum length to be set at the track inspection.
6.4 GRID AND STARTING NUMBERS
The grid should be set out during the track inspection, but should in principle be a 3 × 3 solo grid
with 6 metres between each row. In principle the grid capacity should be a maximum of 28 machines
with a 50% additional allowance for qualifying or practice unless the ACU Track Inspector sets a
lower limit during the inspection.
6.5PRACTICE AND QUALIFYING
There will be a minimum of 15 minutes practice/qualifying allocated to each class at each event.
Participation in these sessions is compulsory for a minimum of 3 laps. On the 2nd day of a two day
meeting a minimum of 10 minutes practice must be made available to every competitor. Participation
in the 2nd days free practice is not compulsory.
Testing or practice at the same venue is prohibited for the 72 hours preceding each championship
round.
Each grid will be set based on lap times recorded during each qualifying practice.
6.6 CHAMPIONSHIP LICENCE
An ACU Mini-Bike Championship Licence will be required in order to take part in the series.
This will be available for a fee of £10 from the ACU and will only be valid for participation in this
championship. An eyesight report is not required for this licence, but the Clerk of the Course or
Chief Medical Officer may require any competitor at random to submit an eyesight test before
competing. Any competitor holding an ACU Road Race or Supermoto Licence may add Mini Bike
Championship eligibility with no extra charge
6.7 COMPETITOR TRAINING
As this is an entry level to tarmac racing, no previous competition experience is required, but every
competitor must attend a riders briefing and induction course before participation in their first event.
Once the induction course has been received, a validation sticker will be added to the back of the
competitor’s ACU Licence.
6.8 CHAMPIONSHIP POINTS
Points will be awarded for each championship race on the scale 25.20.16.13.11.10.9.8.7.6.5.4.3.2.1. If
at the end of the season, there is a tie on the points then the highest number of wins will determine
the winner, should that be equal the then 2nds, 3rds, etc will be taken into account until a winner is
established.
AUTO CYCLE UNION HANDBOOK 2015
Scooter
Standing Regulations
SCOOTER
405
406
SCOOTER
AUTO CYCLE UNION HANDBOOK 2015
SECTION 1 MEETINGS
1.1
Categories of Meetings411
1.2International411
1.3
European Open411
1.4National411
1.5Open411
1.6Restricted411
1.7
Eligibility of Foreign Riders in Open and Restricted Meetings412
1.8
Practice Meetings and Test Days412
1.9
Conditions for Road Race Meetings412
1.10
Force Majeure412
SECTION 2 LICENCE – COMPETITORS
2.1General412
2.2Grades412
2.3
Lapsed Licences413
2.4
Capacity and Licence Restrictions413
SECTION 3 LICENCES AND REGISTRATIONS – OFFICIALS
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
Qualifications and Conditions413
Road Race Officials who Require a Licence413
Grades for Clerk of the Course413
Road Race Officials who do not Require a Licence414
SECTION 4 PRACTICE
4.1
Practice sessions.415
SECTION 5 GRID POSITIONS
5.1Positions415
5.2
Timed Practice415
5.3Balloted415
5.4Allocated415
SECTION 6 START PROCEDURES
6.1
6.2
6.3
6.4
6.5
Group Starts415
Interval Starts416
Clubmans Races416
National Races416
Anticipation of the Start417
SECTION 7 FLAGS AND LIGHTS
7.1
7.2
7.3
7.4
7.5
7.6
Flags and Lights Used to Provide Information417
Flags Used to Convey Information and Instructions418
Flag Dimensions419
Flag Colours419
Flag Marshals’ Posts420
Marshals’ Overalls420
SECTION 8 BEHAVIOUR DURING PRACTICE AND RACE
8.1
Riders must obey the flag signals, the light signals, and the boards420
8.2Protests421
AUTO CYCLE UNION HANDBOOK 2015
SCOOTER
407
SECTION 9 NEUTRALISATION OF RACES – SAFETY CAR
SECTION 10 INTERRUPTION OF A RACE
422
SECTION 11 RE-STARTING A RACE THAT HAS BEEN INTERRUPTED423
SECTION 12 FINISH OF A RACE AND RACE RESULTS
12.1
12.2
12.3
Finish of a Race424
The Chequered Flag will Continue to be Displayed to the Subsequent Riders.424
Race Results424
SECTION 13 SAFETY
13.1
13.2
13.3
13.4
13.5
13.6
13.7
13.8
Medical Services – Minimum Requirements for Road Race Meetings425
Track Safety Precautions426
Fire Extinguishers426
Fire Extinguishers at Circuits426
Warning and Prohibition Signs at Circuits427
Declaration – Admission Tickets, Armbands and Passes427
Declaration on the Official Programme427
Signing On428
SECTION 14 GENERAL TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
14.1
Protective Clothing428
14.2Helmets428
14.3
Identification Discs428
14.4
Body Jewellery429
SECTION 15 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR
SOLO MOTORSCOOTERS
15.1Introduction429
15.2General429
15.3Definitions429
15.4
Frame and Bodywork429
15.5Streamlining430
15.6Inclination431
15.7Footrests431
15.8Projections431
15.9Kickstarts431
15.10Glass431
15.11 Air Intakes431
15.12 Engine and Drive Units – General431
15.13 For Standard Class Machines431
15.14 For Special Scooters432
15.15 Engine Position433
15.16 Induction Systems433
15.17 Forced Induction433
15.18Fuel433
15.19 Exhaust Systems433
15.20 Fuel Tank434
15.21 Oil Drain/Filler Plugs and Catch Tanks434
15.22Steering434
408
SCOOTER
AUTO CYCLE UNION HANDBOOK 2015
15.23 Wheels and Tyres434
15.24Suspension435
15.25Brakes435
15.26Mudguards435
15.27 Electrical Systems and Battery435
15.28 Throttle Controls435
15.29 Control Levers436
SECTION 16 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR
“AUTOMATIC” SOLO MOTORSCOOTERS
16.1Introduction436
16.2Definitions436
16.3
Engine Capacity436
16.4
Ignition (Starter and Flywheel)437
16.5Seat437
16.6Specifications437
16.7Weight438
16.8Projections438
16.9
Glass/Plastic Lenses438
16.10Fuel438
16.11 Fuel Feed Taps438
16.12Tyres438
16.13Brakes438
16.14 Ignition Switches and Battery438
SECTION 17 TECHNICAL REGULATIONS FOR
PRODUCTION CLASS SOLO MOTORSCOOTERS
17.1Introduction439
17.2General439
17.3
Basic Specification439
17.4Seating439
17.5
Glass/Plastic Lenses439
17.6
Ignition System439
17.7Gearing439
17.8
Induction System439
17.9
Bore and Stroke439
17.10Fuel439
17.11 Fuel Feed Taps440
17.12Tyres440
17.13 Front Suspension440
SECTION 18 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR
STREET CLASS SOLO MOTORSCOOTERS
18.1Introduction440
18.2General440
18.3
Basic Specification440
18.4Seating440
18.5
Glass/Plastic Lenses440
18.6Fuel440
18.7
Fuel Feed Taps440
18.8
Oil Drain/Filler Plugs440
AUTO CYCLE UNION HANDBOOK 2015
SCOOTER
409
18.9Tyres441
18.10Brakes441
18.11 Front Suspension441
SECTION 19 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR
MOTORSCOOTER COMBINATIONS (GROUP 7)
19.1Introduction441
19.2General441
19.3Construction441
19.4Dimensions441
19.5
Streamlining and Bodywork442
19.6Projections442
19.7
Drive Guard442
19.8Glass442
19.9
Air Intakes442
19.10 Engine and Drive Units442
19.11 Engine Position443
19.12 Induction Systems443
19.13 Forced Induction443
19.14Fuel443
19.15 Exhaust Systems443
19.16 Fuel Tank444
19.17 Oil Drain/Filler Plugs and Catch Tanks444
19.18Steering444
19.19 Wheels and Tyres444
19.20 Front Suspensions445
19.21 Rear Suspension445
19.22Brakes445
19.23 Mudguards and Wheel Protection445
19.24Driver445
19.25Passenger446
19.26 Electrical Systems and Battery446
19.27 Throttle Controls446
19.28 Control Levers446
SECTION 20 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR
FORMULA 125 MOTORSCOOTER COMBINATIONS
20.1Construction446
20.2Dimensions446
20.3
Streamlining and Bodywork447
20.4Driveguards447
20.5
Engine and Drive Units447
20.6
Engine Position447
20.7
Induction Systems447
20.8
Fuel – Unleaded448
20.9Steering448
20.10 Wheels and Tyres448
20.11 Rear Suspension448
410
SCOOTER
AUTO CYCLE UNION HANDBOOK 2015
SECTION 21 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR
CLASSIC (GROUP 8) MOTORSCOOTER COMBINATIONS
21.1Introduction448
21.2Construction448
21.3Dimensions449
21.4
Streamlining and Bodywork449
21.5
Engine and Drive Units449
21.6Crankcase449
21.7Crankshaft450
21.8Gearcase450
21.9
Engine Position450
21.10 Induction Systems450
21.11 Wheels and Tyres450
21.12 Rear Suspension450
21.13 Control Levers450
AUTO CYCLE UNION HANDBOOK 2015
SCOOTER
411
The National Sporting Code of the ACU and these Standing Regulations shall apply to all
Scooter meetings, together with the Supplementary Regulations and any final instructions.
SECTION 1 MEETINGS
1.1 CATEGORIES OF MEETINGS
• International Meetings
• European Open Meetings
• National Meetings
• Open Meetings
• Restricted Meetings
Permits for all Road Race competitions are issued by ACU Headquarters
1.2INTERNATIONAL
1
The Permit shall be issued by the ACU Headquarters for a meeting inscribed on the
International Calendar of the FIM and having an FIM International Meeting Number (IMN).
2
An International meeting is open to Entrants and Riders of more than one nation who must
hold an International Licence or a National Licence issued by the ACU valid for the particular
meeting concerned.
3
All riders not holding a Licence issued by the ACU or SACU must carry proof of Insurance and
a written Start Permission document issued by their FMN.
Note: This includes all riders holding a licence issued by the MCUI.
1.3 EUROPEAN OPEN
1
The permit shall be issued by ACU Headquarters for a meeting inscribed on the Calendar of the
Fédération Internationale de Motocyclisme Europe (FIME) and having a European Meeting
Number (EMN).
2
A European Open meeting is open to Entrants and Riders of more than one European
nation who must hold the appropriate Competition Licence valid for the particular meeting
concerned.
3
All riders not holding a Licence issued by the ACU or SACU must carry proof of Insurance and
a written Start Permission document issued by their FMN.
Note: This includes all riders holding a licence issued by the MCUI.
1.4NATIONAL
1
The Permit shall be issued by the ACU Headquarters.
2
A National meeting is open to Entrants and Riders who are the holders of a National or
International Licence valid for the particular meeting concerned issued by any Federation.
3
All riders not holding a Licence issued by the ACU or SACU must carry proof of Insurance and
a written Start Permission document issued by their FMN.
Note: This includes all riders holding a licence issued by the MCUI.
1.5OPEN
1
An Open permit is issued by ACU Headquarters.
2
An Open meeting is open to Entrants and Riders who hold a valid ACU or SACU Licence for
the meeting concerned.
1.6RESTRICTED
1
A Restricted Permit is issued by ACU Headquarters.
2
A Restricted meeting is open to Entrants and Riders who hold a current ACU or SACU Licence
valid for the meeting concerned.
412
SCOOTER
3
The Supplementary Regulations issued for the event must specify all restrictions and
requirements of eligibility.
AUTO CYCLE UNION HANDBOOK 2015
1.7 ELIGIBILITY OF FOREIGN RIDERS IN OPEN AND RESTRICTED MEETINGS
1
The Supplementary Regulations issued for the event must specify the licence qualification and
eligibility requirements of foreign riders.
2
All riders must have a current Licence and Start Permission from their own Federation valid
for the event.
1.8PRACTICE MEETINGS AND TEST DAYS
1
Permits for Practice Meetings and Test Days may be issued on application to the Permit Issuing
Authority.
2
No such event may be held unless the appropriate Permit and Insurance has been issued.
1.9 CONDITIONS FOR ROAD RACE MEETINGS
1
The ACU Road Race Committee must approve the Organiser.
2
The Venue must hold a current Track Licence or Track Certificate issued by the ACU Road
Race Committee.
3
The ACU Secretariat must approve the Supplementary Regulations for the event and issue an
ACU Permit prior to publication and circulation.
4
For all ACU Championships an ACU decal, supplied by the ACU Secretariat, must be
displayed on the front number plate of each machine. Any rider not complying will be
disqualified from the results of the race.
1.10 FORCE MAJEURE
The Clerk of the Course has the right to alter, abandon, cancel or postpone all or any part of a
meeting for reasons of force majeure. Such a decision shall not be subject to any protest.
SECTION 2 LICENCE – COMPETITORS
2.1GENERAL
1
To participate in Scooter Road Race events an annual Licence issued by the ACU is required.
Residents in Scotland apply to the Scottish ACU.
2
First time applicants are required to complete a classroom based ACU Competitor Training
Course. Riders and Sidecar Drivers must also satisfactorily complete an ACU Basic Rider
Assessment. Full details from the ACU Road Race Department.
3
A Licence can be upgraded at any time during the year.
4
The parent or legal guardian must accompany all competitors, or participants in parades,
under 18 years of age to every meeting. This person must attend at signing-on and be present
throughout the meeting.
2.2GRADES
1
Clubman Entry level for all first-time Scooter Road Race Applicants.
2
National Clubman Competitors may apply to be upgraded to a National licence after
competing at 10 separate race days at 3 different venues during the current year and preceding
2 years. The competitor record card together with copies of the official result sheets pertaining
to the signatures on the record card should be submitted to the ACU Road Race Department.
Only one signature per day of competition is permitted
National Licence holders may apply for Start Permission to compete abroad.
SCOOTER
AUTO CYCLE UNION HANDBOOK 2015
413
2.3 LAPSED LICENCES
Licence holders who have allowed their licence to lapse for more than 5 years will be required to
complete the ACU Competitor Training Course, after which a Clubman licence may be issued.
2.4 CAPACITY AND LICENCE RESTRICTIONS
Up to 125cc Production automatic scooter
Up to 125cc Production based scooter
Unrestricted Scooter
Unrestricted Scooter
11yrs
12yrs
14yrs
15yrs
Clubman Licence
Clubman Licence
National Licence
Clubman Licence
SECTION 3 LICENCES AND REGISTRATIONS – OFFICIALS
3.1QUALIFICATIONS AND CONDITIONS
Road Race Officials are divided into two categories: Those that are Licensed and those that are
Registered.
Licences: Senior Road Race Officials are required to hold an ACU Licence of the appropriate Grade
for the performance of their duties.
Registration: A Register is maintained of Officials not required to hold a Licence.
3.2 ROAD RACE OFFICIALS WHO REQUIRE A LICENCE
All the following licences are valid for 3 years
Clerk of the Course
Chief Steward
Chief Technical Officer
Sound Inspector
Measurer
Timekeeper
See Note Below
1
2
3
4
5
Attendance at Seminar/Training Session
Every third year maximum
Every third year maximum
Every third year maximum
Required for First Issue only
Required for First Issue only
Equipment and operators check
Clubs and Centres shall only nominate candidates whose aptitude and integrity for the position they
can fully justify. Official ACU approval and the issue of a Licence is only after the candidates have
proved to be competent according to the special requirements for each discipline. The respective
Committees and Panels organize Seminars that are compulsory for certain Officials.
3.3 GRADES FOR CLERK OF THE COURSE
1
Probationary Any club may nominate a Probationary Clerk of the Course. Such a Registered
Official may act as an Assistant to a National C Clerk of the Course at a Closed to Club event.
To upgrade from Probationary to National C a registered official must act as an Assistant at 10
meetings and be recommended by the Clerk of the Course and must be nominated by a club
for a specific future event.
2
National Grade C A Clerk of the Course who may officiate at a Closed to Club event where the
use of slick tyres has NOT been authorised. May act as Deputy or Assistant Clerk of the Course
at National Restricted events and Closed to Club events where slick tyres have been authorised.
To upgrade from National C to National B a licence holder must officiate as Clerk of the
Course at 5 Closed to Club events. He must also officiate as a Deputy to a National B Clerk of
the Course at 5 events and be recommended by the Clerk of the Course at each. In addition
members of the Road Race, Drag and Sprint Committee may be appointed to observe him. A
Club must nominate him as being required to take charge of a specific future event.
3
National Grade B A Clerk of the Course who may offiiate at a National Restricted event or a
414
SCOOTER
AUTO CYCLE UNION HANDBOOK 2015
Closed to Club event where slick tyres HAVE been authorised. May officiate as Deputy to a
National Grade A.
To upgrade from National B to National A a Licence holder must officiate as a National B Clerk
of the Course at 5 events. He must act as Deputy to a National A Clerk of the Course at 5 events
and be recommended by the Clerk of the Course at each. In addition members of the Road
Race, Drag and Sprint Committee may be appointed to observe him. A club must nominate
him as being required to take charge of a specific future event
4
National Grade A A Clerk of the Course who may officiate at any event held under an ACU
Permit. May officiate as Deputy or Assistant at FIM (Non Championship) event.
Note 1 Clerk of the Course
Age Limits: Licences for Clerks of the Course who have attained their 70th birthday will be reviewed
annually. Officials will be required to satisfactorily attend a seminar annually. The issuing of a licence
will be subject to Road Race Committee approval.
Note 2 Chief Steward
Grades: There is only one grade of Steward’s Licence for all Road Race disciplines.
Age Limits: Stewards may not normally officiate beyond the end of the season in which they attain
their 70th birthday. The Road Race, Drag and Sprint Committee will review Stewards who reach the
age of 70 for appointments on an annual basis.
Note 3 Chief Technical Officer
The Chief Technical Officer will be licensed by the Technical Panel to be in charge of the Technical
Control at an event. The Technical Panel may restrict the disciplines of licence holders.
Note 4 Measurer
The Measurer is required for ACU National Championships and National events. The Licence is
issued by the Technical Panel and may be restricted by discipline.
Note 5 Timekeepers
Will be required to pay for their Licence.
Licence Fees: All licences (exception Timekeepers licences) will be issued, free of charge, for a period
of three years. No fee will be charged for attendance at Seminars organised by the Road Race Drag
and Sprint Committee or the relevant Panel with the exception of FIM Seminars.
3.4 ROAD RACE OFFICIALS WHO DO NOT REQUIRE A LICENCE
See Note Below Attendance at Seminar/Training Session
1 and 4
May attend Clerk of the Course Seminar at ACU HQ for
information purposes.
Secretary of the Meeting 2 and 4
Will receive Training at meetings and if required at Regional
or ACU HQ Seminars.
Technical Official
Will receive training via the Chief Technical Officer at
meetings. May attend Regional Training Seminars
Club Stewards
3
May attend Regional or ACU HQ Seminars for information
purposes
Chief Marshal
May receive training at ACU HQ or Regional Training Days
Marshal
May receive training at Regional Training days and at
meetings via the Chief Marshal.
Medical Officer
None required
Incident Officer
Registration of the above officials and marshals will be renewed annually. All such Officials will
receive an appropriate form of identification from the ACU.
Note 1 Incident Officer
Will collate all information and documentation, and prepare reports relating to serious accidents and
to all incidents involving Officials or Spectators.
AUTO CYCLE UNION HANDBOOK 2015
SCOOTER
415
Note: A Deputy Clerk of the Course may undertake these duties. An Incident Officer may be
nominated to attend a Clerk of the Course Seminar to assist with these duties.
Note 2 Secretary of the Meeting
Will be responsible for all administration connected with the organisation of a meeting.
Note 3 Club Stewards
Stewards of the meeting exercise judicial authority over the running of the meeting according to the
National Sporting Code and Supplementary Regulations.
Note 4 Incident Officer and Secretary of the Meeting Registration
Currently there is no requirement for these officials to be registered for Road Race Disciplines.
SECTION 4 PRACTICE
4.1TIME MUST BE PUT ASIDE FOR THE PRACTICE SESSIONS AND THESE MUST BE
DEFINED IN THE SUPPLEMENTARY REGULATIONS FOR THE MEETING.
1
Riders will commence practice under the instructions of the Start Officials.
2
The duration of each practice session will commence from the time the first rider joins the
circuit and will finish not less than 10 minutes later.
3
The end of practice will be indicated by the waving of a chequered flag at which time the pit exit
will be closed. A rider’s time will continue to be recorded until he passes the finish line after the
allotted time has lapsed.
4
If practice is interrupted due to an incident or any other reason then a red flag will be displayed
at the start line and at marshals posts. All riders must return slowly to the pit lane or as
otherwise instructed by the Marshals under the direction of the Clerk of the Course.
5
When the practice is restarted the time remaining will be decided by the Clerk of the Course.
SECTION 5 GRID POSITIONS
5.1POSITIONS
1
Pole position, and the configuration of the grid, will be determined at the time of the Track
Inspection.
2
Grid positions will be established according to the provisions of the Supplementary Regulations.
5.2 TIMED PRACTICE
Where timed practice is used and identical times are recorded by more than one rider in the official
qualifying practice session for the race the rider first setting such a time will receive the better starting
position.
A qualifying maxima may be specified in the Supplementary Regulations.
5.3BALLOTED
Where the Organiser decides that the grid positions will be by ballot this must be conducted by the
competitors at the meeting.
5.4ALLOCATED
Organisers wishing to allocate grid position will specify this and the method to be adopted in the
Supplementary Regulations.
SECTION 6 START PROCEDURES
Races may be started by one of the following methods:
6.1 GROUP STARTS
Which include the 45 degree echelon line up known as the Le Mans start.
416
SCOOTER
AUTO CYCLE UNION HANDBOOK 2015
6.2 INTERVAL STARTS
Where competitors are started individually or in groups at pre-determined intervals.
Starts may be made with engines running or engines stopped. For starts with engines stopped the
Supplementary Regulations for the race must specify the authorised method of starting.
6.3 CLUBMANS RACES
1
Riders collect in the Assembly Area and proceed when directed to the Grid to take up their
allocated Grid positions.
2
An Official will signal all the Riders to proceed on a warm-up lap (of the circuit being used for
the race) by waving a Green Flag. On completion of the warm-up lap the riders each return to
their allocated Grid positions.
3
Riders who do not go on to the Grid may join the warm-up lap from the Pit Lane on the
instruction of the Officials, but in this case must start the race from the back of the Grid.
4
On the completion of the warm-up lap an Official will display a Red Flag at the front of the
Grid.
5
When the grid is re-formed the Official with the Red Flag will leave the Grid indicating to the
Riders that the race is about to commence.
6
Any Rider who stalls his engine on the Grid, or who has other difficulties, must remain on
his motorcycle and raise an arm. It is not permitted to attempt to delay the start by any other
means.
7
A Red light will be displayed for up to 5 seconds. The Red Light will then be extinguished to
start the race. Alternatively, the National Flag may be lowered to start the race.
8
After the Riders have passed the exit of the Pit Lane any Riders waiting there may be permitted
to join the race at the discretion of the Clerk of the Course and under the instructions of the
Officials.
9
Should there be a problem on the Grid, the Starter may display a Yellow Flag or Yellow lights
to indicate a delayed start. The Clerk of the Course may decide that the Riders will complete
another warm-up lap and the race distance may be reduced.
6.4 NATIONAL RACES
1
Riders proceed as directed to the Grid upon the opening of the Pit Lane and take up their
starting positions.
2
Riders take up their allocated positions on the Grid. Riders who encounter technical problems
must go to the Pit Lane to make adjustments or to change machines.
3
Two minutes before the start of the race the Starter will signal all the Riders to proceed on a
warm-up lap by waving a Green Flag. On completion of the warm-up lap the riders each return
to their allocated Grid positions.
4
Riders not going on to the Grid may join the warm-up lap from the Pit Lane on the instructions
of the Officials but in this case must start the race from the rear of the Grid.
5
On completion of the warm-up lap an Official will display a Red Flag at the front of the grid.
6
When the Grid is re-formed the Official with the Red Flag will leave the track indicating to the
Riders that the race is about to commence.
7
Any Rider who stalls his engine on the Grid or who has other difficulties must remain on his
motorcycle and raise an arm. It is not permitted to delay the start by any other means.
8
A Red Signal light will be displayed for up to 5 seconds. The Red Light will then be extinguished
to start the race. Alternatively, the National Flag may be lowered to start the race.
9
After the Riders have passed the exit to the Pit lane any Riders waiting there may be permitted
to join the race at the discretion of the Clerk of the Course and under the instructions of the
Officials.
10 Should there be a problem on the Grid, the Starter may display a Yellow Flag or Yellow lights
to indicate a delayed start. Riders will stop engines. One assistant per team may enter the grid
AUTO CYCLE UNION HANDBOOK 2015
SCOOTER
417
to assist the competitors. The Rider(s) responsible for the delay will start from the back of the
Grid. The Riders will complete another warm-up lap and the race distance will be reduced by
one lap.
6.5 ANTICIPATION OF THE START
1
Anticipation of the Start is defined as when the motorcycle is moving forward when the Red
Lights are on.
2
Any Competitor who takes up an incorrect Grid position will be judged to have anticipated the
Start.
3
The Clerk of the Course will award a Time Penalty of up to 20 seconds to any Rider who
anticipated the Start. The decision as to an anticipated Start is to be accepted as a Matter of Fact
from which there is no right of Protest.
SECTION 7 FLAGS AND LIGHTS
Marshals and other officials display flags or lights to provide information and/or convey instructions
to the riders:
7.1 FLAGS AND LIGHTS USED TO PROVIDE INFORMATION
1
1
NATIONAL FLAG OR START LIGHTS
Signal for the Start of the Race. A Red light will be displayed for up to 5 seconds. The Red Light
will then be extinguished to start the race. Alternatively, the National Flag may be lowered to
start the race.
2
1
2
3
GREEN FLAG
The track is clear
This flag will be shown waved by the starter to signal the start of the warm up lap.
This flag must be shown motionless at each flag marshal post for the first lap of each practice
session and of the warm up, for the sighting lap(s) and for the warm up lap.
This flag must be shown motionless at the flag marshal post immediately after the incident that
necessitated the use of one or more yellow flags.
4
3
1
2
YELLOW AND RED STRIPED FLAG
Oil, water or other substance is affecting adhesion on this section of the track.
This flag must be shown motionless at the flag marshal post.
4
1
2
YELLOW AND RED STRIPED FLAG: NATIONAL EVENTS ONLY
The adhesion on this section of the track could be affected by any reason other than rain.
This flag must be shown motionless at the flag marshal post.
5
1
2
WHITE FLAG WITH DIAGONAL RED CROSS: NATIONAL EVENTS ONLY
Drops of rain on this section of the track.
This flag must be shown motionless at the flag marshal post.
6WHITE FLAG WITH DIAGONAL RED CROSS + YELLOW AND RED STRIPED FLAG:
NATIONAL EVENTS ONLY
1
Rain on this section of the track.
2
These flags must be shown together motionless at the flag marshal post.
7
1
BLUE FLAG
National events and above. Not mandatory at Club level events
418
SCOOTER
2
3
May be shown waved, this flag indicates that a faster rider is about to overtake.
The use of this flag is optional at meetings of lower than National Status. Shown waved at the
flag marshal post, this flag indicates to a rider that he is about to be overtaken.
During the practice sessions, the rider concerned must keep his line and slow down gradually
to allow the faster rider to pass him.
During the race, the rider concerned is about to be lapped. He must allow the following rider(s)
to pass him at the earliest opportunity.
4
5
AUTO CYCLE UNION HANDBOOK 2015
8
1
YELLOW FLAG WITH BLACK DIAGONAL CROSS
This flag will be shown motionless at the finish line at track level to indicate the commencement
of the final lap of the race.
9
1
CHEQUERED BLACK AND WHITE FLAG
This flag will be waved at the finish line on track level to indicate the finish of race or practice
session.
10
1
CHEQUERED BLACK AND WHITE FLAG PLUS BLUE FLAG
The chequered black/white flag will be waved together with the blue flag presented motionless
at the finish line on track level when a rider(s) precedes closely the leader during the final lap
before the finish line.
7.2 FLAGS USED TO CONVEY INFORMATION AND INSTRUCTIONS
1
1
YELLOW FLAG AND OR YELLOW LIGHTS
Shown waved at each row of the starting grid, this flag indicates that the start of the race is
delayed.
2
When shown stationary at the flag marshal post this flag indicates danger ahead, riders must
slow down.
No overtaking is permitted
3
When shown waved at the flag marshal post this flag indicates that the danger is more
imminent. The riders must be prepared to stop.
4
Overtaking is forbidden up until the point where the green flag is shown.
5
Any Infringement of this rule during a practice session will result in the cancellation of the time
of the lap during which the infraction occurred.
6
In case of infringement of this rule during the race, a time penalty will be imposed. In both
cases, further penalties (such as fine – suspension) may also be imposed.
7
During the final inspection lap (by the Stewards and other Officials) this flag must be waved at
the exact place where the flag marshal will be positioned during the practices, warm ups and
races.
Note: Following an incident during a practice or race the Yellow Flags are usually displayed as
follows:
1
Shown waved at the flag marshals’ post immediately prior to the incident.
2
Shown stationary at the flag marshals’ post preceding the post at which it is being shown
waved.
3
Additional flags may be shown at the request of the Clerk of the Course.
2
1
2
3
WHITE FLAG
National events only. Not permitted at Club level.
An intervention vehicle is on the track.
Waved at the flag marshal post, this flag indicates that the rider will encounter the vehicle in the
current section of the track.
AUTO CYCLE UNION HANDBOOK 2015
SCOOTER
419
4
5
6
It is forbidden for a rider to overtake another rider during the display of the white flag.
Overtaking the intervention vehicle is permitted.
As soon as such a vehicle stops on the track, the white flags must be maintained and the yellow
flags must also be presented.
Note: At a meeting of below National status no Ambulance or Fast Intervention Vehicle will be
allowed to be moved onto the course or its immediate verges whilst racing or practice is in progress
on any part of the circuit. This means that in circumstances when an Ambulance or Fast Intervention
Vehicle is required on the circuit, the Red Flags must first be displayed and the race or practice
brought to an actual and effective halt before any vehicle is deployed.
3
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
RED FLAG WITH A WHITE DIAGONAL CROSS. ENDURANCE RACES ONLY.
The race is neutralised.
Riders must slow down and be prepared to catch up a SAFETY CAR
It is forbidden for a rider to overtake another rider during the display of this flag.
Overtaking the SAFETY CAR is forbidden.
Riders must line-up in single file behind the Safety Car.
This flag must be shown motionless at each flag marshal post,
At all meetings where this flag is used a riders briefing must be held.
4
1
RED FLAG AND RED LIGHTS
When the race or practice is being interrupted, the red flag will be waved at each flag marshal’s
post. Riders must return slowly to the pits or as directed by the Marshals.
Any infringement of this rule will be penalised with one of the following penalties: fine –
disqualification – withdrawal of Championship points – suspension.
The red flag will be shown motionless on the starting grid at the end of the sighting lap(s) and
at the end of the warm up lap.
The red flag may also be used to close the track.
The red lights will be switched on at the start line for up to 5 seconds to start each race.
2
3
4
5
5
1
2
3
6
1
2
3
BLACK FLAG
This flag is used to convey instructions to one rider only and is displayed motionless together
with the rider’s number.
The rider must stop at the pits at the end of the current lap and cannot restart.
Any infringement of this rule will be penalised with one or more of the following penalties:
fine – disqualification – withdrawal of Championship points – suspension.
BLACK FLAG WITH ORANGE DISK (RADIUS 40 CM)
This flag is used to convey instructions to one rider only and is displayed motionless together
with the rider’s number.
This flag informs the rider that his motorcycle has mechanical problems likely to endanger
himself or others, and that he must immediately leave the track.
Any infringement of this rule will be penalised with one or more of the following penalties:
fine – disqualification – withdrawal of Championship points – suspension.
7.3 FLAG DIMENSIONS
The flag dimension should be approximately 80cms in the vertical and 100cms in the horizontal.
7.4 FLAG COLOURS
The Pantones for the colours are as follows:
Orange: Pantone 151C
Black:
Pantone Black C
420
SCOOTER
Blue:
Red:
Yellow:
Green:
AUTO CYCLE UNION HANDBOOK 2015
Pantone 286C or 298C
Pantone 186C
Pantone Yellow C
Pantone 348C
7.5 FLAG MARSHALS’ POSTS
The position of the Flag Marshals’ Posts will be fixed during the ACU Track Inspection.
7.6 MARSHALS’ OVERALLS
It is recommended that Marshals’ overalls be Orange (pantone 151C) or white in colour.
Waterproofs should be of the same colour or transparent.
SECTION 8 BEHAVIOUR DURING PRACTICE AND RACE
8.1RIDERS MUST OBEY THE FLAG SIGNALS, THE LIGHT SIGNALS, AND THE BOARDS
WHICH CONVEY INSTRUCTIONS. ANY INFRINGEMENT TO THIS RULE WILL BE
PENALISED ACCORDING TO THE PROVISIONS OF SECTION 7.
1
Riders must ride in a responsible manner which does not cause danger to other competitors
or participants, either on the track or in the pit-lane. Any infringement of this rule will
be penalised with one of the following penalties: fine – time penalty – disqualification –
withdrawal of Championship points – suspension.
2
Riders should use only the track and the pit-lane. However, if a rider accidentally leaves the track
then he may rejoin it at the place indicated by the marshals or at a place which does not provide
an advantage to him. Any infringement of this rule during the practices or warm up will be
penalised by the cancellation of the lap time concerned and during the race, by a time penalty.
Further penalties (such as fine – disqualification – withdrawal of Championship points) may
also be imposed.
3
Any repairs or adjustments along the race track must be made by the rider working alone with
absolutely no outside assistance. The marshals may assist the rider to the extent of helping him
to lift the machine and holding it whilst any repairs or adjustments are made.
The marshal may then assist him to re-start the machine.
4
If the rider intends to retire, then he must park his motorcycle in a safe area as indicated by the
marshals.
5
If the rider encounters a problem with the machine which will result in his retirement from the
practice or the race, then he should not attempt to tour at reduced speed to the pits but should
pull off the track and park his machine in a safe place as indicated by the marshals.
6
Riders are not permitted to return slowly to the pits for any reason during practice or racing.
7
Riders may enter the pits during the race, but taking the motorcycle inside the pit box is not
permitted. Any infringement of this rule will be penalised with a disqualification.
Riders who stop their engines in the pits may be assisted to re-start their motorcycle by the
mechanics.
8
Riders are not allowed to transport another person on their machine or to be transported by
another rider on his machine.
9
Riders must adopt a position with their feet on the footrests.
10 Riders who fall from their machine are not permitted to continue with the practice or race until
passed fit by the Medical Officer and the machine re-inspected by technical control.
11 Riders must not ride or push their motorcycles in the opposite direction of the circuit, either on
the track or in the pit lane, unless doing so under the direction of an Official.
12 No signal of any kind may pass between a moving motorcycle and anyone connected with the
motorcycle’s entrant or rider, save for the signal from the time keeping transponder, or legible
messages on a pit board or body movements by the rider.
AUTO CYCLE UNION HANDBOOK 2015
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
SCOOTER
421
Automatic timing devices, provided they do not disrupt official timekeeping methods, are not
considered as telemetry.
The carrying of on board cameras is only permitted with the prior approval, in writing of the
Clerk of the Course. The installation of the camera must be approved by the Chief Technical
Officer.
A speed limit may be imposed in the Pit Lane
1. Any rider found to have exceeded the limit during the practice will be subject to a penalty as
described in the Supplementary Regulations.
2. Any rider who exceeds the pit lane speed limit during a race will be penalised with a time
penalty as described in the Supplementary Regulations.
3. The Clerk of the Course must communicate the offence to the pit of the rider.
In the interest of safety, a rider may not stop his machine on the racing surface during the slow
down lap, (exception see Art 8.17) when returning to the pits after the chequered flag.
Stopping on the track during practices and races is forbidden. (exception see Art 8.17)
During the practice sessions and warm ups, practice starts are permitted, when it is safe to do
so, at the pit lane exit before joining the track and after the chequered flag is shown at the end
of practice sessions and warm ups, when it is safe to do so. These practice starts must take place
off the racing line.
The spinning of rear wheels (burn-outs) is strictly forbidden. Breach of this rule will result in a
penalty of disqualification.
Any competitor who in any ACU or MCRCB Permitted Event participates on a machine for
which he is not eligible through age or licence restrictions will be penalised by a fine of £500.00
and a suspension for one year from the date of the hearing.
8.2PROTESTS
1
Any Rider, Passenger, Entrant or Official licenced by the ACU affected by a decision taken
during a meeting held under an ACU Permit has the right to protest against that decision.
2
No protest may be lodged against a decision of statement of fact of the Race Direction to inflict
or not:
– A time penalty
– A change of position
– A ride through
– A disqualification from the practice sessions or races by means of a black flag or black flag
with orange disc.
– A fine for speeding in the pit lane.
SECTION 9 NEUTRALISATION OF RACES – SAFETY CAR
A compulsory riders briefing on these Regulations must be conducted by the Clerk of the Course
or his Deputy prior to any race in which the use of Safety Cars is intended. The Safety Cars if they
are to go on the track must be equipped with Yellow Flashing lights. The words “Safety Car” should
be clearly indicated on the back and the sides of the car. The Driver of the Safety Car should be the
holder of an ACU or FIM Clerk of the Course or Competition Licence for Road Racing, a MSA
Competition Licence or an ARDS Licence. All “Safety Car” drivers must be assisted in the car by a
Race Official who is in constant contact with the Clerk of the Course.
If during a race of 20 miles or more an incident other than rain puts at risk the safety of the
competitors and renders impossible the normal progress of the competition the Clerk of the Course
(Grade National A or above or of Grade National B with the prior individual approval of the Road
Race Committee) may decide to neutralize the race.
The following procedure will be adopted:
1
A Red Flag with a White Diagonal Cross must be displayed at the selected Marshals Posts
during the whole of the neutralisation period.
422
SCOOTER
2
A White Board showing the words “Safety Car” will be displayed at the Start Line during the
whole of the neutralisation period.
Riders must immediately slow down. Overtaking is forbidden. The Track Marshals will record
all infringements and report them to the Clerk of the Course.
The pit lane exit will be closed to competitors.
When the leading competitor approaches the start line at the end of the lap that the
neutralisation was decided a “Safety Car” equipped with two flashing Yellow Lights on the roof
will enter the track with two flashing lights switched on.
The competitors will end up in single file behind the “Safety Car” without overtaking it.
Competitors may now enter the pits but all other rules must be complied with.
After stopping at the pits competitors must line up at the pit lane exit and must only rejoin
the circuit when instructed to do so by the official with a Green Flag or when the Green
Light at that location is switched on. These instructions will be given 10 seconds after the last
competitor in line behind the “Safety Car” has passed that point. Competitors must join the
back of the line and MUST NOT overtake. The pit lane exit will then be closed and competitors
must wait for the next lap.
During the last lap of the neutralisation period the “Safety Car” will switch off the Lights on the
roof to indicate to the competitors that the “Safety Car” will enter the pit lane at the end of that
lap and the race will resume.
When the “Safety Car” has left the track overtaking is forbidden up until the start line, where
a Green Flag will be waved and the Red Flag with a White Diagonal Cross immediately
withdrawn.
The pit lane exit will then be permanently re-opened.
The race will continue normally.
Unless otherwise decided by the Clerk of the Course, each lap completed by the “Safety Car”
will be counted as a race lap. A Board displaying the new actual number of laps remaining will
be displayed on the start line when the green flag is waved. If the race is eventually stopped
under SR 9.1 whilst the “Safety Car” is deployed the result will be according to the position at
the last completed lap before the “Safety Car” was introduced.
No Protest may be lodged against the decision of the Clerk of the Course regarding the number
of laps remaining in order to complete the race.
All other rules of the race must be observed.
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
AUTO CYCLE UNION HANDBOOK 2015
SECTION 10 INTERRUPTION OF A RACE
10.1IF THE CLERK OF THE COURSE DECIDES TO INTERRUPT A RACE DUE TO CLIMATIC
CONDITIONS OR SOME OTHER REASON, THEN RED FLAGS WILL BE DISPLAYED AT
THE FINISH LINE AND AT ALL FLAG MARSHALS’ POSTS.
1
Riders must immediately slow down and return to the pit lane, or as directed by the marshals
upon instructions from the Clerk of the Course.
2
Only riders still racing when the red flag is displayed will be counted as finishers.
3
The results will be the results taken at the last point where the leader had completed a full
lap without the red flag being displayed calculated as in the principle set out in the following
example:
Example of a race consisting of 30 laps:
If a Red Flag is shown when the leader is on his 10th lap after completing his 9th lap and all
other riders have not completed the 9th lap, then the race result will be 9 laps completed, and
the second part will consist of 21 laps.
Exception: if the race is interrupted after the chequered flag, the following procedure will apply:
4
For all the riders to whom the chequered flag was shown before the interruption, a partial
classification will be established at the end of the last lap of the race.
AUTO CYCLE UNION HANDBOOK 2015
5
6
7
8
9
10
SCOOTER
423
For all the riders to whom the chequered flag was not shown before the interruption, a partial
classification will be established at the end of the penultimate lap of the race.
The complete classification will be established by combining both partial classifications as per
the lap/time procedure.
If the results calculated show that less than three laps have been completed by the leader of the
race and by all other riders on the same lap as the leader, then the race will be null and void and
a completely new race will be run. If it is found impossible to re-start the race, then it will be
declared cancelled and the race will not count for any Championship.
If three laps or more have been completed by the leader of the race, and all other riders on
the same lap as the leader, but less than two-thirds of the original race distance, rounded
down to the nearest whole number of laps, then the race will be restarted. If it is found
impossible to restart the race, then the results will count and half points will be awarded in any
Championship.
If the results calculated show that two-thirds of the original race distance rounded down to the
nearest whole number of laps have been completed by the leader of the race, then the race will
be deemed to have been completed and full Championship points will be awarded.
Exception: Where a race is interrupted at a meeting of below National Status the Clerk of the
Course is permitted to decide that the race has been completed or to run a new race over a
distance appropriate to the prevailing conditions.
SECTION 11 RE-STARTING A RACE THAT HAS BEEN INTERRUPTED
11.1IF A RACE HAS TO BE RE-STARTED, THEN IT WILL BE DONE AS QUICKLY AS
POSSIBLE, CONSISTENT WITH TRACK CONDITIONS ALLOWING. AS SOON AS THE
RIDERS HAVE RETURNED TO THE PITS THE CLERK OF THE COURSE WILL ANNOUNCE
A TIME FOR THE NEW START PROCEDURE TO BEGIN WHICH, CONDITIONS
PERMITTING, SHOULD NOT BE LATER THAN 10 MINUTES AFTER THE INITIAL
DISPLAY OF THE RED FLAG.
1
The results of the first race must be available to the riders before the second part of a race can
be started.
2
The start procedure will be identical to a normal start with sighting lap(s), warm-up lap etc.
3
Conditions for the re-started race will be as follows:
1. In the case of the situation described in Article 10.7 above (less than 3 laps completed) All
riders may re-start.
2. Motorcycles may be repaired or changed. Refuelling is permitted.
3. The number of laps will be the same as the original race.
4. The grid positions will be as for the original race.
4
In the case of situation described in Article 10.8 above (3 laps or more and less than two-thirds
completed)
1. Only riders who are classified as finishers in the first race may re-start. Article 12.3.
2. Motorcycles may be repaired or changed. Re-fuelling is permitted.
3. The number of laps of the second race will be the number of laps required to complete the
original race distance with a minimum of 5 laps.
4. The grid position will be based on the finishing order of the first race.
5. The final race classification will be established according to the position and the number of
laps of each rider at the time he crossed the finish line at the end of the last part of the race.
5
Exception: Provisions of Article 10.10 may apply according to the status of the meeting. (The
discretion of the Clerk of the Course to decide at meetings of lower than National status.)
424
SCOOTER
AUTO CYCLE UNION HANDBOOK 2015
SECTION 12 FINISH OF A RACE AND RACE RESULTS
12.1 FINISH OF A RACE
1
When the leading rider has completed the designated number of laps (or the designated time in
the case of Endurance) for the race, a Chequered Flag will be displayed at the finishing line.
12.2THE CHEQUERED FLAG WILL CONTINUE TO BE DISPLAYED TO THE SUBSEQUENT
RIDERS.
1
After the Chequered Flag is displayed to the leading Rider no other Rider is permitted to enter
the track from the Pit Lane.
2
If a Rider closely precedes the leader during the final lap before the finish line the Official
will show to the Riders and to the Leaders simultaneously the Chequered Flag and the Blue
Flag. This will indicate to the Leader that he has completed the race and to the Rider closely
preceding the Leader that he still has to complete the final lap.
3
In the case of a photo finish between two or more Riders the decision shall be taken in favour
of the Rider whose Front Wheel leading edge crossed the finish line first. In the case of Ties, the
Riders concerned will be ranked according to the best lap times they achieved in the race.
4
The Clerk of the Course may require machines to be presented for post Practice or Race
verification. Where this is required the Riders must be informed prior to the start of the
Practice or Race that they must attend the “Parc Ferme”.
12.3 RACE RESULTS
1
When the Race has been completed as described above the Results will be based on the order in
which the Riders crossed the finish line and the number of laps that they have completed.
2
When the Race has been declared completed by the Clerk of the Course following an
Interruption under Article 10.3, the result will be established according to the procedure
described in Articles 10.4–10.6 for a race interrupted after the Chequered Flag.
3
In either of the cases described in 1) and 2) above. To be counted as a Finisher and be included
in the results a Rider must have completed 75% of the actual race distance. He must also have
crossed the finish line on the track and not in the Pit Lane within two minutes after the winner
and be in contact with his machine.
4
A new Lap record can only be established during a race.
5
Both for the Practice and for the Race, the lap time is the subtraction of the time between two
consecutive crossings of the finish line.
SCOOTER
AUTO CYCLE UNION HANDBOOK 2015
425
SECTION 13 SAFETY
13.1 MEDICAL SERVICES – MINIMUM REQUIREMENTS FOR ROAD RACE MEETINGS
Road race
Road race
Test day
PERSONNEL
Doctors Paramedic(s) First Aid Ambulance(s)
MO
PM
personnel
2 MOs PMs can assist
5
2
MOs but not
replace them
1 MO
1 PM
2
1
VEHICLES
Fast Intervention
Vehicle
1
Special
Notes
(i)
1
The following applies to all events run under this code:
1
Medical Officer (MO) – Doctor A medical practitioner (Doctor) fully registered with the
General Medical Council (GMC), and holding appropriate personal medical malpractice
insurance cover (excludes NHS Crown Indemnity).
2
Paramedic (PM) A State Registered Paramedic with the HPC (Health Professions Council)
Paramedics must have appropriate personal medical malpractice insurance cover.
3
Ambulance A vehicle registered as an ambulance with the DVLA (Driver and Vehicle
Licencing Agency) or similar government licencing authority and complying with FIM
minimum equipment regulations for a type C vehicle; that is:
Medical: A stretcher (preferably standardised), oxygen supply, apparatus to immobilise limbs
and vertebral column. First aid medicaments and materials.
Technical: Radio communication. Visible and audible signals.
Staffing: An ambulance must be staffed by two First Aid Personnel (who can be the two
minimum First Aid Personnel).
An ambulance may act as a Medical Centre BUT if so it must be a vehicle in addition to the
minimum ambulance requirement.
4
First Aid Personnel A person holding a current certificate of First Aid competency. (Where
an event is open to the public event organisers should ensure that all First Aid personnel are
insured against malpractice for the event concerned).
5
Fast Intervention Vehicle (FIV)
1. A Fast Intervention Vehicle is a compulsory requirement at all Road Race events.
2. Such a vehicle requires a driver, a Doctor, and appropriate medical equipment. If the driver
is not a First Aid Person, then such a Person must be present in the vehicle. This vehicle must
be immediately available to proceed to an incident, if called to do so, upon instructions from
the Clerk of the Course.
3. A FIV must not be used in place of an ambulance.
4. A Fast Intervention Vehicle must be equipped with visible signals (flashing lights).
5. At a meeting of below National status no ambulance or Fast Intervention Vehicle is allowed
to be moved onto the course or its immediate verges whilst racing or practice is in progress
on any part of the circuit. This means that in the circumstances when an Ambulance or Fast
Intervention Vehicle is required on the circuit, the Red Flags must first be displayed and the
race or practice brought to an actual and effective halt before the vehicle is deployed.
Note: This restriction is not applicable where the Clerk of the Course has decided to neutralise
the race by use of the Safety Car in accordance with the provisions of Section 9 of the Road
Race Regulations.
6. During Sighting Lap: Stationary or moving Ambulances, Fast Intervention Vehicles, and
the like, may be encountered anywhere on the circuit when riders are dispatched from the
Assembly Area on their “sighting lap” to the start line prior to the start of a race. This “sighting
426
6
SCOOTER
AUTO CYCLE UNION HANDBOOK 2015
lap” is not considered to be either Practice or Racing and riders must always be prepared to
encounter such vehicles. When such a vehicle or vehicles are on the track the Yellow Flags will
be displayed in the appropriate section of the course.
Special Notes
2 MOs must be present at the start of every meeting and be present for the duration of the
meeting unless accompanying a patient to hospital. If vehicles or First Aid personnel leave
the circuit to convey a patient to hospital then the minimum requirements for the event to
continue are 1 MO, 1 FIV, 2 Ambulances and 4 First Aid personnel.
Medical Examination At any time during a meeting the Clerk of the Course may require
a competitor to undergo a medical examination to determine his fitness to participate. The
decision of the Medical Officer is a matter of fact without right of protest.
13.2 TRACK SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
1
The safety precautions of circuits will be as laid down for each Permanent Course Licence or
Temporary Course Certificate following an inspection of the course.
2
It should be generally realised that the organisers of speed events have a legal responsibility to
the general public and therefore it is the duty of these organisers to ensure that all reasonable
precautions are taken to protect the public.
3
Whilst organising Clubs are insured under the Promoter’s Third Party Policy in respect of their
legal liability, it is a condition of the policy that the promoters of an event must comply strictly
with the National Sporting Code and any additional requirements as may be specified by the
Permanent Course Licence or Temporary Course Certificate.
Clubs failing to do so stand in grave danger of any claims being repudiated to the Club by the
insurers under the terms of the policy covering legal liability.
4
The safety precautions to be adopted are provided with the Permanent Course Licence or
Temporary Course Certificate for the particular course but the following general requirements
must be observed.
5
The attention of organisers is drawn to the provision of the NSC which stipulates that no
alteration of the requirements contained in the Permanent Course Licence or Temporary
Course Certificate shall be made without the prior approval, in writing, of the ACU.
6
It is recognised that circumstances may arise in which it is necessary to make certain alterations
to the course on the day of the meeting but any such alterations must be approved by the
Stewards of the Meeting and details given in their report to the permit issuing authority.
13.3 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS
Each working vehicle in the Paddock must have a 2kg (minimum) dry powder fire extinguisher
available for immediate use. This extinguisher must show the date of the last annual inspection.
Noncompliance with this regulation will incur a penalty imposed by the Clerk of the Course.
13.4 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS AT CIRCUITS
At all race and speed events, there must be a valid certificate, issued annually immediately prior to the
start of each season’s racing by the manufacturer or his agent, to the effect that all fire extinguishers
are in effective working order. This certificate must be available for inspection by the Stewards.
All fire posts must be clearly marked. In addition to the fire equipment at each post there must be:
1
Fire extinguishers in the paddock and assembly area.
2
At least two fire extinguishers in the Technical Control Area.
3
Fire extinguishers in every medical room/centre.
4
During events of National status or below where machines may be refueled and more than five
gallons (22 litres) of fuel is held in any one pit, there shall be a minimum of one fire tender and
crew in attendance, appropriately equipped and with immediate access to the pit area.
International events must comply with appropriate FIM requirements.
AUTO CYCLE UNION HANDBOOK 2015
SCOOTER
427
13.5 WARNING AND PROHIBITION SIGNS AT CIRCUITS
For full details regarding Warning Notices and Prohibition Notices please refer to the Safety
Precautions section of this Handbook.
1
WARNING NOTICES
The following requirements regarding the display of Warning notices are applicable to all Road
Racing events.
1
WARNING NOTICE (A) (29 × 20 inches.) Warning notices as detailed below must be
displayed on each side of every entrance to the course, including the entrance to car parks and
paddock.
These notices must be prominently displayed where they can be easily read by the public before
any admission charge is paid, or where no admission charge is made before entry is gained into
the circuit.
Where it is not possible to define the limits of the site and to control admission of the public
(e.g.M.O.D Land and heath land) warning notices must be profusely displayed around the
course and also in the car parks.
2
WARNING NOTICE (B) (20 × 15 inches.) Those parts of the course to which the public may
be admitted and where it is neither practical nor necessary to erect a barrier, e.g. those parts of
the course which are straight and are only used by the public to reach other parts of the course,
may be indicated by the erection of the special type of Warning Notice (B). These notices
should be displayed at least 30ft from the course. It is recommended that the limit of these areas
should also be defined by a boundary tape.
2
PROHIBITION NOTICES
The following requirements regarding the display of Prohibition notices are applicable to all Road
Racing events.
PROHIBITED AREA NOTICE (C) (29 × 20 inches.) Areas where the public are not permitted must
be clearly defined by the display of an adequate number of “Prohibited Area” notices (B).
Notices should be displayed within the prohibited area, facing the public.
13.6 DECLARATION – ADMISSION TICKETS, ARMBANDS AND PASSES
Subject to the provision of the Sunday Observance Act 1780, no person may be allowed to any part
of the circuit without a suitable pass or ticket. All tickets and passes must bear the following wording
shown below in full and if the wording appears on the reverse side then the words “For Conditions
of Admission See Over” must be clearly printed on the face thereof. Where a ticket is cancelled by
being torn in half, the full wording and, where applicable, the “For conditions of admission see over”
must appear on each half. Where a charge is made for admission into special or “reserved” enclosures
a ticket bearing the approved declaration must be issued in exchange for payment to enter these
enclosures.
Declaration.
WARNING. MOTOR SPORT CAN BE DANGEROUS. Despite the organisers taking all reasonable
precautions, unavoidable accidents can happen. Please comply with all instructions of marshals and
notices and remain in permitted areas only. THEY ARE CONCERNED WITH YOUR SAFETY.
All vehicle passes must bear the same wording and comply with the above requirements.
13.7 DECLARATION ON THE OFFICIAL PROGRAMME
The declaration as outlined above should be printed in full on the outside front cover of all Official
Programmes. Where this is not possible it must be printed in full in the programme and the words
“For conditions of admission see inside” printed on the outside cover.
428
SCOOTER
AUTO CYCLE UNION HANDBOOK 2015
13.8 SIGNING ON
All riders, passengers, officials and press must sign a declaration on the relevant signing on form
(available from the ACU).
1
Age Limits for Officials
All event Executive and Administrative Officials shall be 18 years of age or over.
2
Age Limits for Marshals
1. All Assistant Officials whose function is to be carried out at the immediate trackside must be
at least 16 years of age.
2. All Assistant Officials who are under 18 years of age must have obtained parental agreement
to carry out the duty and the signing-on signature must be countersigned by the person
responsible for the official at the event.
3. When using the services of officials under 18 years of age for any duties at any event special
attention must be given to any risks which may be associated with the duty, and to the previous
experience of the official.
SECTION 14 GENERAL TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
14.1PROTECTIVE CLOTHING
During practice and racing riders and passengers must wear the following clothing and footwear:
1
A complete all in one leather suit of at least 1.2mm in thickness on all parts of the suit. Suits
zipped together at the waist are not permitted. Non-leather material may be used if it meets
with the following requirements.
2
The following characteristics of the material must be at least equivalent to 1.5mm of cowhide
(not split leather)
Fire retardant quality – Resistance to abrasion – Coefficient of friction against all types of
asphalt – perspiration absorbing qualities – Medical test – non toxic and non allergenic –
Fabric of a quality that does not melt. It must be non-flammable.
3
The following areas must be padded with at least a double layer of leather or enclosed plastic
foam at least 8mm thick:
Shoulders, elbows, both sides of the torso and hip joint, the back of the torso, knees.
4
Competitors must wear complete undergarments if they use suits which are not lined. Suitable
undergarments may be of the Nomex type, they may also be of silk or simply cotton. Synthetic
materials which may melt and which could harm the riders skin in an accident are not allowed,
neither for the suit nor for the undergarments.
5
Competitors footwear must be of leather or an approved substitute material and of a minimum
height of 200mm to provide, with the suit, complete protection (i.e. no exposed areas.)
6
Competitors must wear leather protective gloves.
7
The use of metallic material in any item of clothing or personal protection which regularly
comes into contact with the track is prohibited (i.e. metal studs in knee sliders, boots etc.).
14.2HELMETS
Helmets bearing the current ACU gold stamp and in sound condition and properly fitted must be
worn by all riders and passengers while practising and racing. Overseas riders may use helmets as
approved by their own FMN.
14.3 IDENTIFICATION DISCS
While practising and racing, riders and passengers are required to wear an identification disc around
the neck, attached by a material approved by the technical officer. Thin chains should be avoided. The
disc must be permanently marked with the wearer’s full name and date of birth.
Identification discs shall be of a durable material, circular in shape, between 20mm and 25mm in
diameter and having rounded edges with no sharp or ragged projections.
AUTO CYCLE UNION HANDBOOK 2015
SCOOTER
429
14.4 BODY JEWELLERY
It is recommended that any body piercing studs, ring etc. are removed.
SECTION 15 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR
SOLO MOTORSCOOTERS
15.1INTRODUCTION
These Regulations specify the requirements for construction of Solo Motor scooters for use in Road
Races, Sprints and Hill Climbs.
15.2GENERAL
For the purposes of these Regulations and any events for which they are applicable, SOLO
MOTORSCOOTERS are divided into TWO categories – “Standard Class Machines” and “Special
Scooters”.
The regulations detailed below are applicable to ALL Solo Motor scooters except where they
specifically state For Standard Class Machines or For Special Scooters when they shall apply only to
the appropriate category of Solo Motor scooter.
15.3DEFINITIONS
Except as specially authorised by the ACU, a Solo Motor scooter is a two wheeled motor vehicle on
which the driver may sit on a seat and have free and open space in front of the seat for passage of his
legs, with the following additional characteristics:
1
The minimum size of the space forward of the seat must be a regular or irregular trapezium
with its top measuring 250mm along a line projected forward from the top of the seat parallel
with a line drawn through the centres of the two road wheels and measured from the front
extremity of the seat towards the steering column. Its depth vertically downwards must not
be less than 250mm and its base not less than 100mm. The minimum space must be clear
at all times of any obstruction of a permanent or temporary nature except where any such
obstruction was fitted as manufacturer’s original equipment (e.g. Vespa 90SS).
2
It shall have been manufactured by a manufacturer recognised by the ACU and not less than
one hundred machines of that type equipped with the manufacturer’s original or optional
equipment must have been made and sold in the U.K. An Accountant’s Certificate may be
required as proof.
3
In cases of doubt the matter shall be referred to the Technical Committee.
15.4
1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
FRAME AND BODYWORK
FOR STANDARD CLASS MACHINES
The frame shall remain as the manufacturer’s original specification.
The front forks must have originated from the same motor scooter type as the frame and the
main structure of the forks shall remain as the manufacturer’s original specification.
It must have a body and leg shields in the form of an apron and footboards of the platform
type.
All detachable external panelwork, e.g. side panels, leg shields, footboards and front
mudguards, which form part of the manufacturer’s original specification shall be securely fixed
in place.
The tail-light unit and headlight and handlebar casings shall remain in their original position
although glass may be removed (see Regulation 15.10).
Side panels, front mudguards and the top section of the headlight & handlebar casing may
be replaced with properly manufactured components of similar appearance and structural
strength to the original specification.
Minor modifications to panelling will be permitted to allow the fitting of larger carburettors,
430
8
9
10
2
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
SCOOTER
AUTO CYCLE UNION HANDBOOK 2015
footrests, exhausts, and similar, but trimming or reducing original specification dimensions are
prohibited.
Any type of seating may be used provided it is properly padded and securely fitted in place, but
it shall not extend beyond the rear of the bodywork of the machine unless so positioned in the
manufacturer’s original specification. No part of the seat must be more than 900mm above the
ground when the motor scooter is not loaded.
No streamlining, spoilers or material additions may be made to the bodywork.
Rear view mirrors are forbidden.
FOR SPECIAL SCOOTERS
The basic frame and forks shall originate from a motor scooter as defined in Regulation 3
above. The main frame member extending from the steering head to the rear suspension
mounting, and including the original engine mountings, must remain basically unaltered and
Regulation 3(a). The above shall be complied with at all times unless the motor scooter was
originally manufactured so as to contravene the said Regulation.
Any “non-original” portions of the frame must be constructed of good quality seamless drawn
steel tube of a circular or non-circular section, welded or brazed together. If circular, the
outside diameter shall not exceed 100mm, if non-circular, the maximum cross section shall not
exceed 100mm measured at right angles to any fl at face.
The use of composite (i.e. skinned bonded honeycomb) or Monocoque construction is
forbidden with the exception of those parts of the motor scooter which were so constructed as
part of the manufacturer’s original specification.
The use of TITANIUM and similar “exotic” metals is forbidden in the construction of the
frame, front forks, handlebars, swinging arm and wheel spindles. The use of light alloys is
forbidden for wheel spindles.
The front forks must have originated from the same motor scooter type as the frame and the
main structure of the forks shall remain as the manufacturer’s original specification except that
the steering column may be shortened.
Any type of seating may be used provided it is properly padded, securely fitted in place and no
part of the seat is more than 900mm above the ground when the motor scooter is not loaded.
Any form of bodywork may be used subject to the Regulations regarding streamlining in 5
below and provided the machine remains in a safe condition.
Rear view mirrors are forbidden.
15.5STREAMLINING
For Standard Class Machines the provision of streamlining is prohibited.
1
For Special Scooters any streamlining fitted must comply with the following:
1. The streamlining must be easily detachable for technical control and be so designed and
fitted to allow complete liberty of movement to the driver when the vehicle is in motion and
when getting on and of the vehicle, without any part of it having to be displaced.
2. Aerofoils or spoilers are not permitted.
3. The front road wheel, with the exception of the tyre, must be visible from either side.
4. The extreme forward part of the streamlining must not project forward of a vertical line
drawn 50mm in front of the front wheel axle.
5. The extreme rearward part of the streamlining must not project rearward of a line drawn
vertically at 330mm to the rear of the centre line of the axle of the rear wheel.
6. Normal mudguards are not considered as streamlining.
7. It must be possible to see the driver completely with the exception of the forearms, in the
normal driving position, from either side and from above.
8. It is forbidden to use any transparent material to avoid the application of these Regulations.
AUTO CYCLE UNION HANDBOOK 2015
SCOOTER
431
9. No part of the seat or saddle or anything to the rear of these must be more than 900mm
above the ground when the motor scooter is not loaded.
10. Whatever the position of the handlebars, there must be a clear space of at least 25mm
between the streamlining and the extremities of the handlebars, including any attachments
thereto, and a clear space of at least 20mm between the streamlining and any other part of the
steering mechanism or front wheel.
15.6INCLINATION
It must be possible for the motor scooter, not being loaded, to be inclined to an angle of 26° from the
vertical without any part of it, other than the tyres, coming into contact with the ground.
15.7FOOTRESTS
Footrests, which may comprise the original platform, must be provided and be so designed and
positioned that easy access is available to all control pedals. Drivers must adopt a position with their
feet on the footrests or they will be disqualified.
15.8PROJECTIONS
There shall be as few sharp projections as possible. Where there are projections, they must be covered
in such a way as to prevent injury, occasioned by accidental contact, to the driver. All tubular ends
must be securely fitted with rounded ends.
15.9KICKSTARTS
It is recommended that kickstart pedals be removed. Projecting kickstart shaft s must be removed.
15.10 GLASS
All glass in lights and on instruments must be either removed or securely taped to retain it in place in
the event of breakage.
Where any glass is removed the exposed aperture must be securely covered or infilled to retain the
original appearance.
15.11 AIR INTAKES
Cooling air intakes, where permitted, must be so constructed that there is NO forward projection/
protrusion to catch or foul in the event of an accident
15.12 ENGINE AND DRIVE UNITS – GENERAL
1
The engine and drive unit must have originated from the same type of motor scooter as the
frame and the drive must be transmitted to the road through the rear wheel of the motor
scooter.
2
The unit shall be properly and safely finished with all necessary studs, nuts, bolts and washers
securely fitted. There shall be no evidence of oil leaks.
3
The MAXIMUM PERMITTED engine capacity is 260cc. Any modifications made must not
prejudice the safety of the driver, any other competitor or official and must be within the
following parameters for the parts specified:
15.13 FOR STANDARD CLASS MACHINES
1
CYLINDER HEAD(s) – Liquid cooling of the cylinder head(s) is not permitted unless it formed
part of the manufacturer’s original specification for the engine used.
2
Cylinder Barrel(s) – Must be as manufacturer’s original specification (though not necessarily
produced by the original manufacturer) in regard to shape, size, configuration, position and
number of ports, and external appearance, materials and method of manufacture, except that:
1. Ports may be enlarged, but they may not be bridged nor the cylinder barrel(s) slotted. The
432
3
4
5
SCOOTER
AUTO CYCLE UNION HANDBOOK 2015
position may not be changed, additional ports may not be provided, and the provision of
additional material on either the inside or the outside of the barrel is prohibited.
2. The bore size of a cylinder may be increased by not more than 10mm.
3. The cylinder length, between the base gasket and the head gasket faces may be reduced by not
more than10mm.
4. Sleeving will only be permitted in order to return the barrel(s) to their original bore
specification. Sleeving may not be used to alter the number, position or configuration of ports,
or to reduce the bore size to less than its design dimension.
5. The use of chrome, nicasil or any similar hard facing material to form the cylinder bore is
prohibited except where provided as part of the manufacturer’s original specification.
6. The use of Malossi, Pinasco, Polini and Quattrini M1 cylinders are permitted. The use of twin
induction cylinders is forbidden. Lambretta machines in class 4 – the use of the AF Rapido 200
cylinder and Mugello 200 Cylinder is permitted.
Packing pieces – The total thickness of any packing piece(s) or gasket(s) used between the base
of the cylinder and the crankcase must not exceed 10mm. Packing pieces may not be used as a
means of increasing the available port area.
A 10mm packaging plate may be used on the side casing to enable the use of a six plate clutch.
No other modification is allowed to the gearbox, end plate, chain, chain runner, or cush drive
and sprocket.
No other packaging pieces are allowed on standard class machines.
Crankcase – Crank casings must be as manufacturer’s original specification, except that:
1. Modifications may be made to permit the use of a larger section tyre subject to the
limitations in Regulation 15.23 below.
2. Modifications may be made to any existing crankcase porting except that the provision of
additional material on either the inside or the outside of the casing is prohibited.
3. Notwithstanding the exception in B above, the provision of additional material to effect
genuine repairs to a crankcase will be permitted provided that the final dimensions and
appearance do not exceed the manufacturer’s original specification.
Crankshaft – The crankshaft shall remain as manufacturer’s original specification, except that:
1. The ignition mounting may be altered.
2. Stroke size may not be altered except that when a crankshaft designed for use in any other
motor scooter by the same manufacturer is used; the crankshaft stroke shall be as originally
specified for the crankshaft employed.
3. Modifications may be made in respect of inlet timing.
4. The crankshaft may be “padded” but must originate from a motor scooter engine produced
by the same manufacturer as the engine unit in use.
5. The connecting rod may be altered or changed.
6. The crankshaft may be altered to accommodate the use of modified connecting rod
assemblies.
7. Gearcase – The gear casing must be as manufacturer’s original specification.
8. Gearbox – The gearbox must be as manufacturer’s original specification for the engine type,
except that the original gear cluster may be altered to provide alternative ratios. The thickness
of the original loose gears may be altered but the original gear teeth must remain. The number
of ratios must remain unchanged.
15.14 FOR SPECIAL SCOOTERS
1
Cylinder Barrels(s), Crankcase and Crankshaft
1. In regard to shape, size, configuration, position and number of ports, and external
appearance, materials and method of manufacture, the cylinder barrel(s) must have originally
conformed to the manufacturer’s original specification (though not necessarily produced by the
original manufacturer) or be included in the ACU list of approved kit barrels.
AUTO CYCLE UNION HANDBOOK 2015
SCOOTER
433
2. The bore size of a cylinder may be increased by no more than 10mm.
3. The cylinder used must have been originally designed for the engine type, must retain the
original method and position of fitting and both the cylinder and the crankcase must retain
the centres of the original stud holes used for bolting the cylinder to the crankcase. It must
therefore be possible, with the exception of interference from a modified cylinder spigot, to fit
the cylinder to a standard crank casing as produced by the original manufacturer of the engine
unit used.
4. The crankcase to cylinder gasket face must be parallel to that of the original crankcase.
5. The crank casing must retain the original mounting points for support within the frame and
the principal external dimensions must remain as manufacturer’s original specification.
6. Any modification to the crank casing to permit usage of modified crankshaft assemblies will
not be permitted if the modification is so extensive as to preclude the fitting of the standard
crankshaft as produced by the original manufacturer of the engine unit used.
7. Any type of crankshaft may be used subject to the limitations specified in sub paragraph F
above.
8. Liquid cooling, or any other modification, to the cylinder will not be permitted if the
modification is so extensive as to preclude identification of the origin of the cylinder.
2
Gearcase/Gearbox – The gearcase must be basically as the manufacturer’s original specification.
Modifications may be made to the number of drive ratios, the ratios themselves and to the
gears.
Alterations to the gear casing will not be permitted if the modification is so extensive as to
preclude the fitting of a standard gear set as produced by the original manufacturer of the
engine unit used.
Note: For the purposes of this Regulation, the ‘engine’ is deemed to comprise the cylinder barrel(s),
crankcase and all internal components within these units.
15.15 ENGINE POSITION
The engine must be positioned in the frame in an identical position and manner to that of the original
motor scooter.
15.16 INDUCTION SYSTEMS
1
For Standard Class Machines any form of carburation may be used but changes to the method
of induction (i.e. use of reed or rotary valves unless originally fitted) are not permitted. The use
of fuel injection or forced induction (see Regulation 15.17) is prohibited.
2
For Special Scooters any form of induction system may be used with the exception of forced
induction (see Regulation 15.17), which is prohibited.
15.17 FORCED INDUCTION
An engine shall be considered as having Forced Induction when in respect of one engine cycle, the
total volume of gaseous mixture induced exceeds the capacity, measured geometrically, of the engine
working cylinder(s). The intra-cylinder injection of fuel shall not be considered as forced induction.
15.18 FUEL
Will be a maximum of a 100 ll octane. The use of power boosters and/or octane boosters is specifically
prohibited.
15.19 EXHAUST SYSTEMS
1
The exhaust systems must fulfil all the current ACU requirements concerning noise control.
2
The systems must be constructed in a manner not prejudicial to the safety of the driver or any
other competitor or official and be mounted in a safe manner.
434
SCOOTER
3
Exhaust fumes must not be discharged in a manner as to raise dust, foul the tyres or brakes or
inconvenience any other driver.
The furthest extremity of any exhaust pipe must not project beyond any part of the machine
or its bodywork or streamlining; nor must the end of any exhaust pipe point upwards or
downwards at an angle greater than 10° from the horizontal.
For Standard Class Machines exhaust systems must be basically fitted in the standard position
and follow the original routing. The use of variable exhaust valves on expansion systems is
prohibited.
For Special Scooters where high-level exhaust systems are used they must have an adequate
heat shield fitted to prevent contact with the systems by the driver in normal driving position
and also by the driver or others in the event of an accident.
4
5
6
AUTO CYCLE UNION HANDBOOK 2015
15.20 FUEL TANK
1
All fuel tanks must be provided with a securely fitted filler cap fitted in such a way that it does
not protrude from the bodywork and cannot be torn off on an accident.
2
A fuel feed tap must be fitted in an easily accessible position and be prominently marked to
indicate the “OFF” position.
3
Any fuel tank breather pipe must be fitted with a non-return valve and must discharge into a
leak-proof catch tank having a minimum capacity of 500 ml, which must be empty at technical
control.
4
All fuel pipes must be adequately secured.
5
For Standard Class Machines the fuel tank shall remain as the manufacturer’s original
specification.
6
For Special Scooters fuel tank(s) must be soundly constructed, entirely of metal.
15.21 OIL DRAIN/FILLER PLUGS AND CATCH TANKS
1
All oil drain, level and filler plugs must be tight and drilled and wired in position.
2
Any oil breather pipe fitted must discharge into a catch tank mounted in an easily accessible
position and having a minimum capacity of 500 ml.
3
The catch tank must be empty at technical control.
15.22 STEERING
1
Steering shall be through the front wheel only by means of non-adjustable handlebars securely
fixed to the steering head of the motor scooter and having a MINIMUM overall width of
510mm.
2
The angle of rotation of the handlebars, measured horizontally at ground level to each side
of a straight ahead position, must be a MINIMUM of 20° and steering stops must be fitted to
limit angular movement to a MAXIMUM of 65° and/or to allow a MINIMUM clear space of
25mm between the handlebars and any part of the bodywork, streamlining, tank or similar
attachments.
3
Whatever the position of the handlebars and suspension no part of the front wheel or forks
must pass within 20mm of any bodywork or streamlining.
4
For Standard Class Machines alterations to cast handlebar assemblies are prohibited except
as provided in Regulation 4 above, and for Lambretta Vega and Luna type machines where
lowering of the handlebar grips is permitted providing the grips remain in the same horizontal
and vertical planes relative to the ground and they are fixed to the original casting base.
15.23 WHEELS AND TYRES
1
All wheels and hubs must be of metal construction and the rim diameter must not exceed
407mm. Only treaded tyres designed and manufactured as suitable for use on motor scooters
AUTO CYCLE UNION HANDBOOK 2015
2
3
SCOOTER
435
will be permitted. At technical control all tyres must have a minimum depth of tread of 1.6mm
across the entire original tread area.
The use of recut moulded tyres or any non-skid attachment to tyres is prohibited.
For Standard Class Machines wheels must be as manufacturer’s original specification and tyres
must not deviate from original specification section by more than 13mm.
15.24 SUSPENSION
1
For Standard Class Machines all suspension links, legs, yokes, swing arm or other similar
component of the rear suspension assembly shall remain as manufacturer’s original
specification. However, anti-dive systems are permitted for use on the front.
2
Springs, dampers and “suspension units” may be replaced with non-original components but
must be mounted in a manner identical to that of the original component.
15.25 BRAKES
1
The braking system must consist of two efficient brakes operated independently, one on each of
the two road wheels.
2
For Standard Class Machines brakes must be as manufacturer’s original specification except
that the method of operation may be changed. (i.e. the Lambretta cable operated cam may only
be replaced with a single piston hydraulic cylinder.
3
Two brake pads of a diameter not exceeding 40mm, must be used. In addition an original style
static housing must also be used).
4
External Disc Brake – The use of external single hydraulic disc will be allowed for group
4 machines. The hub must be original to the scooter or specifically manufactured for the
scooter (Lambretta or Vespa) e.g. SCOOT RS type for Lambretta and PX type for Vespas. The
specification of these items can not be changed for a bigger disc, or different calliper type or
size. The addition of an Anti Dive unit and the use of different pads will be allowed but they
must keep the same surface area. No variation from these brakes will be allowed.
15.26 MUDGUARDS
1
For Special Scooters mudguards are not compulsory. Where fitted they must be adequate for
the purpose, properly and safely constructed, and securely mounted.
2
For Standard Class Machines mudguards are not compulsory except where they form part of
the external bodywork and are required to be fitted in accordance with Regulation 4 above.
Where optional mudguards are fitted they must be adequate for the purpose, properly and
safely constructed, and securely mounted.
15.27 ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND BATTERY
1
All vehicles must be fitted with an easily accessible ignition switch, mounted in the vicinity of
the handlebar/headset and within a radius of 200mm of the centre line of the top of the fork
stem.
2
Switches must be of a positive locking type in both the on and off positions and when in the
“OFF” position must not allow the engine to run.
3
The “OFF” position of all switches must be prominently marked in capital letters of at least
10mm in height with dark coloured letters on a light background and vice versa.
4
Batteries, if fitted, must be of the leak-proof type.
15.28 THROTTLE CONTROLS
Throttle controls must be self-closing when not held by the hand.
436
SCOOTER
AUTO CYCLE UNION HANDBOOK 2015
15.29 CONTROL LEVERS
1
All handlebar levers must be ball ended, the ball to be at least 19mm in diameter and to be a
permanently fixed integral part of the lever.
2
Each control lever (both hand and foot) must be mounted on an independent pivot.
3
Handlebar grips must be securely fixed to the ends of the handlebars.
SECTION 16 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR “AUTOMATIC”
SOLO MOTORSCOOTERS
Unless specifically mentioned in these Regulations the Standing Regulations for Solo Motor
Scooters for use in all Road Race Sprints and Hill Climb shall apply.
16.1INTRODUCTION
These regulations specify the requirements for construction of “Automatic” Class Solo Motor scooters
for use in Road Races, Sprints and Hill Climbs.
16.2DEFINITIONS
1
An “Automatic” Class Solo Motor scooter is a two-wheeled motor vehicle upon which the
driver may sit on a seat and have free and open space in front of the seat for passage of their
legs, with the following additional characteristics and exceptions:
1. The minimum size of the space forward of the seat must be a regular or irregular trapezium
with its top measuring 250mm along a line projected forward from the top of the seat and
parallel with a line drawn through the centres of the two road wheels and measured from the
front extremity of the seat towards the steering column. Its depth Vertically downwards must
not be less than 250mm and its base not less than 100mm. The minimum space must be clear at
all times of any obstruction of a permanent or temporary nature.
2. The rim diameter of any road wheel shall not exceed 356mm (14 inches).
3. It must have a starting device. The electrical and lighting equipment, if fitted, must conform
to the International Convention of Road Vehicles.
4. It must have a body and leg shields in the form of an apron, which must have a width, and
length of not less than 400mm The footrests must be of the platform type and not less than
250mm in length and 300mm in width overall.
5. It shall have been manufactured by a manufacturer recognised by the ACU and not less
than one hundred machines of that type equipped with the manufacturer’s original or optional
equipment must have been made and sold. An Accountant’s Certificate will be required as
proof.
6. In cases of doubt the matter shall be referred to the Technical Committee.
7. Exceptions – In the instances of scooter-based machines that do not offer a specific
trapezium other characteristics will determine suitability. Those characteristics will be wheel/
tyre sizes and engine layout/specification. The Gilera Runner series of scooters and the Gilera
DNA are acceptable in the specific classes of their engine capacity and are suitable for use in the
BSSO Championships.
16.3 ENGINE CAPACITY
1
The class limits are set out in these regulations and each machine can be used in a class to suit
the capacity of the engine.
2
There are NO lower class limits; therefore smaller class machines may be used in larger capacity
classes.
3
Aftermarket performance kits may be used if specifically designed for the engine concerned, as
long as it is commercially available to all competitors
4
The stroke must remain absolutely as the manufacturer’s original specification.
AUTO CYCLE UNION HANDBOOK 2015
SCOOTER
437
16.4 IGNITION (STARTER AND FLYWHEEL)
Replacement of the Original by parts from aftermarket manufactures is allowed, on the condition that
all parts are commercially available to all competitors.
16.5SEAT
The replacement may be made providing no other parts are removed and the original attachments are
employed.
16.6SPECIFICATIONS
The replacement, removal or modification of the following parts of the scooter as listed in points 1.
and 2. below is absolutely forbidden.
1
Engine and Drive Unit
1. Complete crankcase – except as noted in 3.4 below
2. Induction system – the fuel feeding system of the engine must remain absolutely mono –
carburettor
3. Automatic clutch which must be working – except as noted in 3.5 below
2
Frame Wheels and Bodywork
1. Frame (complete carrying structure)
2. Wheel Rims (front and rear, sizes and materials)
3. Handlebars (position, height, width)
4. Petrol tank
5. External body assembly (plastic parts included) – (with the exceptions to allow cooling for
engine unit)
6. Mudguards (front and rear) – (where fitted from new)
7. Connections and working system of the rear shock absorber
3
Modifications may be made to other parts of the motor scooter, subject to the following
restrictions:
1. The system of introducing fuel into the engine must be as used by the original engine unit.
Where the original system is by Fuel Injection (aka Aprilia Di-Tech), it is allowed to convert to
a carburettor system. In all Automatic classes there are no restrictions on the maximum size of
carb that can be used.
2. Magneto: the magneto of the ignition can be of a type without an RPM limit-switch; the use
of variable advance type is permitted.
3. Exhaust Ports: The use of a shutter valve (power valve) on the exhaust port is forbidden.
4. Crankcase: The removal of some material is allowed whereas the addition of any material is
forbidden.
5. Clutch: The replacement of the springs and of the friction material is permitted and
original or aftermarket equipment may be fitted as long as it is commercially available to all
competitors. It is also allowed to lighten or to modify the clutch set.
6. Exhaust Systems: The exhaust system need not necessarily be the original one but it
must fulfil all the current ACU requirements concerning noise control. The system must
be constructed in a manner not prejudicial to the safety of the driver, any other competitor
or official, and be mounted in a safe manner. Exhaust fumes must not be discharged in a
manner as to raise dust, foul the tyres or brakes or inconvenience any other driver. The
furthest extremity of any exhaust pipe must not project beyond any part of the machine or
its bodywork; nor must the end of any exhaust pipe point upwards or downwards at an angle
greater than 10° from the horizontal.
7. Flywheel Cover: removal is forbidden; however it is possible to modify it to improve the
engine cooling system. You may replace it with an aftermarket part as long as it is commercially
available to all competitors.
8. Variator Cover: the modification of this component is allowed in order to improve the
438
SCOOTER
AUTO CYCLE UNION HANDBOOK 2015
cooling of the variator, unless such a modification exists on the original part or on a component
of the manufacturer of the vehicle. You may replace it with an aftermarket part as long as it is
commercially available to all competitors.
9. Cover: the modification of this component is allowed in order to improve the cooling of the
clutch set. You may replace it with an aftermarket part as long as it is commercially available to
all competitors.
10. Engine Cooling: an improvement of the engine cooling is allowed unless it changes the
original system (liquid or air-cooled); the use of both of these systems at the same time is
forbidden.
11. Replaceable Parts: all replaceable parts (apart from the exhaust system) must not be
unique (prototype) parts; they must be mass-production items and must be found in the
manufacturers catalogues.
12. In all instances all alterations must be made with safety in mind. If any such alteration is
deemed dangerous then steps must be taken to alter the modifications to a safe state.
16.7WEIGHT
The total weight of the vehicle (including fuel) must not be less that 65kg.
16.8PROJECTIONS
There shall be as few sharp projections as possible. Where there are projections, they must be covered
in such a way as to prevent injury, occasioned by accidental contact, to the driver. All tubular ends
must be securely fitted with rounded ends. All racks, spare wheels, prop-stands, crash bars and
mirrors must be removed.
16.9 GLASS/PLASTIC LENSES
All glass or plastic in lights and on instruments must be securely taped to retain it in place in the
event of breakage. Speedo and rev counter faces should be covered with transparent plastic sheet or
tape.
16.10 FUEL
Will be a maximum of a 100 ll octane. No additives other than normal lubricants are permitted. The
use of power boosters and/or octane boosters is specifically prohibited.
16.11 FUEL FEED TAPS
If a manual fuel feed tap is used, then it must be prominently marked to indicate the “OFF” position.
16.12 TYRES
1
Only commercially available treaded tyres of good quality designed and manufactured as
suitable for use on the wheel rims of the vehicle will be permitted.
2
At technical control all tyres must have a minimum depth of tread of 1.6mm across the entire
original tread area.
3
The use of Agricultural, Industrial, “Slick” and recut moulded tyres is prohibited.
16.13 BRAKES
The brake disc, pads and calliper, may be replaced with alternative aftermarket items specifically
designed for the machine in question, as long as the items concerned are commercially available to all
competitors.
16.14 IGNITION SWITCHES AND BATTERY
All vehicles must be fitted with an easily accessible ignition switch/key which must be prominently
AUTO CYCLE UNION HANDBOOK 2015
SCOOTER
439
marked to indicate the “OFF” position in capital letters of at least 10mm in height with dark coloured
letters on a light background and vice versa. Batteries, fitted, must be of the leak-proof type.
SECTION 17 TECHNICAL REGULATIONS FOR PRODUCTION CLASS
SOLO MOTORSCOOTERS
Unless specifically mentioned in these Regulations the Standing Regulations for Solo Motor
Scooters for use in Road Race, Sprints and Hill Climb shall apply
17.1INTRODUCTION
These Regulations specify the requirements for construction of Production Class Solo Motor scooters
for use in Road Races, Sprints and Hill Climbs.
17.2GENERAL
The regulations detailed below are applicable to ALL Production Class Solo Motor scooters.
17.3 BASIC SPECIFICATION
Motor scooters must be as manufacturer’s original specification except for the modifications detailed
below. No other alterations, modifications or changes from manufacturer’s original specification will
be permitted.
17.4SEATING
Any type of seating may be used provided it is properly padded and securely fitted in place, but
it shall not extend beyond the rear of the bodywork of the machine unless so positioned in the
manufacturer’s original specification. No part of the seat must be more than 900mm above the
ground when the motor scooter is not loaded.
17.5 GLASS/PLASTIC LENSES
All glass or plastic in lights and on instruments must be securely taped to retain it in place in the
event of breakage. Speedo and rev counter faces should be covered with transparent plastic sheet or
tape.
17.6 IGNITION SYSTEM
The ignition system must be of the manufacturer’s original type for the motor scooter. The timing
position may be altered. NO other modifications will be permitted.
17.7GEARING
The gear casing, gearbox and gear cluster must be as manufacturer’s original specification. NO
modifications will be permitted.
17.8 INDUCTION SYSTEM
The induction system must be of manufacturer’s original type for the motor scooter. NO increase in
internal bore will be permitted. Jetting may be altered.
17.9 BORE AND STROKE
The bore and stroke of the motor scooter must be clearly marked in letters and numbers at least
10mm in height, on the right hand side rear competition number plate.
17.10 FUEL
Fuel must be a commercial brand of UNLEADED petrol as supplied from a wayside pump. No
additives other than normal lubricants are permitted. The use of power boosters and/or octane
boosters is specifically prohibited.
440
SCOOTER
AUTO CYCLE UNION HANDBOOK 2015
17.11 FUEL FEED TAPS
The fuel feed tap must be prominently marked to indicate the “OFF” position.
17.12 TYRES
Only commercially available treaded tyres of good quality designed and manufactured as suitable for
use on motor scooters will be permitted. At technical control all tyres must have a minimum depth
of tread of 1.6mm across the entire original tread area. The use of Agricultural, Industrial, “Slick” and
recut-moulded tyres is prohibited.
17.13 FRONT SUSPENSION
Anti-dive systems are permitted in all solo standard classes.
SECTION 18 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR STREET CLASS
SOLO MOTORSCOOTERS
Unless specifically mentioned in these Regulations the Standing Regulations for Solo Motor
Scooters for use in Road Race, Sprints and Hill Climb shall apply
18.1INTRODUCTION
These Regulations specify the requirements for construction of “Street Class” Solo Motor scooters for
use in Road Races, Sprints and Hill Climbs.
18.2GENERAL
The regulations detailed below are applicable to ALL “Street Class” Solo Motor scooters.
18.3 BASIC SPECIFICATION
Motor scooters must be in full compliance with all current legal requirements for use on the public
highway and must have a current vehicle excise (Road Tax) licence and, where required, a current
DTP Test Certificate.
18.4SEATING
Any type of seating may be used provided it is properly padded and securely fitted in place, but
it shall not extend beyond the rear of the bodywork of the machine unless so positioned in the
manufacturer’s original specification. No part of the seat must be more than 900mm above the
ground when the motor scooter is not loaded.
18.5 GLASS/PLASTIC LENSES
All glass or plastic in lights and on instruments must be securely taped to retain it in place in the
event of breakage. Speedo and rev counter faces should be covered with transparent plastic sheet or
tape.
18.6FUEL
Fuel must be a commercial brand of UNLEADED petrol as supplied from a wayside pump. No
additives other than normal lubricants are permitted. The use of power boosters and/or octane
boosters is specifically prohibited.
18.7 FUEL FEED TAPS
The fuel feed tap must be prominently marked to indicate the “OFF” position.
18.8 OIL DRAIN/FILLER PLUGS
All oil drain, level and filler plugs must be tight and drilled and wired in position.
AUTO CYCLE UNION HANDBOOK 2015
SCOOTER
441
18.9TYRES
Only commercially available treaded tyres of good quality designed and manufactured as suitable for
use on motor scooters and for use on the public highway will be permitted. At technical control all
tyres must have a minimum depth of tread of 1.6mm across the entire original tread area. The use of
Agricultural, Industrial, “Slick” and recut-moulded tyres is prohibited.
18.10 BRAKES
The standard braking system must consist of two efficient brakes operated independently, one on
each of the two road wheels.
18.11 FRONT SUSPENSION
Anti-dive systems are permitted in all solo standard classes.
SECTION 19 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR MOTORSCOOTER
COMBINATIONS (GROUP 7)
19.1INTRODUCTION
These Regulations specify the requirements for construction of Motor scooter Combinations for use
in Road Races, Sprints and Hill Climbs.
19.2GENERAL
1
The sidecar must be placed on the left side of the motor scooter and the three road wheels must
be disposed to give two tracks.
2
Hinged sidecars and steerable sidecar wheels are forbidden.
3
Neither the driver nor the passenger may be attached to the machine.
19.3CONSTRUCTION
1
The frame must employ as part of its construction, the original type of engine fixing into the
chassis giving effective support to the engine.
2
The remainder of the frame must be constructed of good quality seamless drawn steel tube of
a circular or non-circular section, welded or brazed together. If circular, the outside diameter
shall not exceed 100mm, if non-circular, the maximum cross section shall not exceed 100mm
measured at right angles to any fl at face.
3
The above does not restrict the swinging arm.
4
Reinforcement of the steering head is allowed to a maximum of 230mm from the centre line of
the steering head.
5
Monocoque construction is forbidden.
6
The use of composite construction is forbidden with the exception of the sidecar platform. (i.e.
Aluminium or carbon fibre skinned honeycomb).
7
The use of TITANIUM and similar “exotic” metals is forbidden in the construction of the
frame, front forks, handlebars, swinging arm and wheel spindles. The use of light alloys is
forbidden for wheel spindles.
19.4DIMENSIONS
Weight: The MINIMUM weight, without fuel, shall be 130kg. The use of ballast to reach this weight is
forbidden.
Width: The overall MAXIMUM shall be 1700mm.
Wheelbase: The MAXIMUM shall be 1650mm.
Track: The MINIMUM shall be 760mm. The distance is measured from the centre of the track left by
the rear wheel to the centre of the track left by the sidecar wheel.
442
SCOOTER
AUTO CYCLE UNION HANDBOOK 2015
Ground Clearance: The MINIMUM clear space to be maintained beneath the entire under surface of
the machine when loaded with fuel, driver and passenger is 65mm.
19.5 STREAMLINING AND BODYWORK
1
The streamlining must be easily detachable for technical control and be so designed and fitted
to allow complete liberty of movement to the driver and passenger when the vehicle is in
motion and when getting on and off the vehicle, without any part of it having to be displaced.
2
Aerofoils or spoilers are not permitted.
3
Rear view mirrors are forbidden.
4
A solid and effective protection must be fitted between the driver and the engine and must
prevent direct contact between the driver’s body or clothing and escaping flames or leaking fuel
or oil.
5
Any type of seating may be used provided it is properly padded and securely fitted in place.
6
The extreme forward part of the streamlining must not project forward in plan beyond the
most forward part of the front tyre by more than 400mm.
7
The extreme rearward part of the streamlining must not project rearward in plan beyond the
most rearward part of the rear tyre by more than 400mm.
8
Whatever the position of the handlebars, there must be a clear space of at least 20mm between
the streamlining and the extremities of the handlebars, including any attachments thereto,
and a clear space of at least 20mm between the streamlining and any other part of the steering
mechanism or front wheel.
19.6PROJECTIONS
1
There shall be as few sharp projections as possible. Where there are projections, they must be
covered in such a way as to prevent injury, occasioned by accidental contact, to the driver and
passenger.
2
All tubular ends must be securely fitted with rounded ends.
19.7 DRIVE GUARD
An adequate guard must be fitted to prevent the drive being accidentally touched. Drive chains must
be guarded from sprocket to sprocket.
19.8GLASS
All glass in lights and on instruments must be securely taped to retain it in place in the event of
breakage.
19.9 AIR INTAKES
Cooling air intakes must be so constructed that there is NO forward projection/protrusion to catch or
foul in the event of an accident.
19.10 ENGINE AND DRIVE UNITS
1
The engine and drive unit must have originated from a motor scooter and the drive must be
transmitted to the road through the rear wheel of the motor scooter.
2
The unit shall be properly and safely finished with all necessary studs, nuts, bolts and washers
securely fitted. There shall be no evidence of oil leaks. THE MAXIMUM PERMITTED
ENGINE CAPACITY IS 260cc.
3
Any modifications made must not prejudice the safety of the driver, any other competitor or
official and must be within the following parameters for the parts specified:
Cylinder Barrel(s) and Crankcase
1. In regard to shape, size, configuration, position and number of ports, and external
appearance, materials and method of manufacture, the cylinder barrel(s) must have originally
AUTO CYCLE UNION HANDBOOK 2015
SCOOTER
443
conformed to the manufacturer’s original specification (though not necessarily produced by the
original manufacturer) or be included in the ACU list of approved kit barrels.
2. The bore size of a cylinder may be increased by no more than 10mm.
3. The cylinder used must have been originally designed for the engine type, must retain the
original method and position of fitting and both the cylinder and the crankcase must retain
the centres of the original stud holes used for bolting the cylinder to the crankcase. It must
therefore be possible, with the exception of interference from a modified cylinder spigot, to fit
the cylinder to a standard crank casing as produced by the original manufacturer of the engine
unit used.
4. The crankcase to cylinder gasket face must be parallel to that of the original crankcase.
5. The crank casing must retain the original mounting points for support within the frame and
the principal external dimensions must remain as manufacturer’s original specification.
6. Any modification to the crank casing to permit usage of modified original type crankshaft
assemblies will not be permitted if the modification is so extensive as to preclude the fitting of
the standard crankshaft as produced by the original manufacturer of the engine unit used.
7. Modifications may be made to facilitate the use of water-cooling but the engine must
comprise a single unit.
8. Liquid cooling, or any other modification, to the cylinder will not be permitted if the
modification is so extensive as to preclude identification of the origin of the cylinder.
4
GEARCASE/GEARBOX – The gearcase must be basically as the manufacturer’s original
specification. Modifications may be made to the number of drive ratios, the ratios themselves
and to the gears. Alterations to the gear casing will not be permitted if the modification
is so extensive as to preclude the fitting of a standard gear set as produced by the original
manufacturer of the engine unit used.
Note: For the purposes of this Regulation, the ‘engine’ is deemed to comprise the cylinder barrel(s),
crankcase and all internal components within these units.
19.11 ENGINE POSITION
The engine must be positioned behind the steering head and in front of the rear wheel and be so
located that the centre line of the engine (by definition, a position midway between the centre lines
of outermost cylinders) is no more than 160mm from the centre line of the rear wheel of the motor
scooter.
19.12 INDUCTION SYSTEMS
Any form of induction system may be used with the exception of forced induction (see 13 below),
which is prohibited.
19.13 FORCED INDUCTION
An engine shall be considered as having Forced Induction when in respect of one engine cycle, the
total volume of gaseous mixture induced exceeds the capacity, measured geometrically, of the engine
working cylinder(s). The intra-cylinder injection of fuel shall not be considered as forced induction.
19.14 FUEL
Fuel will be a maximum of a 100 ll octane. The use of power boosters and/or octane boosters is
specifically prohibited
19.15 EXHAUST SYSTEMS
1
The exhaust systems must fulfil all the current ACU requirements concerning noise control.
2
The systems must be constructed in a manner not prejudicial to the safety of the driver, the
passenger, or any other competitor or official. Exhaust fumes must not be discharged so as to
raise dust, foul the tyres or brakes or inconvenience a passenger or any other driver.
444
SCOOTER
3
The furthest extremity of any exhaust system must not project beyond any part of the machine
or its bodywork or streamlining; nor must the end of any exhaust pipe point upwards or
downwards at an angle greater than 10° from the horizontal.
AUTO CYCLE UNION HANDBOOK 2015
19.16 FUEL TANK
1
The fuel tank(s) must be soundly constructed, entirely of metal, with a securely fitted filler cap,
and sufficiently independently protected from the ground. The fuel filler cap must be fitted in
such a way that it does not protrude from the fairing and cannot be torn off in an accident.
2
A fuel feed tap must be fitted in an easily accessible position and be prominently marked to
indicate the “OFF” position.
3
Any fuel tank breather pipe must be fitted with a non-return valve and must discharge into a
leak-proof catch tank having a minimum capacity of 500 ml, which must be empty at technical
control. All fuel pipes must be adequately secured.
19.17 OIL DRAIN/FILLER PLUGS AND CATCH TANKS
1
All oil drain, level and filler plugs must be tight and drilled and wired in position.
2
Any oil breather pipe fitted must discharge into a catch tank mounted in an easily accessible
position and having a minimum capacity of 500 ml.
3
The catch tank must be empty at technical control.
19.18 STEERING
1
Steering shall be through the front wheel only by means of handlebars firmly secured to
steering members turning the front wheel and its supports directly with no intermediate push
or pull rods.
2
Hub centre steering, remote steering linkages and the use of articulated joints in the steering
mechanism are not permitted. By definition an articulated joint is one allowing movement in
more than one plane.
3
Handlebars and all steering bearings must be located on the sprung portion of the front
suspension. The extreme width of the handlebars must be not less than 450mm.
4
The minimum angle of rotation of the
handlebars, each side of a straight ahead
position and measured horizontally at
ground level, is to be 30° and stops must be
fitted in order to limit angular movement
to 65° and to allow a minimum of 20mm
clearance between the handlebars and any
tank, similar attachments or streamlining.
5
Whatever the position of the handlebars
and suspension no part of the front wheel
or forks must pass within 20mm of any
bodywork or streamlining.
6
It is permissible to displace the steering
head up to a maximum of 75mm
determined by measuring the off set from
the centre line of the rear wheel.
19.19 WHEELS AND TYRES
1
All wheels must be of metal construction
and be within an allowance of 5° from the
vertical.
2
The diameter of any fully inflated tyre,
Figure 1
6.2 inches × 13 inches “SLICK” tyre with a
rolling diameter of 19.8 inches
TTD = 3.142 × 19.8 = 62.203 = 20.734
3
3
3
AUTO CYCLE UNION HANDBOOK 2015
SCOOTER
445
measured over the outside of the tyre, shall be NOT LESS THAN 407mm and NOT MORE
THAN 560mm.
3
At technical control ALL moulded tread tyres must have a minimum depth of tread of 1.6mm
across the entire original tread area. Recut moulded tyres are not permitted.
4
When conditions permit, slick (untreaded) tyres may be used and these may be professionally
grooved. The surface of the slick tyre must contain three or more hollows at 120-degree
intervals or less, indicating the limit of wear on the centre and shoulder areas of the tyre. When
at least two of these indicator hollows become worn on different parts of the periphery, the tyre
must no longer be used.
5
Intermediate Pattern Types. For wet weather conditions which call for a “TREADED” tyre
other than a full “WET” tyre, an “INTERMEDIATE” pattern tyre must be used. The tyre
pattern must be professionally cut and consist of a minimum of three circumferential grooves
each 0.18 inches in width. The depth may be cut to show the canvas, but must never sever the
canvas fibres.
Note: At technical control the surface of the tyre must contain three or more hollow “WEAR”
indicators at 120 degree intervals indicating the limit of wear across the tread area.
One groove must be cut in the centre of the tread area, with the remaining grooves located
equidistant between the centre groove and the edge of the tread area.
In addition to the circumferential groove, “SLITS” across the tread area must be cut from each
groove, 0.18 inches in width, 0.4 inches minimum in length. Spacing must be equi-distant around the
periphery of the tyre and no more than 3 inches apart.
To give inter groove relationship between the “SLITS”; their position must be staggered.
The margin of tyre surface between the ends of the opposed “SLITS” must be no greater than 0.60
inches.
See FIGURE 1 for example calculation and a diagrammatic explanation of the above dimensions.
19.20 FRONT SUSPENSIONS
The front suspension is to be either a leading or trailing fork, or links, with the wheel equally
supported on each side. Wishbones are not permitted.
19.21 REAR SUSPENSION
The rear suspension, if fitted, is to be of the swinging arm type. A single sided swinging arm is
allowed.
19.22 BRAKES
The braking system must consist of at least two brakes operated independently on the front and rear
road wheels, each giving complete control. Braking of the sidecar wheel is optional.
19.23 MUDGUARDS AND WHEEL PROTECTION
1
The rear wheel mudguard must cover at least 240 degrees of the rear wheel. The side nearest to
the sidecar wheel must be enclosed.
2
The sidecar wheel must be enclosed from the sidecar platform and level with the sidecar
platform around the periphery.
3
For rear exit sidecars the sidecar wheel must be totally enclosed down to platform level.
19.24 DRIVER
1
The driver in the normal driving position must be completely visible, with the exception of his
forearms and lower legs, from the side opposite to the sidecar and from above.
2
It is forbidden for the driver’s legs to be enclosed. The driver’s position must be such that the
driver’s feet are positioned behind the knees when viewed from above and the footrests so
designed and positioned that easy access is always available to any control pedal.
446
SCOOTER
AUTO CYCLE UNION HANDBOOK 2015
19.25 PASSENGER
The passenger must be able to lean out to either side of the sidecar. For this purpose the vehicle must
be fitted with suitable handholds, which must be of the “closed loop” type.
19.26 ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND BATTERY
1
All vehicles must be fitted with an easily accessible ignition switch, mounted in the vicinity of
the handlebar/headset and within a radius of 200mm of the centre line of the top of the fork
stem.
2
Switches must be of a positive locking type in both the on and off positions and when in the
“OFF” position must not allow the engine to run. The “OFF” position of all switches must be
prominently marked in capital letters of at least 10mm in height with dark coloured letters on a
light background and vice versa.
3
Any electric fuel feed pump must be wired in such a way as to cut out when the ignition switch
is in the “OFF” position.
4
Batteries, if fitted, must be of the leak-proof type.
19.27 THROTTLE CONTROLS
Throttle controls must be self-closing when not held by the hand.
19.28 CONTROL LEVERS
1
All handlebar levers must be ball ended, the ball to be at least 19mm in diameter and to be a
permanently fixed integral part of the lever.
2
Each control lever (both hand and foot) must be mounted on an independent pivot.
3
Handlebar grips must be securely fixed to the ends of the handlebars.
SECTION 20 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR FORMULA 125
MOTORSCOOTER COMBINATIONS
Unless specifically mentioned in these Regulations the Standing Regulations for the
construction of Group 7 Motor Scooter Regulations detailed above shall apply.
20.1CONSTRUCTION
1
The frame must be of good quality drawn steel tube of circular or non-circular section, welded
or brazed together. If circular the outside diameter must not exceed 100mm. If non-circular the
maximum cross section shall not exceed 150mm. measured at right angles to any fl at surface.
2
The above does not restrict the swinging arm. The use of composite construction is forbidden
with the exception of the sidecar platform, i.e. Aluminium or carbon fibre honeycomb.
3
The use of Titanium or other similar ‘exotic’ materials in the construction of the frame, forks,
handlebars, swinging arm and wheel spindles is forbidden.
20.2DIMENSIONS
Width: The overall maximum shall be 1524mm (60") measured over the extremities of the
streamlining.
Wheelbase: The maximum shall be 1829mm (72") measured between the centres of the front and rear
wheels.
Track: The minimum shall be 760mm. The maximum shall be 1170mm. The track being the distance
measured between the rear and sidecar wheel, the point of measurement being at right angles to a
line drawn between the centre line of the front and rear wheels of the combination and a line at right
angles passing through the sidecar wheel.
Ground clearance: The minimum clear space to be maintained beneath the entire under surface of the
machine when loaded with fuel, driver and passenger must be 65mm.
AUTO CYCLE UNION HANDBOOK 2015
SCOOTER
447
20.3 STREAMLINING AND BODYWORK
1
This must be easily detachable for technical control purposes and be so designed and fitted to
allow complete liberty of movement to the driver and passenger when the vehicle is in motion
and when getting on and off the vehicle without any part of the streamlining being displaced.
2
Fairings and Rear view mirrors are allowed.
3
A solid and effective protection must be fitted between the driver and the engine to prevent
direct contact between the driver’s body or clothing from escaping flames or leaking oil.
4
Any type of seating may be used provided it is properly padded and securely fitted in place.
5
The extreme forward part of any streamlining must not project forward in plan beyond the
most forward part of the front tyre by more than 400mm.
6
The extreme rearward part of the streamlining must not project rearward in plan beyond the
most rearward part of the rear tyre by more than 400mm.
20.4DRIVEGUARDS
A metal guard must be fitted to prevent accidental contact with the chain or sprocket. Drive chains
must be guarded from sprocket to sprocket.
20.5
1
2
3
4
5
6
8.
ENGINE AND DRIVE UNITS
Permitted engine: 125cc. i.e. Aprillia
Drive must be transmitted to the road through the rear wheel of the machine.
The engine unit must be properly and safely finished, all studs, bolts, nuts and washers fitted
securely in place.
There shall be no evidence of oil leaks.
Any modifications made to the engine unit must not prejudice the safety of the driver and
passenger or other competitor or official and must be within the specifications of the engine
and drive unit regulations.
Cylinder Barrel and Crankcase
1. In regard to the shape, size, configuration, position and number of sports, external
appearance, materials and manufacture, the cylinder barrel must conform to the manufacturers
original specification (though not necessarily produced by the same manufacturer).
2. The bore size of a cylinder may be increased.
3. The cylinder used, must have been originally designed for the engine type, must retain the
original method and position of fixing, (the number and position of studs in the crankcase at
the gasket face must be as manufacturers original specification).
4. The crankcase to cylinder gasket face must be parallel to that of the original crankcase. The
crankcase porting may be altered.
5. The crankcase must retain the original mounting points, which must be used to support the
engine in the frame.
External dimensions of the crankcase must remain as manufacturers original specification.
6. The Crankshaft must remain as the manufacturers original specification, although the
connecting rod may be modified or substituted.
7. Alternative pistons may be used to change the characteristics of the engine. The cylinder
barrel gasket faces may be machined to allow for the difference in compression height of the
piston used.
Liquid cooling of the engine case will not be permitted.
20.6 ENGINE POSITION
The engine must be positioned between the steering headstock and the rear wheel.
20.7 INDUCTION SYSTEMS
Any form of induction system may be used with the exception of superchargers.
448
SCOOTER
AUTO CYCLE UNION HANDBOOK 2015
20.8 FUEL – UNLEADED
1
A fuel tank with a breather pipe must be fitted with a non-return valve and discharge into a
minimum of 500ml. catch bottle.
2
Fuel must be commercially available brand of petrol, as supplied from a wayside petrol station.
(Aviation fuel, Avgas, is not included).
3
No additives other than lubricants are permitted, (power boosters, octane boosters are
prohibited).
20.9STEERING
1
Steering will be through the front wheel only, by means of handlebars with a minimum width
of 450mm.
2
The minimum angle of rotation of the handlebars each side of the straight-ahead position must
be 30°, stops must be fitted to limit the angular movement of the handlebars to 65o. Whatever
the position of the handlebars and suspension, no part of the front wheel or forks must pass
within 20mm. of any bodywork or streamlining.
3
It is permissible to displace the steering head up to a maximum of 75mm. determined by
measuring the off set from the centre line of the rear wheel.
4
Machines with off set steering heads must maintain two tracks.
20.10 WHEELS AND TYRES
1
All wheels rims must be of metal construction and a maximum diameter of 407mm.
2
The wheel when fitted in position must rotate within 5° of the vertical plane.
3
At technical control all moulded treaded tyre must have a minimum of 1.6mm. of tread across
the entire original tread area. (recut moulded tyre are not permitted).
4
Sidecar wheels may be Kart type ‘slick’ tyre, the surface of the tyre must contain three or more
wear indicators positioned at 120o around the tyre circumference.
5
When at least two of these become worn on different parts of the tyre, the tyre may no longer
be used.
6
Wheel spindles must pass through the fork legs/swinging arm assemblies which must provide
a positive location for the spindle when assembled, split pin locking and/or nylon locking nuts
must be used to prevent the axle coming lose.
20.11 REAR SUSPENSION
1
The rear suspension, if fitted is to be the swinging arm type. Movement of the arm i.e. for the
purpose of chain adjustment can be by means of eccentric cams.
Note: any adjustment used must not allow the wheelbase to exceed the maximum permitted
dimension.
SECTION 21 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR CLASSIC
(GROUP 8) MOTORSCOOTER COMBINATIONS
Unless specifically mentioned in these Regulations the Standing Regulations for the
construction of (Group 7) Motor Scooter Regulations detailed above shall apply.
21.1INTRODUCTION
These Regulations specify the requirements for construction of Classic Motor scooter Combinations
for use in Road Races, Sprints and Hill Climbs.
21.2CONSTRUCTION
1
The chassis must incorporate, as an integral part, the complete Lambretta spine frame including
engine mountings.
AUTO CYCLE UNION HANDBOOK 2015
2
3
4
5
SCOOTER
449
The remainder of the chassis must be constructed of good quality seamless drawn steel tube of a
circular or non-circular section, welded together.
Reinforcement of the steering head is allowed to a maximum of 230mm from the centre line of
the steering head.
The use of composite construction is forbidden with the exception of the sidecar platform. (i.e.
Aluminium or carbon fibre skinned honeycomb).
The use of TITANIUM and similar “exotic” metals is forbidden in the construction of the
chassis, front forks, handlebars and wheel spindles. The use of light alloys is forbidden for
wheel spindles.
21.3DIMENSIONS
Width: The overall MAXIMUM shall be 1520mm.
21.4 STREAMLINING AND BODYWORK
1
The streamlining must be easily detachable for technical control and be so designed and fitted
to allow complete liberty of movement to the driver and passenger when the vehicle is in
motion and when getting on and off the vehicle, without any part of it having to be displaced.
2
Aerofoils or spoilers are not permitted.
3
Rear view mirrors are forbidden.
4
A solid and effective protection must be fitted between the driver and the engine and must
prevent direct contact between the driver’s body or clothing and escaping flames or leaking fuel
or oil.
5
Any type of seating may be used provided it is properly padded and securely fitted in place.
6
The extreme forward part of the streamlining must not project forward in plan beyond the
most forward part of the front tyre by more than 400mm.
7
The extreme rearward part of the streamlining must not project rearward in plan beyond the
most rearward part of the rear tyre by more than 400mm.
8
Whatever the position of the handlebars, there must be a clear space of at least 25mm between
the streamlining and the extremities of the handlebars, including any attachments thereto,
and a clear space of at least 20mm between the streamlining and any other part of the steering
mechanism or front wheel.
21.5 ENGINE AND DRIVE UNITS
1
The engine and drive unit must have originated from a Lambretta motor scooter.
2
The unit shall be properly and safely finished with all necessary studs, nuts, bolts and washers
securely fitted. There shall be no evidence of oil leaks.
3
The MAXIMUM PERMITTED bore is 70mm. The MAXIMUM PERMITTED stroke is 60mm.
4
Any modifications made must not prejudice the safety of the driver, any other competitor or
official and must be within the following parameters for the parts specified:
5
CYLINDER HEAD – Liquid cooling is not permitted.
6
CYLINDER BARREL – Cylinder barrel must be as manufacturer’s original specification either
a TS1 or RB22 kit barrel.
7
PORTS – Ports may be enlarged, but they may not be bridged nor the cylinder barrel slotted.
The position may not be changed, additional ports may not be provided, and the provision of
additional material on either the inside or the outside of the barrel is prohibited.
8
PACKING PIECES – The total thickness of any packing piece(s) or gasket(s) used between the
base of the cylinder and the crankcase must not exceed 10mm. Packing pieces may not be used
as a means of increasing the available port area.
21.6CRANKCASE
Crank casing must be as manufacturer’s original specification, except that:
450
SCOOTER
1
Modifications may be made to permit the use of a larger section tyre subject to the limitations
in Regulation 18 below.
Modifications may be made to any existing crankcase porting except that the provision of
additional material on either the inside or the outside of the casing is prohibited.
Notwithstanding the exception in B above, the provision of additional material to effect
genuine repairs to a crankcase will be permitted provided that the final dimensions and
appearance do not exceed the manufacturer’s original specification.
2
3
AUTO CYCLE UNION HANDBOOK 2015
21.7CRANKSHAFT
The crankshaft must be a commercially available type designed to fit a Lambretta motor scooter with
a MAXIMUM permitted stroke of 60mm and shall remain as manufacturer’s original specification,
except:
1
The ignition mounting may be altered.
2
The crankshaft may be “padded”.
21.8GEARCASE
1
The gearcase must be as manufacturer’s original specification except that a spacer maybe used
to facilitate the use of extra clutch plates.
2
The gearbox must be as manufacturer’s original specification for the engine type, except that
the original gear cluster may be altered to provide alternative ratios. The number of ratios must
remain unchanged.
Note: For the purposes of this Regulation, the ‘engine’ is deemed to comprise the cylinder barrel(s),
crankcase and all internal components within these units.
21.9 ENGINE POSITION
The engine unit must be in the original position.
21.10 INDUCTION SYSTEMS
The engine shall be normally aspirated.
21.11 WHEELS AND TYRES
1
All wheels must be of metal construction and be within an allowance of 5° from the vertical.
2
The diameter of the front and sidecar wheels MUST be 10 inches and the tyres thereon have
a MAXIMUM section of 5J. The diameter of the rear wheel MUST be 10 inches with a wider
section standard pattern rim permissible and allowing a MAXIMUM tyre size of 10 inches by
4.00.
3
At technical control ALL tyres must have moulded treads and must have a minimum depth of
tread of 1.6mm across the entire original tread area. Recut moulded tyres are not permitted.
21.12 REAR SUSPENSION
Rear suspension is not permitted.
21.13 CONTROL LEVERS
1
All handlebar levers must be ball ended, the ball to be at least 19mm in diameter and to be a
permanently fixed integral part of the lever. Each control lever (both hand and foot) must be
mounted on an independent pivot. Handlebar grips must be securely fixed to the ends of the
handlebar.
AUTO CYCLE UNION HANDBOOK 2015
SCOOTER
451
The following information does not form part of the Standing Regulations but is provided as a
quick guide to the requirements of the SRs.
It is hoped, by the promoters of this class, that this limited specification will enable close racing at an
affordable cost. For the benefit of all who compete in the class, cheating will not be tolerated.
1
Complete Lambretta spine frame.
2
Engine in original position driving the rear wheel.
3
Lambretta cast iron or TS1 barrel.
4
No water-cooling for head or barrel.
5
Porting to Standard class specification, i.e. no bridged ports or extra ports.
6
Maximum stroke 60mm. Maximum bore 70mm.
7
No ‘alloy’ welding of barrels.
8
Passenger exit can be in front of or behind the sidecar wheel, whichever is preferred.
9
The use of titanium or similar ‘exotic’ material is forbidden.
10 Treaded tyres only at all times.
11 Front and sidecar wheels 10 × 5J maximum.
12 Rear wheel must be standard pattern rim or wide version with 4.00 × 10 maximum scooter tyre.
13 Maximum chassis dimensions – wheelbase 1650mm – width 1520mm.
Track – minimum 760mm. Ground clearance when fully loaded – 65mm.
14 Centre hub steering and sidecar wheel steering is forbidden.
15 Independently operated brakes on front and rear wheels – sidecar brake is optional.
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertisement